NDA-24271
ISSUE 1
STOCK #152007
®
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
JANUARY, 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
1
i
1
ii
1
1
iii
1
1
1
iv
1
v
1
1
vi
1
1
vii
viii
ix
1
1
1
1
1
1
x
1
1
xi
1
1
xii
xiii
xiv
xv
xvi
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
1
5
1
1
6
1
1
1
7
1
8
1
1
9
1
1
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Revision Sheet 1/5
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
1
99
1
1
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Revision Sheet 2/5
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
1
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Revision Sheet 3/5
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
1
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
ISSUE 7
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Revision Sheet 4/5
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
1
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ISSUE 1
ISSUE 2
ISSUE 6
ISSUE 3
ISSUE 7
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
DATE
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 5
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Revision Sheet 5/5
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEAX2000 IVS2
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ATTENDANT CONSOLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SN610 ATTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Attendant Called/Calling Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Attendant Call Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Attendant Console Lockout – Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Audible Indication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Common Route Indial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Incoming Call Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pushbutton Calling – Attendant Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Serial Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ATTENDANT OVERFLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ATTENDANT OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
AUTHORIZATION CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Busy In/Busy Out – ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Call Waiting Indication – ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Delay Announcement – ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Hunt Past No Answer – ACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Immediate Overflow – ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Priority Queuing – ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Queue Size Control – ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Silent Monitor – ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AUTOMATIC RECALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
AUTOMATIC WAKE-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
BACKGROUND MUSIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
BROKER'S CALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
CALL BACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
CALL FORWARDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Attendant Call Forwarding Set-Up and Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Call Forwarding – All Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Call Forwarding – Busy Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Call Forwarding – No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Call Forwarding – Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Split Call Forwarding – All Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Split Call Forwarding – No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Call Forwarding – Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Group Diversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CALL PARK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Call Park - System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Call Park - Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
CALL PICKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Call Pickup - Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Call Pickup - Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Call Pickup - Designated Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
CALL REDIRECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page ii
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CALL TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Call Transfer - All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Call Transfer - Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CALLER ID CLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
CALLER ID DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CAMP-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CENTREX COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CHECK IN/CHECK OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CLASS OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
CODE RESTRICTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
CONFERENCE (SIX/TEN PARTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
CONSULTATION HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
DATA LINE SECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
DELAYED RINGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
DIAL BY NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
DIAL CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
DIRECT DATA ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
DID Call Waiting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
DID Digit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Busy Out Status Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Do Not Disturb Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Message Waiting Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Room Cutoff Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Wake Up No Answer Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DISTINCTIVE RINGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
DO NOT DISTURB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Do Not Disturb - Hotel/Motel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Do Not Disturb - System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ELAPSED CALL TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ENHANCED 911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
EXECUTIVE CALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
FEATURE ACTIVATION FROM SECONDARY EXTENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
GROUP CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Automatic Conference (6/10 Party) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
2 Way Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
GROUP LISTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
HANDSFREE DIALING AND MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Dual Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Non-Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
HOTEL/MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
HOTLINE - INSIDE/OUTSIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
HOUSE PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
INTERCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Manual Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Automatic Intercom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Dial Intercom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
LAST NUMBER REDIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
LEAST COST ROUTING - 3/6 DIGIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
LINE LOCKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
LINE PRESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
MAID STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (MAT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
MESSAGE REGISTRATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
MESSAGE REMINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
MESSAGE WAITING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
CCSA Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Code Calling Equipment Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Dictation Equipment Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Foreign Exchange (FX) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Radio Paging Equipment Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page iv
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
MUSIC ON HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
NAILED-DOWN CONNECTION - DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
NIGHT SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Attendant Night Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Call Rerouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Night Connection - Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Night Connection - Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
OFF-HOOK ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE (OAI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
PAD LOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
POOLED LINE ACCESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
POWER FAILURE TRANSFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
PRIORITY CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
PRIVACY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Direct Privacy Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Manual Privacy Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
PRIVATE LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Automatic Idle Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Called Station Status Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Calling Name and Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Dynamic Dial Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Handsfree Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
I-Hold/I-Use Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Microphone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Multiple Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Mute Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Off-Hook Voice Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Prime Line Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Recall Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Relay Control Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Ring Frequency Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Ringing Line Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Q-SIG CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
REMOTE HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
REMOTE PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
RESERVE POWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
ROOM CUTOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
ROOM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ROUTE ADVANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
SAVE AND REPEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
SET RELOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
SINGLE DIGIT DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE (VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
STACK DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
STATION HUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Station Hunting - Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Station Hunting - Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Station Hunting - Secretarial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
STATION SPEED DIALING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
STEP CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
SYSTEM SPEED DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
SYSTEM TRAFFIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
TENANT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
TIE LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
TIMED QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
TIMED REMINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
TRUNK QUEUING - OUTGOING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Busy In/Busy Out - UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Call Waiting Indication - UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Delay Announcement - UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Hunt Past No Answer - UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Immediate Overflow - UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Priority Queuing - UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Queue Size Control - UCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Silent Monitor - UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP) - VOICE AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
VOICE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page vi
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
VOICE MAIL PRIVATE PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
WHISPER PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
FIXED FUNCTION KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
APPENDIX 3: REGISTRATION OF ID CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
→
E
E
E
→
E
→
—
→
→
→
→
→
E
Asynchronous Data Switching
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
E
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
→
E
→
E
→
→
→
E
→
E
→
E
E
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
E Note
—
→
→
→
→
E
Back Up CPU
→
E
E
E
→
→
→
→
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
E
→
→
→
→ Note
→
→
→
E
Note
→
→
→
—
—
—
→
→
→
X
Data Hotline
Data Hunting
Data Interface - Automatic Answer
→
→ Note
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
→
→
→
E
E
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
—
→
→
→
→
E
Do Not Disturb-Data Line
→
→
→
E
→
E
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
→
→
→
→ Note
→ Note
→
→
→
E
→
→
→
→
→
Keyboard Dialing-Data Adapter
→
—
→
E
→
→
→ Note
→
E Note
→ Note
E
E
→
→ Note
E
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
→
→
→
E
→
→
E
→
→ Note
→
→
→
→
E
→
→
→
→
→
→ Note
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
E
→
→
→
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
→
→
→
→ Note
→ Note
→
→
→ Note
→ Note
→
→
E
X
Simultaneous Voice and Data Transmission
—
→
E
→
→
→
→
→
E
E
→
E
Synchronous Data Switching
—
→
E
→
—
→
→
→
E
Terminal Attribute Data Assignment
→
→
→
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF FEATURES
X = available
— = not available
E = enhanced or changed
→ = carried over to next level software
FEATURE
NEAX2000 IVS
(1900 Series R2)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E
→
E
E
→
→
→
→
→
E
→
E
E
→
→
→
Note: This feature is not available in NEAX EXPRESS.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACCOUNT CODE
ACCOUNT CODE
General Description
This feature, when used with Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), allows station users and Attendants
to enter a cost accounting or client billing code (up to 16 digits) into the system.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To enter an Account Code from a station before accessing an outside line
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Enter the Account Code feature access code or press the Account Code feature access key.
3. Enter the Account Code.
4. Receive dial tone and dial the desired number (including outside line access code).
To enter an Account Code while connected to an outside line
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Press Account Code feature access key and conversation continues.
2. Enter the Account Code.
• From the Attendant Console
1. While connected to an outside line, press the START key only if an outgoing call.
2. Enter the Account Code feature access code.
3. Enter the Account Code.
4. Dial the desired station number.
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive feature dial tone.
2. Enter the Account Code feature access code.
3. Enter the Account Code and receive feature dial tone again.
4. Return to the original outside line by pressing the FLASH key (or momentarily pressing the hookswitch)
OR
Dial a station number to transfer the call.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACCOUNT CODE
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of digits in an Account Code is 10 when using the NEAX2400 SMDR format; oth-
erwise, the maximum is 16. There is no limitation to the number of Account Codes used per system. The
feature access code for Account Code entry can be one to three digits.
2. A station user can enter an Account Code consisting of fewer digits than the maximum length defined and
indicate the end of the entry by pressing the # key. Therefore, the # key cannot be part of an Account Code.
3. Account Code entry can be performed with an outside party on Consultation Hold. In this case, feature dial
tone is received instead of dial tone after entering the Account Code.
4. Stations are assigned this feature through Class of Service.
5. Account Codes can be output in the SMDR record for calls handled by Trunk Queuing – Outgoing during
connection to the outside line.
6. When multiple Account Codes are entered for the same call, only the last code entered will be recorded by
SMDR.
7. If the system is set to comply with KF Registration, this feature only allows an Account Code to be input
while the outside line is seized.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 2
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADD-ON MODULE
ADD-ON MODULE
General Description
This feature allows the Add-On Module to be combined with a Multiline Terminal when there are insufficient
line or trunk keys provided at the Multiline Terminal.
When the Add-On Module unit keys are programmed as line/trunk keys, the additional 25 lines/trunks and the
existing lines/trunks set for the Multiline Terminal can be accessed directly (maximum of 49 lines/ trunks).
The station speed dialing function can be assigned for all keys on the Add-On Module unit. Also, one of the last
3 keys can be used as a Day/ Night change key.
Station Application
term
All Multiline Terminals (D
Series III/Series E).
Operating Procedure
The operating procedure as an Add-On Module is the same as that of the Multiline Terminal.
If any key on the Add-On Module unit is used for station speed dialing, the operating procedure is the same as
station speed dialing.
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of Add-On Module units, per Firmware Processor (FP) is 32. The maximum number
per system is 32.
2. Only one Add-On Module can be connected to a Multiline Terminal providing a maximum of up to 41 line/
term
trunk keys (16 line/trunk keys on D
Series III/Series E and 25 line/trunk keys on Add-On Module).
3. A Multiline Terminal and an associated Add-On Module unit must be contained in the same PIM.
4. The total of Multiline Terminals and Add-On Module units used as Add-On Modules:
•
•
MP without expansion memory (standard) : 256 per system
MP with expansion memory (optional) : 512 per system
5. Trunks and lines (Prime Lines of other Multiline Terminals, virtual lines, and single lines) can be assigned
to the Add-On Module unit lines and keys.
6. The following can also be set for line/trunk keys other than those mentioned in 5 above: house phones, Hot-
lines, Manual Intercoms, Automatic Intercoms, and Dial Intercoms.
7. Lamp indication on the Add-On Module unit is the same as that of Multiline Terminals.
8. Boss/Secretary Transfer and override functions are available for line keys on the Add-On Module.
9. If a line/trunk on the Add-On Module unit is called, the ringer of the connected Multiline Terminal rings.
The Multiline Terminal volume is used to control the ringer volume.
10. Data lines cannot be set to any line/trunk keys on the Add-On Module.
11. If the resident system program is used to set system data, the Add-On Module unit will be assigned as 16
lines on the Multiline Terminal.
12. For details on any keys usable for the station speed dialing function, refer to the Station Speed Dialing fea-
ture. One of the last 3 keys can be used as Day/Night key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADD-ON MODULE
13. A DLC Card must be provided when using the Add-On Module. The Add-On Module unit uses one port
of the card.
14. Up to 25 lines and trunks can be assigned for the Add-On Module. The delayed ringing function is only
available for the first 16 lines and trunks assigned.
term
term
15. For each 24-button D
available per FP.
(Series III) and 32-button D
(Series E), there will be one less Add-On Module
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALARM INDICATIONS
ALARM INDICATIONS
General Description
Faults are indicated by the Major/Minor (MJ/MN) lamps located on the AC/DC Power Supply and, optionally,
an external alarm display unit.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The following table shows a standard pattern of the faults that can be detected and their alarm indications.
If required, the following alarm indications (MJ, MN, or no indication) can be changed on an individual fault
basis. Refer to the Maintenance Manual for more information.
Alarm Indications
AC-DC Power
(PZ-PW121)
External Alarm
Display
Multiline Terminal
Alarm
Contents of Alarm
System Initialization
MJ
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MN
X
MJ
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MN
X
MJ
MN
—
—
X
X
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
Number of stack overflows was more than a fixed number
MP - FP/AP communication failure
FP/AP down
X
X
X
X
X
X
DTI line failure
DCH link failure
X
X
CCH link failure
X
X
X
X
Number of lockout stations was more than a fixed number
SMDR output buffer memory overflow
DLC failure
X
X
X
X
AC/DC power supply (PZ-PW121) Note 1
•
•
•
AC input down
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
X Note 2 X Note 2
DC output down (+5V, –27V)
Fuse blown (+5V, –27V)
X
X
Alarm for pre-determined time
Note 1: MJ ALARM is always displayed for power failure regardless of programming.
Note 2: When FP/DLC, which accommodates the Multiline Terminal, becomes unusual, Alarm Indications cannot
be displayed.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALARM INDICATIONS
2. Normal operation of each Firmware Processor (FP) is indicated by a green flashing (120 int) “run” LED
located on the FP.
3. Normal operation of the Main Processor (MP) is indicated by a green flashing (120 int) “run” LED located
on the MP.
4. Normal operation of each AC/DC power supply is indicated by a steadily lit green LED located on the AC/
DC power supply.
5. In case that PBX is stopped at predetermined time, when PBX starts, fault message is stored and alarm is
sent.
6. Alarm indication to Multiline Terminal lamp;
a. The maximum number of Multiline Terminals per system is two.
b. In case of MN alarm: Red flashing (60 int)
c. In case of MJ alarm: Red lighting (included MN + MJ)
d. When system/FP is reset after lighting alarm lamp, alarm indication will go off.
(Fault information remains.)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 6
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
General Description
The LCD display on Multiline Terminal is used to provide alphanumeric information including clock/calendar
and call processing information.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
Displays are automatically provided by the system once programmed; however, a Multiline Terminal user's
name can be changed as required from the associated Multiline Terminal.
To program a name at the Multiline Terminal to which the name applies
1. Press the Speaker key and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Name Assignment access code and receive special dial tone.
3. Using the keypad, press the key with the desired letter to display the first letter on the key. The display will
indicate the numerical designation. Subsequent presses will advance through the letters on that key. The fol-
lowing table can be used as a guide to indicate the key and the number of presses required to display num-
bers, letters, spaces, and periods.
Dial Pad Keys
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
G
H
I
5
5
J
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
#
#
#
#
#
#
1
2
3
4
5
1
0
P
r
e
s
s
●
●
A
B
D
E
F
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
S
P
A
C
E
K
L
● C
●
SPACE
SPACE
4. When the desired letter is displayed, pressing the Transfer key will change the letter to a lower case letter
(default is upper case). Press the Hold key to enter that letter and advance to the next entry.
5. Repeat the previous two steps until the desired name is displayed and entered. A maximum of eight letters
can be entered.
6. Press the Speaker key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of stations that can be provided with a user's name display is 512. The maximum
number of characters per name is 16, (including spaces). The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) can be used to register or change a name. A Multiline Termi-
nal can register or change the name assignment of that individual Multiline Terminal.
2. User names can be assigned to stations that do not have an LCD display using the MAT or CAT.
3. The trunk route name display is provided on a trunk route basis. The maximum amount of characters in the
trunk name display is four. The maximum number of trunk routes assignable is 63. Only the MAT or CAT
can be used to register or change a trunk name display.
4. The clock/calendar displays the system clock and calendar on the bottom line of the LCD display, and is set
using the MAT, CAT, or SN610 ATTCON.
5. There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed: overwriting with a new name, or by
inserting a blank space as the first character to delete the programmed name.
6. The Attendant Console cannot be assigned a name. This feature applies only to Multiline Terminals and Sin-
gle Line Telephones. A call from the Attendant Console will always show OPRon the top line of a Multiline
Terminals LCD display.
7. Station name assignment data is retained when there is a system reset or a power failure.
8. About LCD displays, refer to APPENDIX 2.
9. Refer also to the Proprietary Multiline Terminal Features and Specifications for details on Called Station
Status Display and Calling Name and Number Display.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 8
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANALOG PORT ADAPTER
ANALOG PORT ADAPTER
General Description
This feature allows an Analog Port Adapter unit combined with a Multiline Terminal to connect to an analog
terminal such as an analog telephone, Modem, and PC with built-in Modem.
There are two communication modes for the terminal connected via the Analog Port Adapter as shown below:
1. Single Port Mode
A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal share the same port. In this mode, the Multiline Terminal and
the analog terminal cannot be used simultaneously.
2. Dual Port Mode
A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal use different ports. In this mode, the Multiline Terminal and
the analog terminal can be used simultaneously.
Station Application
term
Multiline Terminals (D
Series III/Series E).
Operating Procedure
Single Port Mode
• To originate a call from an analog terminal without keypad via the Analog Port Adapter
1. Lift the handset of a Multiline Terminal and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone. The LED of the Prime Line on the Multiline Ter-
minal lights green.
3. After the called party answers, lift the handset of the analog terminal to switch over to the analog terminal.
4. Replace the handset of the Multiline Terminal.
5. Converse.
• To originate a call from a single line telephone (PB) via the Analog Port Adapter
1. Lift the handset of a single line telephone and receive dial tone. The LED of the Prime Line on the Multiline
Terminal lights green.
2. Dial the desired station number from the single line telephone and receive ringback tone.
3. The called party answers; converse.
• To answer an incoming call to the Prime Line from an analog terminal via the Analog Port Adapter
1. An analog terminal rings when a call terminates to the Prime Line on the Multiline Terminal.
2. Lift the handset of the analog terminal. The LED of the Prime Line on the Multiline Terminal lights green.
3. Converse.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANALOG PORT ADAPTER
• To answer an incoming call to the secondary extension from an analog terminal via the Analog Port Adapter
1. An analog terminal does not ring when a call terminates the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal.
2. Press the line key of the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal and lift the handset of the Multiline
Terminal. The LED of the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal lights green.
3. Lift the handset of the analog terminal to switch over to the analog terminal.
4. Replace the handset of the Multiline Terminal.
5. Converse.
Dual Port Mode
An analog terminal connected via the Analog Port Adapter can be used independently of the Multiline Terminal.
Refer to the User's Guide for each terminal for operating procedures.
Service Conditions
1. The following analog terminal can be connected to the APR unit:
•
Single Port Mode: Single Line Telephone (PB only), Facsimile, Modem for PC Dialing Connection
Unit
•
Dual Port Mode: Single Line Telephone (PB only), Facsimile, Voice Mail System with analog inter-
face, Modem with NCU
2. In Single Port Mode, the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal cannot be used simultaneously. When
the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal go off hook simultaneously, the analog terminal has prece-
dence.
3. In Dual Port Mode, the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal can be used simultaneously.
4. A Multiline terminal/analog terminal cannot be identified on the LED in Single Port Mode. The LED indi-
cation on the Multiline Terminal when the analog terminal is in use is as follows:
•
•
Single Port Mode: The LED of the Prime Line lights green. Note
Dual Port Mode: The LED of the secondary extension lights red.
Note: When answering the incoming call to the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal and switching
over to the analog terminal, the LED of the secondary extension lights green.
5. A Multiline Terminal/analog terminal cannot be identified on the LCD on the Multiline Terminal in Single/
Dual Port Mode.
6. The ringing pattern is fixed as 1 sec. ON - 2 sec. OFF. The distinctive ringing pattern cannot be provided
for Single/Dual Port Mode.
7. The service feature with hooking operation is not allowed from the analog terminal for Single/Dual Port
Mode.
8. In Dual Port Mode, the analog terminal cannot originate from the secondary extension and cannot answer
the incoming call to the secondary extension.
9. In Dual Port Mode, a call cannot be switched over from the Multiline Terminal to the analog terminal, or
vice versa.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 10
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE
General Description
This feature allows station users to record messages on Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) cards. When a sta-
tion user dials the feature access code for this feature, the user receives the corresponding message from the sys-
tem.
Also Announcement Service can be used to provide a voice message in the following cases:
•
•
An incoming C.O. line/Tie line call has been transferred and encounters a busy or no answer condition.
An incoming DID line/Tie line call has been terminated to a station and encounters a busy or no answer
condition.
•
•
Internal Recorded Message in place of Music on Hold
Night Announcement
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To access
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the applicable Announcement Service access code.
3. Receive the message.
To erase an announcement
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Announcement Service delete access code.
3. Receive feature dial tone.
4. Dial the Announcement Service group number.
5. Restore the handset.
To record
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Announcement Service record access code.
3. Dial the Announcement Service group number and the DAT card number.
4. Receive 3 seconds of service set tone.
5. Record a message.
6. Restore the handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE
To record/replay/delete for each Digital Announcement Trunk card
• To record a message
1. Go off-hook and receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk record access code and Digital Announcement card number. Three
seconds of tone will be supplied.
3. Record the message (maximum duration – 60 seconds).
4. Restore handset.
• To replay a message
1. Go off-hook and receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk replay access code and Digital Announcement card number.
3. Receive a message.
4. Restore handset.
• To delete a message
1. Go off-hook and receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk delete access code and Digital Announcement card number.
3. Receive Service Set Tone.
4. Restore handset.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 5 different access codes can be assigned. There is a limit of 10 announcement cards for each
of the 5 different access codes. When recording an announcement, each announcement card must be record-
ed individually.
2. This feature is supported by internal announcement circuits of MP card and an announcement card(s) (PN-
2DAT/4DAT) installed in the system.
3. Either single or multiple connection to each announcement can be made on a system-programming basis,
and in the case of multiple connections the secondary station cannot be connected to the top of the message.
4. Tie Lines can access the Announcement Service.
5. Each time a station is connected to an announcement card, the message will be from 60 to 64 seconds. The
station will then be disconnected.
6. The duration of an announcement is limited to 60 seconds.
7. The system can be equipped with up to 128 Digital Announcement Trunk circuits for all announcement fea-
tures. There are 2 circuits on MP Card, 2 circuits on each 2DAT Card, and 4 circuits on each 4DAT Card.
8. Announcement Service can be used to provide a voice message when an incoming C.O. line/Tie line call
has been transferred by a station and encounter a busy or no answer condition. The busy condition results
in disconnect after three repetitions of the message.
a. Only 1 message of up to 60 seconds can be recorded on each individual voice recording memory card.
b. In this application, a minimum of 2 circuits of Digital Announcement Trunk Cards are needed: one
for a busy condition and one for a no-answer condition.
c. More than 1 circuit of Digital Announcement Trunk Card may be used, depending on traffic
conditions.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 12
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE
d. Call Forwarding, if set, has priority over this feature.
e. Digital Announcement Trunk Cards can be shared among tenants. Each announcement is assigned on
a per tenant basis.
f. This feature does not function on Attendant transferred calls.
9. A voice message in place of Music-On-Hold can be provided when a call has been placed on hold.
a. Different messages can be programmed on a tenant basis.
b. Different messages can be programmed depending on the type of line (C.O. line, Tie line or station)
on Hold.
c. More than one connection can be made to a Digital Announcement Trunk Card circuit for this
purpose. Secondary connections are made to the message, even if the message is in the middle of a
cycle.
d. The announcement is repeated until the call is removed from hold.
10. A voice message can be sent to incoming C.O. calls during day or night mode.
a. Different messages can be programmed on each C.O. line.
b. Different messages can be programmed for day/night.
c. More than one connection can be made to a Digital Announcement Trunk Card circuit. Secondary
connections can be made in the middle of a message.
d. Announcements may be programmed to be repeated after an interval of from 4 to 120 seconds (in 4
second increments.)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANSWER KEY
ANSWER KEY
General Description
An Answer Key is provided on all Multiline Terminals. The Answer Key can be used to answer incoming calls
on outside lines, and primary or secondary extensions. When the Answer Key is used to answer an incoming
call with a call in progress, the first party is placed on hold and the second party is connected. If the Answer Key
is pressed while in a three-party call, the user can alternate between each party and a Broker’s Call is established.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To answer an incoming ringing call with a call in progress
1. Receive incoming indication.
2. Press the Answer key. The original call is placed on Non-Exclusive Hold.
3. Converse with the connected party.
4. To return to the call on hold after the second call is completed, press the line key associated with the call on
hold.
To answer a Camp-On call (with a call in progress)
1. Receive Camp-On tone.
2. Press the Answer key. The original call is placed on Hold.
3. Subsequently pressing the Answer key alternates the active and holding parties.
4. Converse with the Camped-On party.
5. When one conversation is complete, go on-hook.
6. The party on Hold will recall immediately.
Service Conditions
1. The Answer key’s LED will flash for Camped-On calls.
2. The priority of Ringing Line Pickup and Ringing Assignment calls using the Answer key is as follows:
a. Voice Call
b. Incoming external call and recall to the primary extension
c. Incoming external call and recall to the trunk line appearance
d. Incoming internal call to the primary extension
e. Incoming calls to the secondary extension
3. When a Multiline Terminal user is monitoring tones provided by the system (extension dial tone, busy tone,
etc.) and uses the Answer key to answer an incoming call, the first call will not be placed on hold (the tone
connection will be abandoned).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 14
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANSWER KEY
4. When a Broker’s Call is in progress, the Answer key cannot be used to answer incoming calls, but will al-
ternate between the existing calls when pressed.
5. When a three-party Conference is in progress, pressing the Answer key splits the Conference and establishes
a Broker’s Call. The Answer key has no effect on a 4-party conference.
6. Camped-on calls are answered by the Answer key prior to incoming ringing calls.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING
ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING
General Description
This feature allows a station user to ask an Attendant for assistance in originating a call. Three methods are
available: non-delay, delay, and passing dial tone.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Non-delay operation
1. The Attendant answers an operator call by pressing the Answer or ATND key.
2. The caller provides a call request.
3. The Attendant dials the trunk access code.
4. The Attendant dials the desired telephone number.
5. The Attendant presses the RELEASE (or START) key.
6. The parties are connected.
Delay operation
1. The Attendant answers an operator call by pressing the Answer or ATND key.
2. The caller provides a call request.
3. The Attendant presses the RELEASE key.
4. The station user receives reorder tone.
5. The station user then restores the handset and waits for a recall from the Attendant.
6. The Attendant presses the LOOP key.
7. The Attendant dials the trunk access code.
8. The Attendant dials the desired telephone number.
9. The Attendant presses the Answer (or START) key.
10. The Attendant dials the station user's number.
11. The station user answers the call.
12. The Attendant presses the RELEASE key.
13. The parties are connected.
Passing dial tone
1. The Attendant answers an operator call by pressing the Answer or ATND key.
2. The caller provides a call request.
3. The Attendant dials the trunk access code.
4. The Attendant presses the RELEASE key.
5. Dial tone is supplied to the caller.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 16
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING
Service Conditions
1. During delay operation, the Attendant may release the connection either before or after the called station
answers.
2. If the call was processed using non-delay or passing dial tone operation, there will not be an Automatic Re-
call for Station-to-Trunk calls when the called party does not answer.
3. If the call was processed using non-delay or passing dial tone operation, an Automatic Recall will be initi-
ated for Station-to-Tie line and Trunk-to-Tie line calls when answer supervision is provided on the tie line
and the called party does not answer.
4. Fully restricted station users cannot be connected by the Attendant to an outside line using this feature. At-
tempts are routed to reorder tone.
5. Non-delay operation allows the Attendant to place an outgoing call for a station user who reached the At-
tendant by dialing 0, without requiring the station user to hang up. Delay operation requires that the station
hang up.
6. When an Attendant attempts to set up a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection between trunks that do not provide an-
swer supervision, the connection is denied and the RELEASE key has no effect.
7. The Attendant can dial the called number for the station user or, using the passing dial tone method, allow
the station user to dial.
8. When Least Cost Routing (LCR) is programmed, the Attendant cannot pass dial tone. The call must be com-
pleted using delay or non-delay operation.
9. The Attendant cannot pass dial tone to a station whose route restriction class prevents the station from re-
ceiving incoming calls on the trunk route selected.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CAMP-ON
ATTENDANT CAMP-ON
General Description
This feature permits the Attendant to hold an incoming call in a special mode when the desired station for the
transfer is busy. The Attendant sends a Camp-On tone to the busy station. When that station becomes idle, it is
automatically alerted and connected to the waiting party.
Station Application
Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
To activate a Camp-On from the Attendant Console
1. Dial the desired station and receive busy tone.
2. Press the RELEASE key.
3. Camp-On tone is sent to the station and Camp-On is set.
To cancel a Camp-On from the Attendant Console
1. Press the LOOP key corresponding to held call.
2. Press the DEST key and receive busy tone.
3. Press the CANCL key and automatically return to the held party.
To re-enter the call that has been Camped-On from the Attendant Console before being recalled
1. Press the LOOP key corresponding to held call.
2. The busy station number and name are displayed for six seconds in the left side of the console’s display (if
provided by System Data).
3. Converse with the held party.
OR
1. Dial the Call Pickup-Direct feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
2. Dial the extension number of desired busy station.
3. Converse with the held party.
To answer an Attendant Camp-On
• From a Single Line telephone
1. Receive a Camp-On tone.
2. Hang up and receive incoming ring (existing call is abandoned).
3. Lift the handset and converse.
OR
1. Receive a Camp-On tone.
2. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). The call in progress is placed on Consultation
Hold.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 18
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CAMP-ON
3. Dial the Call Hold feature access code. The original call is placed on Call Hold and the station user is auto-
matically connected to the Camp-On call.
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Receive a Camp-On tone.
2. Hang up and receive incoming ring.
3. Lift the handset and converse.
OR
1. Receive a Camp-On tone.
2. Press the Answer key. The call in progress is placed on Call Hold and the Camp-On call is connected.
Service Conditions
1. Attendant Camp-On can be set when the busy station is connected to another station or trunk in a two-party
connection.
2. Attendant Camp-On is denied if the busy station is dialing, in Line Lockout, receiving a system generated
tone, a Data Station protected against any override by DND key, currently has a Camped On call, or any of
the following features are activated on the busy station:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Override
Call Transfer
Camp-On
•
•
•
•
•
Consultation Hold
Data Line Security
Executive Override
Hold
Conference
Privacy
Paging
Voice Call
When Camp-On is denied, the Attendant will receive reorder tone.
3. The maximum number of simultaneous Camp-Ons per Attendant without loop release is the same as the
number of loop keys assigned (SN610 ATTCON/SN716 DESKCON). When Attendant loop release is pro-
vided, the maximum number is 12.
4. The station receiving the Camp-On can answer using the Call Hold feature or Answer Key feature. Repeated
use of these features allows the station to alternate between the calls (Broker's Call).
5. Calls that remain Camped-On for longer than a predetermined time will initiate an Automatic Recall to the
Attendant that set the Camp-On.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN610 ATTCON
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN610 ATTCON
General Description
The Attendant Console (SN610 ATTCON) operates on a switched-loop basis with a maximum of 6 Attendant
loops terminating at each console on the associated interface card. The Attendant uses these loops for answering,
originating, holding, extending, and re-entering calls. When Attendant loop release is used, the number of loops
is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each console. The following pages describe the features asso-
ciated with the Attendant Console.
An alternate Attendant Position is described under Multiline Terminal Attendant Position.
Station Application
Attendant Console (SN610 ATTCON).
Operating Procedure
Detailed operating procedures are provided in Attendant Console User’s Guide.
Service Conditions
1. Each Firmware Processor (FP) can support up to 8 Attendant Consoles (SN610 ATTCON/SN716
DESKCON). A maximum of 8 Attendant Consoles (SN610 ATTCON/SN716 DESKCON) can be support-
ed per system.
2. Each Attendant Console requires a 2-pair cable. This cable cannot be longer than 4000 feet (1200 meters).
SN716 DESKCON
General Description
The Attendant Console (SN716 DESKCON) operates on a switched-loop basis with a maximum of 6 Attendant
loops terminating at each console on the associated Interface card. The Attendant uses these loops for answering,
originating, holding, extending, and re-entering calls. When Attendant loop release is used, the number of loops
is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each console.
For the applicable features and specifications associated with the SN716 DESKCON, refer to the following pag-
es which describe the SN610 ATTCON features and specifications.
Station Application
Attendant Console (SN716 DESKCON).
Operating Procedure
The same operating procedures as the SN610 ATTCON are applied for each feature.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 20
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Called/Calling Name Display
Service Conditions
1. Each Firmware Processor (FP) can support up to 8 Attendant Consoles (SN610 ATTCON/SN716
DESKCON). A maximum of 8 Attendant Consoles (SN610 ATTCON/SN716 DESKCON) can be support-
ed per system.
2. Each SN716 DESKCON uses a 3-pair cable. This cable cannot be longer than 4000 feet (1200 meters).
3. The SN716 DESKCON is equipped with an Alarm LED. This LED will flash for Minor Alarms and light
steadily for Major Alarms. Refer to Maintenance Administration Terminal, Fault Messages for more infor-
mation. Refer to the following chart for cable distances.
4. Refer to the following chart for cable distances:
With PW00
1000 feet (304 meters)
1000 feet (304 meters)
With AC/DC Adapter
4000 feet (1219 meters)
1000 feet (304 meters)
4 port DLC and 2 DLCC
8 port DLC
Note: The SN716 DESKCON uses the PW00 card mounted in the PBX, or the Dterm Series E AC/DC Adapter,
not both.
5. The SN716 DESKCON does not support the Lockout feature. Position Busy replaces the Lockout feature.
6. The system does not support Busy Lamp Field on the keypad.
7. The system does not support REC, EMG, TKSL, SVC, MODE key on the console.
8. The following key assignments are fixed and cannot be changed by system programming:
PAGE, BV, CALL PARK, SC, START, MUTE.
Attendant Called/Calling Name Display
General Description
This feature provides a display of the calling/called party's name on the Attendant Console LCD for Attendant
Called/Calling Name Display. On attendant-to-station calls, the LCD display the name assigned to the primary
extension of the station. On attendant-to-trunk calls, the LCD displays the name assigned to the trunk route of
the trunk.
Station Application
Attendant Console.
Operating Procedure
Displays are automatically provided by the system, once programmed.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 512 stations can be provided with a user's name display. The maximum number of characters
per name is 16 (including spaces). The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or Customer Admin-
istration Terminal (CAT) can be used to register or change a name. Multiline Terminal users can record or
change the name assignment for their own individual Multiline Terminal.
2. User names can be assigned to stations that do not have an LCD display (including Single Line Stations).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Called/Calling Number
3. The trunk name display is provided on a trunk route basis. The maximum amount of characters in the trunk
name display is four. The maximum number of trunk names assignable is 63. Only the MAT or CAT can
be used to record or change a trunk name.
4. There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed: Overwriting with a new name or erasing
it by inserting a blank space as the first character.
5. The Attendant Console cannot be assigned a name. This feature applies only to Multiline Terminals, Single
Line Telephones and trunk routes.
6. Station and trunk name assignment data is retained in case of a system reset or power failure.
7. Refer to the Alphanumeric Display Features and Specifications for the details of programming a name from
a Multiline Terminal.
Attendant Called/Calling Number
General Description
This feature provides a display of the station number and station name on the Attendant Console during an At-
tendant-to-Station connection. During an Attendant-to-Trunk connection, the same display shows the trunk
route designation and a trunk identification code (4 digits).
Operating Procedure
Display is automatically provided during Attendant-to-Station connections and Attendant-to-trunk connections.
Service Conditions
1. The station number is displayed on the top line of the console's digital display during an Attendant-to-station
connection.
2. When Call Forwarding has rerouted an Attendant-to-Station call, the number of the station where the call
has been rerouted is displayed, rather than the station number the Attendant dialed.
3. When Station Hunting has rerouted an Attendant-to-Station call, the number of the station where the call
has been rerouted is displayed, rather than the station (or pilot) number the Attendant dialed.
4. The trunk route designation and the trunk identification code are shown on the top line of the console's dig-
ital display during an Attendant-to-Trunk connection.
5. All trunk routes will appear in the digital display with a designation (DDD, WATS, FX, TIE, CCSA, etc.).
The trunk identification code (4 digits) is programmable.
6. Tenant information is not supplied in the digital display.
7. By pressing the LOOP key of a call which has been camped on by the Attendant and then using the DEST
key, an Attendant can determine the trunk, the station number, and the station name (if assigned) to which
the call is Camped-On.
8. When a trunk call has been rerouted by Call Forwarding – All Calls, Call Forwarding – Busy, Call Forward-
ing – No Answer or intercept to the Attendant Console, and the Attendant answers the call, the trunk number
and the called station number (intermediate station number) will be displayed and the SRC key LED will
light.
9. While the called station number is displayed, the Attendant can transfer the call to a station, hold the call,
or park the call. Once any of these steps are taken, the original called station number display cannot be re-
displayed.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 22
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Call Selection
Attendant Call Selection
General Description
This feature allows assignment of keys on the Attendant Console to particular types of trunk routes (such as
WATS or FX) and particular types of service calls (such as Attendant recalls, intercept calls, etc.). LEDs indicate
the type of incoming call and pressing the associated key allows the Attendant to answer the calls in any order.
Operating Procedure
1. The Attendant presses a key that has a flashing lamp according to the desired priority (this allows override
of priorities assigned to the use of the Answer key).
2. The Attendant identifies the incoming call by trunk route or service type.
3. Normal call handling procedures are used.
Service Conditions
1. The six keys located on the left side of the console can be assigned for Attendant Call Selection. (For SN716
DESKCON, 7 keys out of upper 20 keys can be assigned) In addition, the upper 12 keys can also be assigned
for Attendant Call Selection instead of loops and function keys. (SN610 ATTCON only) A flashing LED
on these keys means a call waiting to be answered and a steadily lit LED indicates an existing connection.
2. Trunk routes and services can be assigned for Attendant Call Selection as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
CO Incoming Calls
FX Incoming Calls
WATS Incoming Calls
Tie Line Incoming Calls
Call Forward – Busy Calls
•
•
•
•
•
Operator Calls
Attendant Recalls
Intercept Calls
Call Forward – No Answer Calls
Special Operator Calls
•
•
•
•
•
Priority Calls
Emergency Calls
Serial Calls
Off-Hook Alarm
Interposition Calling/Transfer
3. Multiple Attendant Call Selection keys can be flashing at the same time. The Attendant can select any in-
coming call by pressing the associated key, or can answer on a first in, first out (FIFO) basis using the An-
swer key.
Attendant Console Lockout – Password
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant Console to be set into a lockout mode. This disables the console from origi-
nating or receiving calls and setting or resetting service features. To return the Console to its manual operating
condition a password is required.
Station Application
Attendant Console (SN610 ATTCON).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Console Lockout – Password
Operating Procedure
To set Attendant Console Lockout
1. Press an idle LOOP key. The associated green LED lights.
2. Dial the feature access code or press the MODE key. The associated red LED lights. The LCD displays
ACTIVEduring normal mode and the green LED of the ACTIVE key lights.
3. Press the LKOUT key. The associated red LED lights. The LCD display changes from ACTIVEto LKOUT.
4. Press the Answer key and receive service set tone. The LCD displays SET LKOUT. The mode of the console
is changed from the normal to the lockout condition.
5. Press the RELEASE key.
To cancel Attendant Console Lockout
1. Press the MODE key. The associated red LED lights.
2. Dial a predetermined password number.
3. Press the ACTIVE key. The associated green LED lights. The LCD display changes from LKOUT to
ACTIVE.
4. Press the Answer key and receive service set tone. The LCD displays SET ACTIVE. The mode of the con-
sole is now changed from the lockout to the normal condition.
5. Press the RELEASE key.
Service Conditions
1. The length of the password can be up to 8 digits.
2. The password is assigned by the MAT or CAT.
3. When the console is set to the lockout condition, one of the following two types of indications can be se-
lected (on a system basis) by system data.
a. Audible ringing applied at any time.
b. No audible indications except recall are produced.
4. When the console is set to lockout condition, only the following operation can be executed:
a. Cancellation of lockout condition
b. These types of remaining calls on the loop keys can be handled:
•
•
•
•
Unanswered calls
Camped-on calls
Automatic Recalls
Held Call on LOOP key
5. If there is a call park which has been set by the attendant, the console cannot be set to lockout condition. In
this case, the operator hears ROT and the LCD shows CALL PARK.
6. When the console is put into the lockout condition, if there are any uncompleted calls in loops (with the At-
tendant Loop Release feature), those uncompleted calls can appear on loops as automatic recalls.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 24
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel
Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel
General Description
The Attendant has the ability to enter and remove individual stations from Do Not Disturb (DND). Additionally,
the Attendant can set one preassigned group of stations into, or out of, Do Not Disturb.
Operating Procedure
To set an individual station in DND
1. Dial the station number without pressing the LOOP key.
2. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
3. Press the Answer key (or START key). The DD LED lights steady and service set tone is received.
4. Press the RELEASE key.
To cancel an individual station in DND
1. Dial the station number without pressing the LOOP key.
2. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
3. Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out.
To set the group of stations in DND
1. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
2. Press the Answer key (or START key) and the DD LED lights steady.
3. The designated group is now in DND.
To cancel DND set to the group of stations
1. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
2. Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out.
3. The designated group is no longer in DND.
To call a station that set DND
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the desired station number. The DD LED flashes and reorder tone is received.
3. Press the DDOVR key.
4. The desired station will ring.
Service Conditions
1. Refer to the Do Not Disturb feature for more details.
2. Stations are assigned to the DND group in station Class of Service either from the CAT or MAT.
3. The Attendant Console is able to verify and change the status of stations with respect to Do Not Disturb.
4. DND Override allows the Attendant to call stations in DND without changing their status.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer
General Description
This feature allows any Attendant to directly converse with another Attendant and also allows Attendants to
transfer calls from their console to another Attendant's console in systems where Multiple Console Operation
has been provided.
Operating Procedure
To call from console A to console B
1. Attendant A presses an idle loop key.
2. Attendant A dials the Interposition Calling/Transfer access code and Attendant B's identification number.
3. The call is indicated at console B (on the Answer key or TF key).
4. Attendant B presses the Answer key or TF key.
5. Attendant A converses with Attendant B.
6. Attendant A and B press the RLS key.
To transfer from console A to console B with a call in progress
1. Attendant A dials the Interposition Calling/Transfer access code and Attendant B's identification number.
2. The call is indicated at Console B (on the Answer key or TF key).
3. Attendant B presses the Answer key.
4. Attendant A presses the RLS key to transfer, or may consult before release.
Service Conditions
1. Each console is assigned an identification number to allow Interposition Calling or Transfers.
2. An Attendant can receive one Interposition Call or Transfer at a time.
3. After receiving an Interposition Transfer, the Attendant has full capabilities for redirecting the call.
4. When Night Service (at the called console) is in effect, Interposition Calling and Transfers result in reorder
tone.
Attendant Lamp Check
General Description
This function is used to check the status of keys, lamps, and LCDs mounted on the Attendant Console to verify
that various operations of the Attendant Console are functioning normally. The check is done by a preset pro-
cedure.
Station Application
Not Applicable
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 26
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Listed Directory Number
Operating Procedure
To set the SN610 ATTCON into the Lamp Check Mode
1. Press the NIGHT key to set the Attendant Console in Night Mode.
2. Disconnect the line cord modular plug from jack in the bottom of the Attendant Console.
3. Reconnect the modular plug while pressing “0” on the dial of the Attendant Console.
4. The following message is displayed on the LCD of the Attendant Console, and the console is placed into
the Lamp Check Mode.
**DIAL 0**
ATT SELF TEST MODE
To check the status of all the keys, the buzzer sound, and the LEDs, press each key in turn to check the key
itself, as well as to check the corresponding LED, buzzer sound, and LCD on the console. For details on the
procedures, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
To return the SN610 ATTCON to the normal state
1. Press both the * and # keys together.
2. The Check Mode displayed on the LCD will be changed to the Menu Screen.
3. Press the NIGHT key to release the Night Mode of the console and return to the Day Mode.
To set the SN716 DESKCON into Lamp Check Mode
1. Press L5, L6 and SRC key together; all red lamps will be lit.
2. Press # key; the red lamps will go off and all green lamps will be lit.
3. Press # key; the green lamps will go off and LCD display will become all black.
4. Press # key; the LCD display will be cleared and Tone Ringer will ring.
5. Press # key; Tone Ringer will stop. When a button is pressed in this state, the associated lamp will be lit and
the name of the button will be displayed on the LCD.
To return the SN716 DESKCON to normal state
1. Press * key.
Service Conditions
If the Attendant Console is placed into Lamp Check Mode without entering the Night Mode, all received calls
will have RBT sent to them.
Attendant Listed Directory Number
General Description
This feature provides a display of the Listed Directory Number on the Attendant Console when the operator has
answered a Listed Directory Number call.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Loop Release
Operating Procedure
1. The operator at an Attendant Console answers an incoming call.
2. The DEST lamp lights.
3. The Listed Directory Number, Trunk Number and Trunk Identification Code are displayed.
Service Conditions
1. This service is effective when the operator at an Attendant Console has answered a Listed Directory Number
call terminated to the Attendant Console.
2. While the Listed Directory Number is displayed, the operator can transfer the call to a desired station by
keying the destination number on the key pad. In this case, the Listed Directory Number of the call cannot
be displayed again.
3. While the Listed Directory Number is displayed, the operator can place the present call on Hold by pressing
the HOLD button. In this case, the Listed Directory Number cannot be displayed again when the operator
returns to the call on Hold.
4. While the Listed Directory Number is displayed, the operator can set Call Park. In this case, the Listed Di-
rectory Number of the call placed on Call Park cannot be displayed again. If the call recalls from Call Park,
the trunk route and trunk identification code are displayed.
Attendant Loop Release
General Description
This feature allows an Attendant Console loop to become available for a second call as soon as the Attendant
has directed the first call to a station, even if that station does not answer.
Operating Procedure
To operate
1. The Attendant Console indicates incoming calls.
2. Press the Answer or appropriate Attendant Call Selection key.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone.
4. Before the station answers, press the RELEASE key.
5. The loop is now available for another call.
To re-enter the call that has been released from a loop, before being recalled
1. Dial the Call Pickup - Direct feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
2. Dial the extension number of the ringing desired station.
3. Converse with the held party.
Service Conditions
1. Unanswered calls will be routed to the Attendant within the predetermined timing using Automatic Recall.
Refer to the Variable Timing Parameters Features and Specifications for more information.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 28
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Programming
2. If all Attendant loop circuits are busy when Automatic Recall is activated, unanswered calls will be routed
to the Attendant when idle loops become available. Call Waiting (CW)shows on the LCD to indicate a call
is waiting to be answered.
3. A maximum of six calls (one per loop) may be released simultaneously from any single Attendant Console.
4. This feature provides each Attendant with the equivalent of twelve switching loops.
5. In a Multiple Console Operation, the attendant who initiated the loop release will be recalled.
6. Attendant Loop Release is only applicable to trunk calls and station calls extended to an unanswered station/
busy station (Camp-On: Trunk Calls only).
7. Calls which are held by the Attendant, using the HOLD key, cannot be released from the console. These
calls remain on the switched loop until they are either extended by the Attendant or abandoned by the calling
party.
8. When Attendant Camp-On is activated, the Attendant can Camp-On to a busy called station. Upon Camp-
On, the Attendant may release the call from the console.
9. Release is denied when the Attendant attempts to transfer a trunk to a fully restricted station or to a station
which already has a trunk camped onto it. In this case, the RELEASE key is ineffective.
Attendant Programming
General Description
This function is allowed only for the Attendant Console and is used to execute DISA code set up, speed dial
programming, and system clock set up operations.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
The following operations are common for DISA code set up, speed dial programming, and system clock set up
operations.
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Press the PROG key.
The PROG key LED (red) lights.
PASSWORDis displayed on the LCD as prompt information.
3. Dial the password (1-8 digits).
The dialed password is displayed on the LCD.
When password dialing is completed, the following message is displayed on the LCD. The PROG key LED
(red) blinks at this time.
PROGRAM
DISA SPD CLOCK TONE
If the RLS key is pressed in this status, the Attendant Console will return to the idle status. At this time, both
CANCEL and Answer keys are disabled.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Programming
After the above operation, select: DISA code set up, speed dial programming, or system clock set up oper-
ations.
To set up the DISA code
1. Press the DISA key.
The DISA key LED (red) lights.
ID#
DISA
2. Dial the ID code.
a. In the case of new ID code
PATTERN#
12345···55
DISA
b. In the case of existing ID code
PATTERN#
12345···55
DISA
0100
The currently registered Pattern number is displayed and the number is blinking.
3. Dial the Pattern number (four digits).
PATTERN#
12345···55
DISA
0250
If dial “9999”, the ID code is cleared.
4. Press the Answer key.
PATTERN#
12345···55
DISA
0250
The Pattern number is blinking and the DISA codes are set up.
5. Press the CNCL key.
To set up another ID code, return to Step 2.
6. Press the CNCL key.
The system goes back to the status assumed after the password was set up.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Programming
To program system speed dialing
1. Press the SPD key.
The SPD key LED (red) comes on.
2. Dial the speed dial block # (5 digits).
Tenant #
Buffer #
The selected block number is displayed as follows along with the currently registered trunk access code and
telephone number.
00012 9–
12345. . . . . .56
SPD
3. If there is no change skip to Step 4, otherwise dial the new trunk access code to register.
4. Press the Answer key.
5. If there is no change skip to Step 6, otherwise dial the new telephone number.
6. Press the Answer key.
The new access code and the telephone number are set up.
7. Press the CNCL key.
To program another speed dial block number, return to Step 2.
8. Press the CNCL key.
The system goes back to the status assumed after the password was set.
To set up the system clock
1. Press the CLOCK key.
The CLOCK key LED (red) comes on.
2. Dial the new date and time (12 digits).
Dial the date and time in the following order: MT DY DW HH MM SS.
MT: Month (01-12)
DY: Day
DW: Day of week (00-06: SUN-SAT)
HH: Hour (00-23)
MM: Minute (00-59)
SS: Second (00-59)
012301010203
CLOCK
3. Press the Answer key.
The new date and time are set up.
4. Press the CNCL key.
The system goes back to the status assumed after the password was entered.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Attendant Training Jacks
Service Conditions
1. A feature access code can be assigned and dialed instead of using the PROG key.
2. The PROG key must be assigned to any of the upper 6 keys of the SN610 ATTCON
(upper 4 keys of the SN716 DESKCON).
3. 8 DISA Codes can be set up and changed by the Attendant Console.
4. 300 Speed Dial Codes can be set up and changed by the Attendant Console.
Attendant Training Jacks
General Description
SN610 ATTCON can be equipped with two headset/handset jacks using an optional adaptor. Two jacks are
equipped on the adaptor and can be used for training new operators.
SN716 DESKCON provides two headset/handset jacks on the console, and does not require the optional adap-
tor.
Operating Procedure
Normal call handling procedures apply.
Service Conditions
When the jacks are used for training, both handsets can be used for listening and talking.
Audible Indication Control
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant to adjust the volume of audible indications received at the Attendant Console.
Operating Procedure
Adjusting the volume control allows control of audible signaling at the Attendant Console.
Service Conditions
1. The audible indication volume control does not affect the volume of the SN610 Attendants' handset or head-
set.
2. In SN716 DESKCON, the UP(↑) / DOWN(↓) key located on the right side of the console provides audible
indication control, headset/handset receiver volume and LCD contrast adjustment.
Call Processing Indication
General Description
This feature provides visual indications of all calls being processed or awaiting processing at the Attendant Con-
sole.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 32
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Call Queuing
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Each Attendant Console is provided with 6 dedicated switching loop keys. Each loop key is associated with
an LED to display the status of the call on that loop. The indicators may be on, off, or flashing, and green
or red.
2. When the Attendant Loop Release feature is activated, the status of the call is removed from the console
until recalled by the Automatic Recall feature.
3. When the Attendant Console is calling a station, the LCD display shows the called stations status (BSY,
RST, PCK, FDA, FDN, FDB).
Call Queuing
General Description
This feature provides the Attendant the ability to handle a series of exchange network calls in the order of their
arrival, (first in, first out) thereby eliminating unnecessary delays.
Operating Procedure
Press the Attendant Console Answer key to receive calls in the order of their queue position.
Service Conditions
1. Incoming calls arriving at the console will show CWon the LCD display. Additionally, the CWwill flash
when a predetermined number of calls are in queue. This number is programmable from 1 to 48 on a system
basis (the default is 6).
2. When an incoming call lights an Incoming Call Identification (LDN, ATND, RCL, WATS, FX, CCSA, etc.)
LED, the Attendant may answer it out of the queuing sequence by pressing the indicated key.
3. Automatic Call Distribution is not used in Multiple Console Operation. All incoming call indications appear
at each console within the same tenant group so that the call can be answered by any console. Each console
shares the same queue.
4. An incoming call cannot be answered simultaneously by more than one Attendant. Only the Attendant that
pressed the Answer key first is connected to the call. The other Attendant's Answer key will pick up the next
call or be ineffective (no queue) when pressed.
5. If a power failure occurs, calls in queue which have the power failure transfer feature associated with their
trunk will be connected to power failure stations. Other calls in queue will not be connected to power failure
stations.
6. When the system is changed from day to night mode, calls already waiting in the queue will remain in the
same queue and can be answered by the Attendant Console.
7. Calls in queue can overflow to Night Service. Refer to Attendant Overflow Features and Specifications for
more information.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Call Splitting
Call Splitting
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant to confer privately with one party on an Attendant handled connection without
the other party overhearing.
Operating Procedure
To speak with the called party only
1. Dial the desired station number.
2. The Station class/number is displayed.
3. Wait for the party to answer.
To speak with calling party only
1. Press the SRC key.
2. The Trunk kind/number displayed.
3. Proceed with the conversation.
To return to called party
1. Press the DEST key.
2. The Station class/number displayed.
To speak with both parties
Press the TALK key.
To release from the Attendant Console
Press the RLS key.
To disconnect all parties involved in a three-way Conference
1. Press the DEST key.
2. Press the CANCL key twice.
Service Conditions
1. The Attendant may alternate between the called and calling station parties, and three-party Conference, as
desired.
2. The Call Splitting feature is a standard Attendant feature.
3. Call Splitting is automatic when the Attendant begins call completion or answers a recall.
4. Call Splitting is manual when the SRC, DEST, or TALK key is pressed on the Attendant Console.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 34
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Call Waiting Display
Call Waiting Display
General Description
This feature provides a visual indication to the Attendant when one or more calls are waiting to be answered.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. When there are any incoming calls to the Attendant Console that have not yet been answered, the CW(Call
Waiting) will show on the LCD display (without flashing). A value of from 1 to 48 (the default is 6) waiting
calls can be set to start the CWflashing, on a per-system basis.
The number of waiting calls (1 to 96 calls) will show besides CWon the LCD.
2. When multiple consoles are installed, the CWwill show on all consoles' display which are assigned to the
same tenant group. Other tenant group consoles will reflect the call waiting status for their tenant group
only.
3. The following types of unanswered incoming calls to an Attendant Console are counted as calls waiting:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LDN
ATND
RCL
(Listed Directory Number Calls)
(Attendant Dial 0 Calls)
(Attendant Recall Calls)
FX
(Foreign Exchange Calls)
WATS
TIE
(Wide Area Telephone Service Calls)
(Tie Line Calls)
BUSY
NANS
TF
(Call Forwarding – Busy Calls to Attendant)
(Call Forwarding – No Answer Calls to Attendant)
(Interposition Transfer/Calling Calls between Attendants)
(Call Forwarding – Intercept Calls)
(Call Forwarding – All Calls to Attendant)
(Common Channel Signaling Arrangement Calls)
ICPT
ALL
CCSA
4. An audible indication will be provided when the CWis shown, unless the Attendant is already on a loop or
unless the volume control is used to silence the buzzer. Off-hook ringing is available on a per-console basis.
Common Route Indial
General Description
This feature allows assignment of incoming DID calls to different Attendant Call Selection keys based on the
last 4 digits dialed into the system. Up to eight individual Listed Directory Numbers can be assigned in system
programming. When an incoming call to any of these trunks is received, an Attendant Call Selection key will
flash and the LCD display will indicate the Listed Directory Number associated with that trunk route.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Operating Procedure
Refer to Attendant Call Selection Features and Specifications.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of one Listed Directory Number can be specified for each Attendant Call Selection key. Up to
eight LDN keys may be assigned.
2. This feature can help identify calls to particular tenants who are sharing Attendant(s). In this case, service
conditions for Tenant Service would apply to the system.
3. If the system or tenant group is in night mode, the Common Route Indial lines would follow the established
night rerouting.
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
General Description
This feature provides a display of the company name on the Attendant Console when the Attendant has an-
swered a Listed Directory Number (LDN) or a Tie Line call.
Operating Procedure
1. The Attendant answers an incoming call.
2. SRC, LDN (or Tie), and Answer lamp lights.
3. Company Name, LDN, Trunk Number, and Trunk Identification Code are displayed as follows:
0:00:01 DDD 1000 G01 10:23 AM TUE 12
NEC
<500>
LDN Number
Company Name
Service Conditions
1. This feature is effective when the Attendant has answered an LDN call or a Tie Line call.
2. The maximum number of characters per company name is 8.
3. The maximum number of company names assigned per system is 16 (maximum 8 for LDN calls and Tie
Line calls, respectively). The company name can be assigned per system programming.
4. The company name can be assigned by character code from the CAT or MAT.
5. While the company name is displayed, the Attendant can transfer the call to a desired station by dialing the
destination number. In this case, the company name of the call cannot be displayed again.
6. While the company name is displayed, the Attendant can place the present call on hold by pressing the
HOLD key. In this case, the company name of the call cannot be displayed again when the Attendant returns
to call on hold.
7. The company name can be displayed when the Attendant has answered the LDN call or Tie Line call for-
warded from the station. If the name display feature is assigned for that station, the station name is displayed
(the station name display has priority over the company name display).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 36
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Incoming Call Identification
8. If using ANI or ISDN, some of the characters of the name will be cut off, depending on the number of digits
of the ANI or ISDN calling party number.
9. With ANI or CPN, the LDN number will be overwritten by ANI or CPN.
Incoming Call Identification
General Description
Incoming calls are identified by various means. Refer to Attendant Called/Calling Number, Attendant Call Se-
lection, Attendant Source Key, Attendant Listed Directory Number and Common Route Indial Features and
Specifications.
Operating Procedure
Normal operating procedures are applied for each feature.
Service Conditions
Refer to the applicable Features and Specifications.
Individual Trunk Access
General Description
The Attendant Console is provided with the ability to access each individual trunk by dialing an associated iden-
tification code. This allows detection of faulty trunks during regular testing or after complaints. The Customer
Administration Terminal (CAT) or Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) has the capability to then
busy out the trunk until repair is effected.
Operating Procedure
1. The Attendant presses an idle LOOP key.
2. The Attendant dials the Individual Trunk access code.
3. The Attendant dials the Individual Trunk identification code.
4. If the trunk was idle, testing can follow.
Service Conditions
1. The Attendant Console LCD display will show the individual trunk identification code.
2. If the trunk is busy, the attendant receives busy tone.
3. If the trunk has been set to busy out status by the CAT or MAT, the Attendant can still access the trunk.
4. Individual Trunk Access is not available for ISDN PRI lines.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Multi-Function Key
Multi-Function Key
General Description
This feature allows the top row of keys on the Attendant Console to perform and display multiple functions in
accordance with the status of call processing.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Multi-Function Keys can be assigned to key numbers 01-06 (SN610 ATTCON)/01-04 (SN716 DESKCON)
located directly below the LCD.
2. The lowest line of the LCD displays the function of the associated Multi-Function key under the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
Idle state
When an attendant-called station answers or the attendant seizes an originating trunk
When the called station is busy
When the called station is in Do Not Disturb
When dialing a station number without pressing the LOOP key: Hotel/Motel features will be activated
3. A maximum of 5 status functions per Multi-Function Key can be assigned.
4. The LEDs associated with the Multi-Function keys indicates the status of the functions displayed on the Liq-
uid Crystal Display (LCD).
5. The Incoming Call Identification (ICI) and LOOP keys should not be assigned as Multi-Function keys.
Multiple Console Operation
General Description
This feature allows more than one Attendant Console to operate within the same system.
Operating Procedure
Normal operating procedures are applied for each console installed.
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of consoles per Firmware Processor (FP) is 16.
2. The maximum number of consoles allowable per system is 16.
3. Each incoming call is displayed on all consoles within a tenant group whether idle or busy. If all Attendants
are involved in processing calls when another C.O. call arrives, the Call Waiting (CW) will show on all con-
sole LCDs.
4. A station can be connected to only one Attendant loop at a time. Any attempt at establishing multiple con-
nections will result in reorder tone being sent to the party attempting multiple loop connection.
5. Attendant Interposition Transfer is used to transfer calls between Attendant Consoles.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 38
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Pushbutton Calling – Attendant Only
6. The system operates only on a switched-loop basis. Fixed-loop operation is not available.
7. To place a multiple console system (or a multiple console tenant group) into Night Service, a prepro-
grammed master console must press the MODE, NITE and Answer key (press Night key for SN716
DESKCON). If one of the other consoles enters Night Service, all calls addressed to that console will be
directed to the other console(s).
8. When a console has entered Night Service, all calls already connected to its loop must be processed from
that console. Recalls and serial recalls are routed to the night transfer station, if assigned.
Pushbutton Calling – Attendant Only
General Description
This feature permits an operator to place all calls over Dual-Tone, Multi-Frequency (DTMF) lines from the
push-button keypad on the Attendant Console.
Operating Procedure
The operator presses the push-button keypad to dial.
Service Conditions
1. This feature requires that all Central Office trunks or tie trunks accept push-button signaling (DTMF).
2. Push-button Calling- Attendant Only may be added to the system without providing push-button calling ca-
pability to other stations.
Serial Call
General Description
This feature is activated by the Attendant when an incoming calling party wishes to speak with more than one
internal party. When the internal station subsequently disconnects from the C.O. line call, the C.O. party auto-
matically rings back to the same Attendant.
Operating Procedure
1. The Attendant answers an incoming C.O. call.
2. The Attendant extends the call to the desired station.
3. The Attendant presses the SERIAL CALL SET (SC) key.
4. The called station and incoming caller are connected.
5. The called station hangs up. The Serial Call Termination (SRL) LED on the Attendant Console flashes at
60 IPM. If the Attendant is available, an audible indication is provided.
6. The Attendant presses the Answer or SRL key to return to the original incoming calling party.
Service Conditions
1. Serial Calling is not provided for Station-to-Station calling.
2. Serial Calling can be enabled or disabled on a per-console basis.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Time Display
3. This feature is not available for tandem connections.
4. Serial Calling is allowed when a station is involved in an Attendant Conference.
5. No features are denied toward a line or trunk involved in a Serial Call.
Time Display
General Description
This feature provides a digital time display on the Attendant Console (SN610 ATTCON) LCD.
Operating Procedure
Time is constantly displayed on the Attendant Console LCD.
Service Conditions
The clock display of the Attendant Console is synchronized with the clock in the system.
Trunk Group Busy Display
General Description
A visual indication is supplied to the Attendant when all trunks in a particular trunk group are busy.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The Attendant Console must be programmed to have a designated Trunk Group Busy LED on a function
key.
2. This feature may be used on trunk groups consisting of either DDD, DID, WATS, TIE, FX, or special
trunks.
3. Besides Trunk Group Busy LEDs on the Attendant Console, Trunk Group Busy status can be displayed on
the following LEDs:
a. Function key LEDs on Multiline Terminals
b. External LEDs (PN-DK00 card or built-in DK00 in MP card must be installed.)
4. A total of 62 Trunk Group Busy LEDs are available for Attendant Consoles, Multiline Terminals or External
LEDs.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 40
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By Attendant
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By Attendant
General Description
This feature allows an Attendant to transfer an incoming or outgoing call on one trunk to an outgoing trunk and
exit the connection before the called party answers.
Operating Procedure
1. An incoming call is received and answered in the normal manner. The trunk number is displayed.
2. The Attendant dials the access code of the outgoing route, then the destination number. The dialed digits are
displayed.
3. If the feature is allowed, the display will change to show the selected outgoing trunk number.
4. The call is extended (by operation of the RELEASE key). The Attendant Console will be recalled. On an-
swer, the Attendant will be connected to the original trunk party. If the call is answered, the trunk-to-trunk
connection is maintained.
5. After recall to the Attendant Console, the called party may answer which would result in an initial three-
way conversation before the call is extended. Alternately, the Attendant can re-extend the call (from above)
to the same destination or extend it to another.
Service Conditions
1. The feature is dependent on trunk supervision and other conditions being met.
2. The trunk associated with at least one side of the call must be programmed for answer and/or release super-
vision to ensure that the trunks do not lock up or this feature will be disallowed.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT
ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT
General Description
This feature provides an announcement, via a Digital Announcement Trunk Card, to external calls that are not
answered by the attendant within a predetermined time.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation required.
Service Conditions
1. Up to eight calls can be connected to one circuit of a Digital Announcement Trunk Card at one time.
2. This feature is provided on a trunk-route basis (C.O./TIE/DID).
3. A maximum of 128 Digital Announcement Trunk circuits can be assigned on a tenant/system-basis.
There are 2 circuits on MP card, 2 circuits on each 2DAT card, and 4 circuits on each 4DAT card.
4. The announcement can be supplied to a call once or several times, periodically. (This is selectable).
5. Calls remain queued to the attendant until answered or until remote-disconnect signalling occurs.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 42
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT LOCKOUT
ATTENDANT LOCKOUT
General Description
This feature denies an Attendant the ability to re-enter an established trunk or station connection without being
recalled by that station after the call is put in consultation hold.
Station Application
Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is mutually exclusive with the Attendant Override feature.
2. The Attendant Override feature must be disabled to enable this feature.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT OVERFLOW
ATTENDANT OVERFLOW
General Description
When an incoming call, which has terminated from a trunk to the Attendant Console, remains unanswered after
a predetermined time period, this feature provides a change to Night Service for that particular trunk.
Station Application
Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The Night Service assignment applied to the unanswered call is the same that applies to that trunk when the
system is placed in night mode.
2. This feature only applies to incoming calls on Loop Start or Ground Start trunks, and is provided on a per
system basis.
3. The activation timing for this feature is, by default, from 32 to 36 seconds after the call status has changed
from trunk incoming call to Attendant call, and can be programmed from 4 seconds to 120 seconds in in-
crements of 4 seconds.
4. When the destination of the Night Service is specified as a Direct Inward Termination (DIT), the incoming
call processing is changed to Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS) when the called DIT station fails to answer
the rerouted call within a predetermined time period.
5. The next incoming trunk call will ring at the Attendant Console as normal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 44
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT OVERRIDE
ATTENDANT OVERRIDE
General Description
This feature permits an Attendant to enter a busy connection (station or trunk) using the Attendant Console.
When this feature is activated, a warning tone is sent to the connected parties after which, they are connected
with the Attendant in a three-way bridge.
Station Application
Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
To activate Attendant Override
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the desired station number or dial the feature access code for individual trunk access and the desired
trunk number.
3. Press the BV key when busy tone is heard.
4. A double burst tone is sent to the connected parties.
5. The Attendant may now monitor or join the conversation
OR
Press the RELEASE key to disengage.
Service Conditions
1. This feature may be used to enter trunk-to-trunk, station-to-station, or station-to-trunk connections.
2. Each tone burst is 0.08 seconds in duration, and is provided to both parties connected.
3. Attendant Override of a busy station is denied if the busy station is dialing, talking to another Attendant,
receiving a system generated tone, protected against any override by DND key, or if any of the following
features are in progress:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Camp-On
Call Forwarding
Call Transfer
Conference
Data Communications
Data Line Security
Executive Override
Hold
Paging
Privacy
Station Hunting
Voice Call
4. The Attendant can override a station that is part of an Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution group.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTHORIZATION CODE
AUTHORIZATION CODE
General Description
An Authorization Code is a numerical code which will temporarily change a stations' Class of Service to a Class
of Service assigned to that Authorization Code. This new Class of Service allows access to trunks, dialing pat-
terns, and/or features which would otherwise be restricted.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. Lift handset and receive dial tone.
2. Enter the feature access code for Authorization Code.
3. Enter the Authorization Code.
4. Receive dial tone.
5. Enter the number to be called or access the desired feature.
Service Conditions
1. The feature access code for Authorization Code can be one to three digits.
2. Authorization Code Limitations
a. In the case of a system with AP01 card:
•
Number of digits: 1 digit-10 digits (If Check Code is provided, limited to 8 digits)
If Forced Account Code is utilized, the same number of digits must be assigned to Authorization
Code and Forced Account Code.
•
Number of codes: Up to 1,000 codes combined with Forced Account Code and Direct Inward Sys-
tem Access (DISA) Code
b. In the case of a system without AP01 card:
•
•
Number of digits: 1 digit-8 digits
Number of codes: The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit
number. For details, refer to APPENDIX 3.
3. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will print an Authorization Code; however, masking of the Au-
thorization Codes is available if desired.
4. Authorization Codes are assigned in system data from the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or
the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
5. Authorization Code changes the Class of Service for that call only.
6. If the system is designated as KF Registration, this feature will not be available.
7. An Authorization Code can be assigned per a station number so that one code is used only on the specific
station. Application Processor (AP01) is required.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 46
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT
General Description
This feature allows the system to answer incoming trunk calls. The system will supply a message and/or dial
tone to the caller. The caller can then dial the desired extension number and be directed to that station.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
To record a message
1. Go off-hook and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk record access code and the Digital Announcement Trunk card num-
ber.
Three seconds of tone will be supplied.
3. Record the message (maximum duration - 60 seconds).
4. Restore handset.
To replay a message
1. Go off-hook and receive Dial tone.
2. Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk replay access code and Digital Announcement card number.
3. Receive a message.
4. Restore handset.
To delete a message
1. Go off-hook and receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk delete access code and Digital Announcement card number.
3. Receive Service Set Tone.
4. Restore handset.
Service Conditions
1. If the called station is busy or does not answer, or the number dialed is a feature access code or trunk access
code, any one of the following operations can be set:
•
•
•
The incoming trunk call can be released.
A 2nd message and dial tone, or dial tone, can be supplied.
An alternate call terminating destination (Attendant, Trunk Answer Any Station, Direct Inward Termi-
nation) can be provided.
2. If Dual-Tone, Multi-Frequency (DTMF) digits have not arrived within a predetermined time interval (15
seconds) after the message is supplied, the system will transfer, as per programming, to an alternate call ter-
minating destination (Attendant Console, Trunk Answer Any Station, Direct Inward Termination).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT
3. Call Forwarding, Station Hunting, Call Pickup and Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution features are all ef-
fective after the call has been directed.
4. This feature uses the DTMF receivers of the system. Therefore, the total number of DTMF receivers avail-
able in the system is reduced proportionately by Automated Attendant usage. There is a maximum of 16
DTMF receivers per Firmware Processor (FP), and a maximum of 32 DTMF receivers per system.
5. A DTMF receiver must be available before the Automated Attendant can answer. When there is an incom-
ing call and all DTMF receivers are busy, the connection to the Automated Attendant is attempted every 4
seconds until an idle DTMF receiver is found. Ringback tone from the C.O. is supplied to the calling party
until the Automated Attendant answers.
6. Automated Attendant is assigned to trunks on a per tenant and per trunk basis.
7. When the calling party cannot send DTMF digits, any one of the following operations can be selected in
programming:
•
•
The trunk can be released.
An alternate call terminating destination (Attendant, Trunk Answer Any Station, Direct In Termination)
can be provided.
8. When the called party is busy or does not answer, and all DTMF receivers are busy, then the following op-
erations can be selected in programming:
•
•
The trunk can be released.
An alternate call terminating destination (Attendant or Trunk Answer Any Station) can be provided.
9. Automated Attendant cannot call out of the system. It can only answer incoming calls to the PBX for which
it is programmed.
10. Automated Attendant cannot call transfer calls over CCIS to another NEAX PBX.
11. The message can be changed by DAY/NIGHT mode.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 48
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
General Description
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a prearranged group of
stations. Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within the group, based on which terminal
has been idle the longest period of time. Stations may log on/log off from the ACD group. Supervisor stations
may monitor conversations of agents.
Station Application
Multiline and single-line stations.
Operating Procedure
Refer to individual ACD sub-features for details on station operating procedures.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 16 ACD groups can be assigned per system. Each ACD group is assigned a pilot number.
Calls directed to the pilot number are directed to that ACD group.
2. The maximum number of stations in an ACD group is 60. The maximum number of ACD groups in the sys-
term
tem is 16. The total number of ACD stations may not exceed the system limits of 256 D s and 512 ports.
If ACD-MIS is used, the maximum number of ACD stations is 60.
3. Assignment of ACD groups is performed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or Cus-
tomer Administration Terminal (CAT).
4. ACD groups consist of a pilot station and one or more member stations. Hunting is initiated in a circular
fashion, and then based on which member has been idle the longest period of time.
5. If all stations within the ACD group are busy, incoming calls may be serviced in the following ways:
•
•
•
•
Remain in queue until an agent becomes available (Ringback Tone provided).
Immediately overflow to another group, to a station, or to the Attendant.
Remain in queue until an agent becomes available (Delay Announcement or Music on Hold provided).
Remain in queue for a preset time (Ringback Tone, Delay Announcement, or Music on Hold provided),
then overflow to another group, to a station, or to the Attendant.
6. When the pilot station has set Call Forwarding – All Calls, incoming calls to the ACD group will be trans-
ferred to the destination of that Call Forwarding – All Calls setting.
7. An ACD group number can be used as the destination station of Direct Inward Termination (DIT), or as a
designated Night Service station.
8. An ACD group number can be assigned as the destination station of Off-Hook Alarms, Priority Calls, and
Attendant Night Transfer.
9. ACD group pilot numbers should not be placed in Station Hunting groups. The Station Hunting feature
would take priority over the ACD function.
10. Two types of traffic measurements can be provided for ACD:
a. ACD group Peg Count
•
•
Count of incoming calls
Count of answered calls
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Busy In/Busy Out – ACD
•
•
•
Count of abandoned calls
Count of waiting calls
Count of all busy calls
b. ACD station Peg count
Count of answered calls
•
11. Upon initial installation, or after a system initialization (reset), each agent must lift and restore handset (of
their station) to begin receiving calls for the ACD group.
Busy In/Busy Out – ACD
General Description
This feature allows an agent in an ACD group to log their station onto or off of the group. This allows the system
to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the ACD group goes to that station or not. This prevents
incoming calls from being directed to stations at which no agent is available.
Station Application
Multiline Terminals and Single Line Stations.
Operating Procedure
To log off (busy out) an ACD station
1. Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the log off (busy out – set) feature access code, or press the LOG OFF key.
3. Restore the handset.
To log on (cancel busy out) an ACD station
1. Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the log on (busy out – cancel) feature access code, or press the LOG ON key.
3. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. Any agent may log on/off. When an agent has activated log off, any call targeted at the ACD group will
bypass that agent. Calls directed to the specific station number will ring at the agent position.
2. The agent may originate calls while in log off mode.
3. The agent can log off their station while idle, or while on an incoming outside call. When that call is com-
pleted, the station is logged off.
4. The agent can log on/off from the secondary extension by dialing the log on/off feature access code. The
LOG ON/LOG OFF key is not available for the secondary extension.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 50
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Call Waiting Indication – ACD
Call Waiting Indication – ACD
General Description
This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to an ACD group is placed in queue, due to an
“all agents busy” condition. On external relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline Terminal can be
used to provide Call Waiting Indication.
Station Application
Multiline Terminals assigned with a Call Waiting (CW) Lamp.
Operating Procedure
No operating procedure is necessary. Indication is automatic, once it is assigned.
Service Conditions
1. A PN-DK00 (or built-in DK00 in MP) is required to provide the external relay control when an external
indicator is used.
2. There is no limit to the number of appearances of a CW lamp assigned to Multiline Terminals. One CW
lamp per group is available.
3. On a per system basis, the option is available to select how many calls in queue causes the CW lamp to flash.
Default setting is one. The LED lights steady until the set threshold count is reached, at which time it begins
to flash.)
4. Provision of ringing on a CW key is controlled on a per station basis.
5. The interruption rate of the external relay control is programmable, on a per system basis, as follows:
•
•
•
•
30 IPM
60 IPM
120 IPM
Steady
This interruption rate is the same as the rate used for Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS).
Delay Announcement – ACD
General Description
This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller placed in queue to an
ACD group. A single announcement, or two separate announcements, can be provided.
Station Application
None.
Operating Procedure
Operation is automatic, once system programming is assigned.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Hunt Past No Answer – ACD
Service Conditions
1. A Delay Announcement service can be provided for DIT, DID or a trunk call transferred by a station user
or the Attendant to an ACD Group. Internal calls or station-to-station transferred calls to the ACD Group
can go into the ACD queue but do not receive the Delay Announcement.
2. The following configurations are available when using Delay Announcement:
a. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a Delay Announcement, followed
by Music-on-Hold (if provided), until an agent is available or the caller hangs up.
b. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a Delay Announcement, followed
by Music-on-Hold (if provided) for a programmed interval, then followed by repetition of the Delay
Announcement. This process repeats until an agent in the ACD group is available on the caller hangs
up.
c. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a first Delay Announcement,
followed by Music-on-Hold (if provided). After a preprogrammed interval, the caller then hears a
second Delay Announcement, followed again by Music-on-Hold. The second Delay Announcement
and Music-on-Hold are then repeated at the preprogrammed interval time until an agent becomes
available or the caller hangs up.
d. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a first Delay Announcement
followed by Music-on-Hold (if provided). After a pre-determined interval time, the system checks to
see if an overflow destination has been assigned for the incoming trunk route. If assigned, and the
destination is available (idle), the call overflows to the destination. If not assigned, or the destination
is busy, the call remains in queue for the predetermined interval time and the system then checks
again for overflow assignment. For the latter case, if repetition of first announcement is set, or second
announcement is made available, that announcement will be played.
Note: Repeat of the first announcement or receipt of second announcement is only available when the overflow des-
tination for the trunk route is busy (not available).
3. Overflow out of queue causes the caller to be removed from the queue. This means that if the overflow des-
tination (out of queue) is another ACD group, the caller is placed at the end of that queue (if all agents are
busy) and is no longer in queue for the first group.
4. One DAT (Digital Announcement Trunk) circuit is required for each Delay Announcement. MP card in-
cludes 2DAT circuits and 2DAT/4DAT card provides 2/4DAT circuits.
5. Delay Announcements cannot be shared between groups. Each group must have their own set of Delay An-
nouncements.
6. Multiple DAT circuits may be assigned for 1st or 2nd Delay Announcement function to the same ACD
group, when warranted by high traffic rates into the group.
7. When an ACD station becomes available, the caller is immediately connected to the station, even if the re-
corded announcement is in progress.
8. Incoming call billing to the outside party starts when the first recorded announcement begins.
Hunt Past No Answer – ACD
General Description
This feature allows calls targeted at an ACD group to hunt past an agents station, after a no answer condition, if
the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable (or not available) to answer the call.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 52
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Immediate Overflow – ACD
Station Application
Multiline Terminals and Single Line Stations.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the Call Forwarding – No Answer Features and Specifications for details on setting the No Answer for-
warding condition.
Service Conditions
1. This feature uses Call Forwarding – No Answer (to another ACD member) to enable a call to an agent that
fails to answer, to hunt past that agent, to the next agent.
2. Calls directed to the agents primary extension number will also forward (on a no-answer condition) to the
next agent.
3. It is recommended, when this feature is used, that the Call Forward – No Answer and the Call Forward –
Busy features be separately assigned (use different access codes and keys).
Immediate Overflow – ACD
General Description
This feature allows a call directed to an ACD group to immediately overflow to another ACD group, upon en-
countering an “all agents busy” condition.
Station Application
All ACD Pilot Stations.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the Call Forwarding – Busy feature and specification for details on setting the forwarding when busy
condition.
Service Conditions
1. This feature uses the Call Forwarding – Busy feature (set on the ACD pilot extension) to immediately for-
ward the call to another ACD group, upon encountering an all busy condition in the first group.
2. The overflow destination must be an ACD pilot number.
3. When a call has terminated to ACD group A, and all station in group A are busy, and group B is assigned
as the overflow destination (using Call Forward – Busy), the call is transferred to group B. When all the
stations are busy in group B, the call queues onto ACD group B.
4. One overflow group can be provided for each ACD group.
5. Overflow is performed only once.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Priority Queuing – ACD
Priority Queuing – ACD
General Description
This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis, when the
call enters an ACD queue. When a call is a considered as priority it is placed at the beginning of the queue.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Priority queuing is available on incoming trunk calls. Queue priority is determined on a trunk route, or for
DID Calls, on a station number, basis.
2. If two (or more) priority type calls occur at the same time, the system will place them in queue in a First-In/
First-out order.
Queue Size Control – ACD
General Description
On incoming DID/Tie line calls, the system can be assigned a threshold which limits the number of calls in
queue. When the queue size threshold is exceeded, incoming callers are connected to busy tone.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 54
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Silent Monitor – ACD
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of queuing in each ACD group (hereinafter called Queue Size) can be specified by
the system data. When the number of queuing calls reaches the preassigned queue size, new calls receive
Busy Tone. Depending on the queue size, the Overflowed ACD call indication on a Multiline Terminal or
on the external indicator is provided as shown below:
Queue Size assigned by system data = S
Number of queuing calls = N
LAMP INDICATION
CONDITIONS
Multiline Terminal
External Indicator
S=1
Steady on red
Lamp on
1 ≤ N < S
Steady on red
Flashing red
Lamp off
Lamp on
(S ≠ 1)
S ≤ N
(S ≠ 1)
Silent Monitor – ACD
General Description
This feature provides the ACD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to an ACD agent. The silent
monitor function gives no indication (as an option) to either the agent or the calling party.
Station Application
All ACD group agents can be monitored.
All ACD group supervisors can monitor.
Operating Procedure
To monitor a conversation/to cancel monitoring (Supervisor only)
1. Lift the handset, or press the Speaker key, and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the monitor feature access code, or press the MONITOR key.
3. Dial the extension number to be monitored.
4. Monitor the conversation via the handset or the speaker.
5. Restore the handset, or press the Speaker key to cancel monitoring.
CAUTION: The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone
conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission, may be il-
legal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to imple-
menting any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws
require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or
other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to mon-
itoring or recording a telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Silent Monitor – ACD
Service Conditions
1. Service feature class is used to control which stations are agents and which are supervisors.
2. The default setting in system programming is that one tone is sent to both parties when the monitoring fea-
ture is used. As an option, this tone may be disabled, on a per system basis.
3. The Silent Monitor feature uses a three-party conference circuit. Therefore, a maximum of 16 monitors can
occur simultaneously, in conjunction with any normal Conferences (Three/Four party) in progress.
CAUTION: The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone
conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission, may be il-
legal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to imple-
menting any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws
require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or
other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to mon-
itoring or recording a telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 56
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION WITH MANAGEMENT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
General Description
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with Management Information System (MIS) feature provides a man-
agement information system to be used in conjunction with the built-in ACD features of the system. The MIS
incorporates a supervisor's terminal for real-time monitoring of agent activity, amber and red alarms, and hard-
copy summary reports.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the CallCenterWorX System Manual.
Service Conditions
1. ACD/MIS requires the ACD/MIS software, application processor, personal computer, and a parallel printer.
The personal computer and parallel printer are user-provided.
2. Only one supervisor terminal is normally allowed per ACD system. The use of an external 1 to 8 RS-232
Expansion unit can allow up to 8 supervisor terminals. Refer to the CallCenterWorX System Manual for
details on the external expansion unit.
3. The tenant number for the ACD/MIS pilot and agent stations must always be 0 in both the ACD Group set
in the system and the PC MIS Agent assignment.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON
AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON
General Description
An incoming Direct Inward Termination (DIT) call which has been terminated to a busy station can be Camped-
On automatically. When the busy station becomes idle, the station is automatically called and connected to the
camped on incoming trunk call.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Two Camp-On tone patterns are available: one to send a repeated tone at intervals of 4 seconds, and the other
is to send the tone once at the time the call is Camped-On. Either one of these patterns can be selected on a
system basis during initial programming.
2. The incoming trunk caller receives Ringback tone from the C.O. until answered by the station in the system.
3. Only a single Camp-On from any source to a station is allowed at one time.
4. When Direct In Termination (DIT) calls are directed to a busy station, they can be preprogrammed on a
trunk basis to be sent to an Attendant, Trunk Answer any Station (TAS) or automatically Camped-On to the
busy station.
5. Camp-On can be set to a station which has set Call Back. Call Back can be set to a party to which Camp-
On service has been set. In both of the above cases, Camp-On has priority over Call Back.
6. Camp-On can be set to a station which has set Trunk Queuing – Outgoing. Camp-On has priority over Trunk
Queuing – Outgoing.
7. Camp-On can be set to a station which has placed a call on Hold. When the station becomes idle, Camp-On
takes priority over the Hold. Hold can be set to a party to which Camp-On has been set.
8. Camp-On service cannot be set to a data line.
9. If a station is busy and already has a Camp-On set to it, the station user must finish their call, receive ringing
and then answer the first Camp-On call, prior to receiving Camp-On tone for the incoming DIT call.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 58
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)
AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)
General Description
This feature receives the calling subscriber's number automatically sent from T1 network using MF signaling
and displays the calling number on the LCD of a Multiline Terminal and an Attendant Console.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD and Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber's number for ANI can be displayed on the LCD of the Multiline
Terminal or the Attendant Console.
2. Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber's number can be recorded in the Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) by system programming.
3. Up to 24 digits of the calling subscriber's number can be sent out to the OAI computer by system program-
ming.
4. ANI information can not be transmitted to a tie line or a C.O. line through tandem connection.
5. The 4RSTB card is required for the MF receiver of ANI information.
6. Two signaling formats are supported for ANI: ANI format and Feature Group D (most common). Selection
of format is system-wide (one format per system).
7. Feature group D format and ANI format are described below:
Signal Pattern Called Number
ANI
FGD Format
ANI Format
MF signal
DP signal
MF signal
MF signal
8. If using DNIS on the Attendant Console, some of the characters of the displayed name will be cut off de-
pending on the number of digits of ANI.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC RECALL
AUTOMATIC RECALL
General Description
This feature works as a timed reminder. When a call remains on Hold, Camp-On or ringing unanswered for a
fixed interval after being transferred, the station that initiated the hold, transfer, or Camp-On is automatically
alerted.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Automatic Recall timing is flexible in system programming. Automatic Recall timing is as follows:
a. All stations:
•
•
•
•
Nonexclusive Hold : 4 to 396 seconds (Default: 60-64 seconds)
Exclusive Hold
Transfer Recall
Camp-On Recall
: 4 to 396 seconds (Default: 236-240 seconds)
: 4 to 120 seconds (Default: 24-28 seconds)
: 8 to 128 seconds (Default: 24-32 seconds)
b. Attendant Consoles:
•
•
Attendant Recall (Camp-On/No Answer) : 2.4 to 124.8 seconds (Default: 31.2-33.6 seconds)
Attendant-Held calls : 2.4 to 124.8 seconds (Default: 31.2-33.6 seconds)
2. When a Multiline Terminal user reenters a held or transferred call, the recall timing is reset. If the call is
returned to a Hold or Transfer condition, the recall timer restarts.
3. When an Attendant reenters a held or Camped-On trunk, the recall timing is reset. If the trunk is returned to
a Hold or Transfer condition, the recall timer restarts.
4. When a held call recalls to a Multiline Terminal, a continuous ring of 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off and
an LED flash of 240 IPM occurs until the call is answered. The signal occurs whether the Multiline Terminal
is on-hook or off-hook, and regardless of whether the Multiline Terminal is ring assigned on that line key.
5. Before an unattended transfer recalls to the originating station of the transfer, the called station will ring nor-
mally for a programmable period of 4 to 120 seconds. When the Automatic Recall begins, the LCD of the
originating station displays:
XXXX
RECALL
XXXX
The station (or trunk) being transferred
The transferred destination
6. When a recall occurs on the Attendant Console, a buzzer sounds (provided no other calls are being pro-
cessed) in addition to the LED indication. The called station continues to ring. If the called party answers
after the Attendant reseizes the line, a three-party conference is established.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 60
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC RECALL
7. This feature is not activated when a Multiline Terminal holds the call on Nonexclusive or Exclusive Hold
during a three or four-party Conference. The conference members do not receive hold music, but can con-
tinue talking.
8. Automatic Recall will follow any Call Forwarding assignment.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC WAKE-UP
AUTOMATIC WAKE-UP
General Description
This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call guest rooms or administration stations at
specified times. Upon answering, the guest is connected to a recorded announcement or music source. A printout
of unanswered or blocked Automatic Wake-Up attempts for each guest room is provided using the Hotel/Motel
printer.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Automatic Wake-Up from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Dial the desired wake-up time. Note
a. In 24-hour format (military format), dial four digit number.
b. In 12-hour format, dial four digit number and then if p.m. time, dial “*”.
3. Press the WK UP key.
4. Dial the station number.
5. Press the SET key. The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations.
6. Press the RLS key.
OR
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Dial the station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Dial the desired wake-up time. Note
a. In 24-hour format (military format), dial four digit number.
b. In 12-hour format, dial four digit number and then if p.m. time, dial “*”.
5. Press the SET key. Repeat Steps 2-5 for additional stations.
6. Press the RLS key.
Note: In 12-hour display mode, dialing wake-up time in 24-hour format is available.
In 24-hour display mode, dialing wake-up time in 12-hour format is unavailable.
(Dialing “*” as fifth digit is unavailable.)
To cancel Automatic Wake-Up from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Dial the station number.
3. Press the RESET key. The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations.
4. Press the RLS key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 62
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC WAKE-UP
To set Automatic Wake-Up from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument while engaged in conversation
with the station
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Dial the wake-up time in military format (in one minute increments).
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the RLS key.
To cancel Automatic Wake-Up from the Hotel/ Motel Front Desk Instrument wile engaged in conversation
with station
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Press the RESET key.
3. Press the RLS key.
To set Automatic Wake-Up from a guest room station or administrative station
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Wake-Up access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired Wake-Up time in military format (in one minute increments).
4. Receive service set tone.
5. Restore the handset.
To cancel Automatic Wake-Up from a guest room station or station or administrative station
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Automatic Wake-Up cancellation code.
3. Receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. Setting and canceling can be initiated from the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Console
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
Guest Station
Administrative Station
Property Management System (PMS) terminal
2. A maximum of 32 stations can be set for the same Automatic Wake-Up time. When the setting exceeds 32,
the excess stations will be set to an earlier time in 5 minute intervals.
3. Wake-Up attempts, whether successful or not, can be printed out at a locally provided printer. The results
of execution of Automatic Wake-Up set and cancel are also printed.
4. The ringing signal is the same as station-to-station calls, and its time can be assigned from 4 sec. to 32 sec.
(programmable on a system basis).
5. The Automatic Wake-Up call will ring a station in Do Not Disturb.
6. When setting or canceling has been completed, service set tone is heard as confirmation.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC WAKE-UP
7. When Automatic Wake-Up call is received, the station receives music or an announcement. A DAT circuits
of MP card or a 2DAT/4DAT card or COT card (with locally provided music or announcement source) is
required. As an option, a PN-DK00 (or built-in DK00 in MP) can be programmed to provide a contact clo-
sure for starting the external announcement or music source when used with a COT card. When providing
the internal announcement via a DAT card, multiple connections can be made to the announcement card.
Secondary station users may be connected to the middle of the message.
8. Data for Automatic Wake-Up programming is canceled by Check Out operation.
9. The number of Automatic Wake-Up call attempts is programmable from 1 to 5 times.
10. If the station does not answer, is busy, in Line Lockout, or ringing, recalling is initiated one minute later.
Recalling is repeated up to 5 times. Each call which fails is printed. When the final attempt results in failure,
a buzzer is sounded at the printer and a flashing LED on the DSS/BLF Console is available to indicate which
station does not answer.
11. An AP00 card is required for connection to a printer.
12. After Automatic Wake-Up is set, the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument is able to verify the setting on re-
quest. The Automatic Wake-Up set procedure is followed, but a new wake-up time setting need not be en-
tered.
13. Automatic Wake-Up calls will not be rerouted by Call Forwarding or other features.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 64
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
BACKGROUND MUSIC
General Description
Background Music can be provided on a dial-up basis over Multiline Terminal speakers. Incoming voice an-
nouncements, ringing and recalls override Background Music. Up to 10 music programs can be offered.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To set Background Music
1. Press the Speaker key.
2. Dial the Background Music feature access code.
3. Dial the Background Music program number (0-9).
4. Press the Speaker key.
To cancel
1. Press the Speaker key.
2. Dial the Background Music feature access code.
3. Press the # key.
4. Press the Speaker key.
Service Conditions
1. Up to 10 music programs can be offered. Only one per station can be selected at a time.
2. This feature is allowed or denied in Class Of Service.
3. A COT or TNT circuit is required for each music program.
4. The music source(s) must be locally provided. The input source is -10 to 0 dBm, 600 ohms (COT), or
–8dBm or less, 10K ohms (TNT).
5. When a terminal goes off-hook, the music is automatically stopped. When the terminal goes on-hook, the
music starts again, until the feature is canceled.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING
BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING
General Description
A secretary with a Multiline Terminal can use an appearance of the boss' extension to screen calls for that ex-
tension, and announce and/or transfer calls to that extension. Additionally, the secretary can call the boss during
a busy condition and can send a Message Waiting Indication to the boss' station.
Station Application
Any type of station as boss extension and Multiline Terminal with appearance of boss extension at Secretary
position.
Operating Procedure
For a Boss/Secretary transfer of an incoming call to the boss' Multiline Terminal
1. Secretary answers the incoming call by pressing boss' line key appearance and lifting the handset. Secretary
converses with the calling party. Boss' line key appearance is steady green on secretary's station and steady
red at other appearances.
2. Secretary presses boss' line key appearance again. Incoming call is placed on Consultation Hold and re-
ceives Music On Hold, if provided. Boss' line key appearance is steady green at secretary's station, steady
green at boss' Multiline Terminal and steady red elsewhere.
3. At boss' Multiline Terminal a tone burst is heard followed by a voice call from the secretary (using the boss'
primary extension) over the speaker. Secretary announces the call.
4. The secretary can now go on-hook. The boss' primary extension hears a chime tone and flashes on hold, red;
the secretary's appearance of the Boss' extension flashes on hold, green, and all other line key appearances
of the boss' extension provide busy indication.
5. The boss lifts the handset or presses the primary extension line button and is connected to the calling party.
OR
The boss can lift the handset to answer the voice call and talk to the secretary privately using the handset.
Boss' line key appearance is steady green at secretary and boss' Multiline Terminal, and is steady red else-
where.The secretary then goes on-hook and the calling party is connected to the boss. Boss' line key appear-
ance is steady green at boss' terminal, and steady red elsewhere.
OR
The boss goes on-hook and the secretary presses the transfer key to return to the original call.
For a Boss/Secretary transfer of an incoming call to the boss’ Single Line Telephone
1. Secretary answers incoming call by pressing boss' line key appearance and lifting the handset. Secretary
converses with calling party. Boss' line key appearance is steady green on secretary's station and steady red
elsewhere.
2. Secretary presses boss' line key appearance again. Incoming call is placed on Consultation Hold and re-
ceives Music On Hold, if provided. Boss' line key appearance is steady green at secretary's station and
steady red at other appearances.
3. At boss' Single Line Telephone, internal ringing is heard.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 66
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING
4. The secretary can now go on hook. The boss' Single Line Telephone continues to ring (incoming ring rate
reflects whether the calling party is internal or external) and all line key appearances of the boss' extension
provide incoming ring indication.
5. The boss lifts the handset and is connected to the calling party.
OR
The boss can lift the handset while receiving internal ring to talk to the secretary. Boss' line key appearance
is steady green at the secretary's station and steady red elsewhere.
6. The secretary then goes on-hook, whereby the calling party is connected to the boss. Boss' line key appear-
ance is steady red at all appearances.
OR
The boss goes on-hook and the secretary presses the Transfer key to return to the original call.
To set/cancel Message Waiting Indication to the boss from the secretary station
1. Lift handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the boss' extension number.
3. Press the Message Waiting set/cancel key (Boss' Message Wait Lamp is lit if set, goes off if canceled).
For a Boss/Secretary Override when the boss is busy on the primary extension of a Multiline Terminal and
the secretary has a call on the primary extension of the secretary's Multiline Terminal
1. The secretary presses boss' line key appearance on the secretary's Multiline Terminal. The party that was
connected to the secretary is placed on Hold and receives Music On Hold, if provided. Additionally, the sec-
retary hears special ringback tone and the boss hears one burst of tone through the handset to indicate a call
is waiting. (If the secretary presses the Transfer key before the boss answers, the secretary is reconnected to
the calling party. The secretary's Answer key is ineffective in this situation.)
2. The boss presses the Answer key. The party originally connected to the boss is now placed on Consultation
Hold and the boss and secretary can converse.
3. The secretary goes on-hook. The boss is connected to the caller originally connected to the secretary. The
caller originally connected to the boss is placed on Call Hold.
4. If the boss presses the Transfer key, the boss receives Special Dial Tone, allowing transfer of the new call.
5. When the boss goes on-hook, the original call recalls to the boss' station.
6. The boss goes off-hook and is connected to the original party.
For a Boss/Secretary override when the boss is busy on a Single Line Telephone, and the secretary has
a call on the primary extension of the secretary's Multiline Terminal
1. The secretary presses the boss' line key appearance on the secretary's Multiline Terminal. The party that was
connected to the secretary is placed on Hold and receives Music On Hold, if provided. Additionally, the sec-
retary hears special ringback tone and the boss hears one burst of tone through the handset to indicate a call
is waiting.
2. The boss presses the FLASH key (or momentarily presses the hookswitch). At this time, the secretary and
boss are connected and the other two parties are on Hold.
3. The secretary goes on hook. The boss is connected to the caller originally connected to the secretary. The
boss' original party remains on Call Hold.
4. The boss may now alternate between callers (Broker's Call) using the FLASH key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING
5. When finished conversing with either party, the boss goes on hook. The other party will automatically recall
to the boss' station.
6. The boss goes off hook and is connected to the other party.
Service Conditions
1. During Boss/Secretary transfer operation, if the secretary hangs up before the boss answers to complete an
unsupervised ring transfer and the boss still does not answer, the call will recall to the secretary's primary
extension after a predetermined time-out (default value is 24-28 seconds).
2. After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss/Secretary transfer operation, the secretary is automati-
cally reconnected to the original caller if the boss hangs up.
3. After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss/Secretary transfer operation, the secretary can use the
Transfer or Answer key to alternate conversation between the original caller and the boss (Broker's Call)
after the boss has answered using the handset.
4. After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss/Secretary transfer operation using the handsets, the sec-
retary can press the Recall key to disconnect the boss and receive feature dial tone, allowing a transfer to
another station (the boss receives reorder tone). The secretary can also press either the Transfer or Answer
key to return to the original caller.
5. While a secretary is originating a voice call during the Boss/Secretary transfer or Boss/Secretary Override
operation, the secretary can press the Transfer key to return to the calling party and the voice call is aban-
doned.
6. During a Boss/Secretary transfer operation, once the boss has answered and is conversing with the secretary,
Privacy Release is not available and use of the Hold button will be disregarded at this time.
7. Setting or canceling of Message Waiting can be executed by the secretary, regardless of the boss' extension
status (busy or idle).
8. After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss/Secretary transfer or Boss/Secretary Override operation
using the handsets, the secretary can use the Answer key to alternate conversations between the original call-
ing party and the boss (Brokers Call). The secretary can also press the Transfer key, sending the secretary
back to the original calling party and the boss back to the party on Consultation Hold.
9. During a Boss/Secretary Override operation, the boss can use the Answer key to answer the Override Call.
The boss can then use the Answer key to alternate between the secretary and the party on Consultation Hold.
10. During a Boss/Secretary Override operation, once the boss has answered and the secretary has gone on-
hook, the boss can use the Answer key to alternate between the two parties. The boss can also use the Trans-
fer key to receive Special Dial Tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 68
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BROKER'S CALL
BROKER'S CALL
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone user to alternate between two parties, talking
to one party while the other party remains on Hold on the same line. The Multiline Terminal user utilizes the
Transfer or Answer key to alternate between the two parties. The Single Line Telephone user uses the Hold fea-
ture to alternate between the two parties.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To activate Broker's Call from a Multiline Terminal with a call in progress
1. Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone. The first party is placed on hold.
2. Dial the new number and wait for the second party to answer.
3. Press the Transfer or Answer key and return to the first party. The second party is placed on hold.
4. Repeat as often as needed.
To activate a Broker's Call from a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press hookswitch) and receive feature dial tone. The first party is
placed on Consultation Hold.
2. Dial the Call Hold feature access code and receive extension dial tone.
3. Dial the new number and the second party answers.
4. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). The second party is placed on Consultation
Hold.
5. Dial the Call Hold feature access code and the second party is placed on Call Hold. The first party is recon-
nected.
6. Repeat the last two steps, as necessary.
Service Conditions
1. A three-way call may be established any time during a Broker's Call by pressing the CONF key on a Mul-
tiline Terminal.
2. Once a Single Line Telephone has set up a Broker's Call, a Conference cannot be established.
3. The party on hold during a Broker's Call will receive Music on Hold, if provided.
4. If the Recall key is pressed with a Broker's Call in progress, the currently connected party is dropped. The
party on Consultation Hold remains on Consultation Hold and new feature dial tone is provided. Restoring
the handset allows the Consultation Hold call to recall.
5. A Broker's call can also be initiated after receiving a Camp-On call. See Camp-on.
6. When a Multiline Terminal has a Broker's Call in progress, the Answer key alternates between the calls and
will not answer additional incoming calls.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL BACK
CALL BACK
General Description
This feature allows a calling party to set an automatic Call Back when a busy or no answer condition is encoun-
tered. When the busy station becomes idle, the station that set the Call Back will be called. In case of Call Back
no answer, the Call Back to the setting station is initiated immediately after the called station goes on hook after
making a call or accessing a feature.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Call Back from a Dial Pulse Single Line Telephone
1. Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone or ringback tone.
2. Dial “2” and receive service set tone (if single digit feature access codes are enabled),
OR
Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive feature dial tone. Dial the Call
Back feature access code if busy tone, dial 2 if ringback tone (if single feature access codes are enabled),
and receive service set tone.
3. Restore the handset.
4. When the busy station becomes idle, or the station that did not answer first initiates or answers a call or ac-
cesses a feature and then becomes idle, the station that set the Call Back will ring.
5. Upon the originator answering, the originally called station will ring.
To set Call Back from a DTMF Telephone
1. Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone or ringback tone.
2. Dial “2” and receive service set tone (if single digit access feature access codes are enabled) for busy tone
only.
OR
Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive feature dial tone. Dial the Call
Back feature access code if busy tone, dial 2 if ringback tone and receive service set tone.
3. Restore the handset.
4. When the busy station becomes idle, or the station that did not answer first initiates or answers a call or ac-
cesses a feature and then becomes idle, the station that set the Call Back will ring.
5. Upon answering, the originally called station will ring.
Note: Multiple Call Backs can be set by repeating the procedure above.
To set Call Back from a Multiline Terminal
1. Dial desired station number and receive busy tone or ringback tone.
2. Press the CALL BACK key or dial “2” and receive service set tone.
3. Restore handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 70
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL BACK
4. When the busy station becomes idle or the station that did not answer first initiates or answers a call or ac-
cesses a feature and then becomes idle, the station that set the Call Back will ring.
Note: Multiple Call Backs can be set by repeating the procedure above.
To cancel Call Back from a Single Line Telephone
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Back cancellation code and receive service set tone.
To cancel Call Back from a Multiline Terminal
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the CALL BACK key and receive service set tone.
Service Conditions
1. If a Call Back is not answered by the originator within 30 seconds, the Call Back is automatically cancelled.
2. A Call Back to a station in Line Lockout is denied.
3. Dial pulse Single Line Telephones can omit pressing the FLASH key (or momentarily pressing the hook-
switch) to set call back while receiving ringback tone.
4. If the station presses the FLASH key while receiving feature dial tone before setting the Call Back, the sta-
tion returns to receiving ringback tone.
5. When the called party is an Attendant Console, Call Back can not be set.
6. When the setting station is called back, Station Hunting and Call Pickup will not apply.
7. When the call is placed in UCD queue, Call Back can not be set.
8. A maximum of 128 stations can access this feature simultaneously.
9. This feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING
General Description
Call Forwarding allows calls directed to a station to be routed to another station, an Attendant, an outside num-
ber or voice mail equipment. The types of Call Forwarding provided are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding – All Calls*
Call Forwarding – Busy Line*
Call Forwarding – No Answer*
Call Forwarding – Destination
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line
Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer
Split Call Forwarding – All Calls*
Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line*
Split Call Forwarding – No Answer*
Additional Call Forwarding features include:
•
•
•
Attendant Call Forwarding Setup and Cancel
Call Forwarding – Override
Group Diversion
These features can be set/canceled from each station. The features marked by “*” can be set/canceled from a
MAT/CAT.
When the features marked by “*” are set/canceled from a MAT/CAT, the lamp indication of the Multiline Ter-
minal changes as it would if the features were set/canceled from the Multiline Terminal.
A MAT/CAT can overwrite or cancel these features marked by “*” which are set by each station, and vice versa.
A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding to outside number can be set simultaneously per system.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 72
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Attendant Call Forwarding Set-Up and Cancel
Attendant Call Forwarding Set-Up and Cancel
General Description
All of the various types of Call Forwarding can be set up or cancelled from the Attendant Console.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Call Forwarding – All Calls from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the originating station number.
4. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone.
To cancel Call Forwarding – All Calls from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature cancellation code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the originating station number and receive service set tone.
To set Call Forwarding – Busy Line from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the originating station number.
4. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone.
To cancel Call Forwarding – Busy Line from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – Busy Line cancellation code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the originating station number and receive service set tone.
To set Call Forwarding – No Answer from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the originating station number.
4. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone.
To cancel Call Forwarding – No Answer from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – No Answer cancellation code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the originating station number and receive service set tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Service Conditions
The Attendant can cancel any type of Call Forwarding set by an internal station.
Call Forwarding – All Calls
General Description
This feature allows all calls directed to a particular extension to be rerouted to an alternate destination, regardless
of the busy or idle status of the extension. Call Forwarding – All Calls can be set by an Attendant Console, the
individual station user, a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station's extension, or from an-
other station (which can program itself to be the destination of the rerouting).
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
• To set Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone. The associated LED lights and the LCD
displays:
SET
XXXX
(Target Station)
or
SET
OPR
(Operator)
4. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To set Call Forwarding – All Calls – Outside
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number.
4. Wait till service set tone is received, unless programming CM08-222=0.
5. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To monitor Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone or special dial tone (when lifting the handset).
2. Press the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access key. The LCD displays:
CF CALL
XXXX
(Target Station)
3. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – All Calls
• To cancel Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key and receive special dial tone. The LCD displays:
CF CALL
XXXX
(Target Station)
3. Press the * key and receive service set tone. The LED of the associated feature key will go out. The LCD
displays CANCEL.
4. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
From a Single Line Telephone
• To set Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone.
• To set Call Forwarding – All Calls – Outside
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the trunk access code and desired telephone number.
4. Wait until service set tone is received, unless programming CM08-222=0.
5. Replace the handset.
• To monitor Call Forwarding - All Calls
1. Lift the handset.
2. When Call Forwarding - All Calls has been set, special dial tone is heard.
3. Replace the handset.
• To cancel Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – All Calls cancellation code and receive service set tone.
Service Conditions
1. There is no limit to the number of stations that can set Call Forwarding – All Calls at one time.
2. Extensions can be allowed or disallowed this feature by Class of Service in system programming. A separate
Class of Service Assignment controls access to Call Forwarding – All Calls to outside numbers.
3. When Call Forwarding – All Calls is rerouted to another destination, one burst of ringing is sent to the for-
warded station to indicate that it is call forwarded (Single Line Telephone only).
4. When a call is forwarded to a Multiline Terminal with LCD, the display shows the initially called station's
number as well as the calling station's number.
5. Call Forwarding – All Calls assignments are retained in system memory when the system is re-initialized
or when there is a power failure.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – All Calls
6. A maximum of 26 digits (without access code) can be stored for Call Forwarding – All Calls to an outside
number.
7. Call Forwarding – All Calls to an outside number can be routed by the Least Cost Routing feature and re-
stricted by the Code Restriction feature.
8. More than one Call Forward can occur in the progress of a call. See Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls,
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line, and Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer.
9. Direct Inward Dial (DID) lines, DIT calls, Tie lines, ring transfer and internal incoming calls will follow the
Call Forward setting.
10. Only the destination station can call the station that is Call Forwarded.
11. If the Call Forward is rerouted to a hunt group and all members of the hunt group are busy, the forwarded
caller will receive busy tone.
12. If the Call Forward is rerouted to the pilot number of an Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group
and that pilot station has set Call Forward, the call will be forwarded.
13. When Call Forwarding – All Calls – Outside is set, the system can be programmed to allow or deny the set-
ting of the Call Forward with only a trunk access code. This can be set on a system-wide basis.
14. In the SMDR call record, the station that set Call Forwarding – All Calls – Outside will appear as the orig-
inator of the call.
15. SMDR only records if the Tandem Connection receives answer supervision.
16. The setting station's trunk restriction class is used to allow or deny the tandem connection on a Call For-
warding – All Calls – Outside.
17. Checking of the setting station's trunk restriction class can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis.
18. A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call to a station set for Call Forwarding – All Calls Outside will be
allowed or denied based on the forwarded station's trunk restriction class.
19. An internal station call to a station set for Call Forwarding – All Calls Outside will follow the restriction
class of the station set Call Forwarding.
When Call Forwarding to outside is executed, an object of the billing is as follows.
Station Set Call Forwarding
Billing Object
Single Line Telephone,
Multiline Terminal
Station set Call Forwarding
Virtual station
Originating station/trunk
20. When the station user that has set Call Forwarding lifts the handset, the station can receive special dial tone
by system programming.
21. A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding setting to outside number is allowed per system, including Call For-
warding – All Calls, Busy Line, No Answer.
•
•
MP without expansion memory (standard) : up to 240 setting
MP with expansion memory (optional) : up to 496 setting
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – Busy Line
Call Forwarding – Busy Line
General Description
This feature permits a call to a busy extension to be routed to a predesignated station, Attendant Console, or
voice mail equipment. Call Forwarding – Busy Line can be set or cancelled by an Attendant Console, the indi-
vidual station user, or a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station's extension.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
• To set Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone. The LCD displays:
SET
XXXX
(Target Station)
or
SET
OPR
(Operator)
4. The LED of the associated feature button lights.
5. Restore the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To monitor Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access key. The LCD displays:
CF BUSY XXXX
(Target Station)
3. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To set Call Forwarding – Busy Line – Outside
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the trunk access code and desired telephone number.
4. Wait till service set tone is received (unless programming CM08-222=0).
5. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To cancel Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access key and receive special dial tone. Press the * key and
receive service set tone. The LCD displays CANCELand the associated LED goes out.
3. Restore the handset or press the Speaker key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – Busy Line
From a Single Line Telephone
• To set Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone.
• To set Call Forwarding – Busy Line – Outside
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number.
4. Wait until the service set tone is received.
5. Replace the handset.
• To cancel Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – Busy Line cancellation code and receive service set tone.
Service Conditions
1. There is no limit to the number of stations that can set Call Forwarding – Busy Line at one time.
2. Extensions can be allowed or denied this feature by Class of Service in system programming.
3. Call Forwarding – Busy Line can be provided on a system or an individual basis.
4. Call Forwarding – Busy Line on a system basis allows any incoming Direct Inward Dial (DID), Direct In-
ward Termination (DIT), Tie line, Transfer, and internal calls which encounter a busy condition to be for-
warded to a predetermined location (Attendant Console, another station, or voice mail equipment).
5. Individually set Call Forwarding – Busy Line settings take precedence over system basis Call Forwarding
– Busy Line settings.
6. If the Call Forwarding – Busy Line is rerouted to a hunt group and all members of the hunt group are busy,
the forwarded caller will receive busy tone.
7. When a call is directed to the pilot number of an ACD/UCD group and that pilot station has set Call For-
warding – Busy Line, the call will be forwarded if all stations within the ACD/UCD group are busy.
8. When a calling station or Attendant Console receives busy tone after being call forwarded because of Call
Forwarding – Busy Line, the caller can activate Executive Override, Camp On, Attendant Override, Call
Back, Message Reminder, or other service features available on busy tone to the initially called station.
9. When a call is forwarded to a Multiline Terminal with LCD, the display shows the original called station's
number as well as the calling station's number.
10. Call Forwarding – No Answer can be set simultaneously with this feature to result in Call Forwarding –
Busy Line/No Answer. Call Forwarding – Busy Line and Call Forwarding – No Answer can be set to the
same or different extensions.
11. When Call Forwarding – Busy Line – Outside is set, the system can be programmed to allow or deny the
setting of the Call Forward with only a trunk access code. This can be set on a system-wide basis.
12. In the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record, the station that set Call Forwarding – Busy
Line – Outside will appear as the originator of the call.
13. SMDR only records if the Tandem Connection receives answer supervision.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 78
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – No Answer
14. The setting station's trunk restriction class is used to allow or deny the tandem connection on a Call For-
warding – Busy Line Outside.
15. Checking of the setting station's trunk restriction class can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis.
16. A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call to a station set for Call Forwarding – Busy Line Outside will
be allowed or denied based on the forwarded station's trunk restriction class.
17. An internal station call to a station set for Call Forwarding – Busy Line Outside will follow the restriction
class of the station set Call Forwarding.
When Call Forwarding to outside is executed, an object of the billing is as follows.
Station Set Call Forwarding
Billing Object
Single Line Telephone,
Multiline Terminal
Station set Call Forwarding
Virtual station
Originating station/trunk
18. A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding setting to outside number is allowed per system, including Call For-
warding – All Calls, Busy Line, No Answer.
•
•
MP without expansion memory (standard) : up to 240 setting
MP with expansion memory (optional) : up to 496 setting
Call Forwarding – No Answer
General Description
This feature reroutes calls, to extensions which do not answer, to another station, an Attendant Console or voice
mail equipment. Call Forwarding – No Answer can be set by the individual station user, an Attendant Console,
or by a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station's extension.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
• To set Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone. The LCD displays:
SET
XXXX (Target Station)
• To set Call Forwarding – No Answer – Outside
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number.
4. Wait until service set tone is received.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – No Answer
5. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To cancel Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift handset or press Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access key and receive special dial tone. Press the * key,
the associated LED goes out and service set tone is received. The LCD displays CANCEL.
From a Single Line Telephone
• To set Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone.
• To set Call Forwarding – No Answer – Outside
1. Lift the handset and receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number.
4. Wait until service set tone is received.
5. Replace the handset.
• To cancel Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial specific Call Forwarding – No Answer cancellation code and receive service set tone.
Service Conditions
1. An unlimited number of stations can set Call Forwarding – No Answer at one time.
2. Stations are allowed/disallowed this feature by Class Of Service in system programming.
3. Call Forwarding – No Answer can be provided on a system and an individual basis.
4. Call Forwarding on a system basis allows Direct Inward Dial (DID) calls or Tie Line calls which encounter
a no-answer condition to be forwarded to a predetermined location (Attendant Console, another station, or
voice mail equipment).
5. Individual Call Forwarding – No Answer settings take precedence over system Call Forwarding – No An-
swer settings.
6. Call Forwarding – No Answer timing, flexible in system programming, is as follows:
•
•
For direct incoming calls (DID, DIT, Tie) – 4 to 120 seconds (Default: 32-36 seconds).
For internal calls and transferred incoming calls – 4 to 120 seconds (Default: 32-36 seconds).
7. More than one call forward can occur in the progress of a call. See Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls,
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line and Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer.
8. Call Forwarding – Busy Line can be set simultaneously with this feature to result in Call Forwarding Busy/
No Answer. Call Forwarding Busy Line and Call Forwarding – No Answer can be set to the same or differ-
ent extensions.
9. When Call Forwarding – No Answer – Outside is set, the system can be programmed to allow or deny the
setting of the Call Forward with only a trunk access code. This can be set on a system-wide basis.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 80
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – Destination
10. In the SMDR call record, the station that set Call Forwarding – No Answer – Outside will appear as the
originator of the call.
11. SMDR only records if the Tandem Connection receives answer supervision.
12. The setting station's trunk restriction class is used to allow or deny the tandem connection on a Call For-
warding – No Answer – Outside.
13. Checking of the setting station's trunk restriction class can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis.
14. A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call to a station set for Call Forwarding – No Answer Outside will
be allowed or denied based on the forwarded station's trunk restriction class.
15. An internal station call to a station set for Call Forwarding – No Answer Outside will follow the restriction
class of the station set Call Forwarding.
When Call Forwarding to outside is executed, an object of the billing is as follows.
Station Set Call Forwarding
Billing Object
Single Line Telephone,
Multiline Terminal
Station set Call Forwarding
Virtual station
Originating station/trunk
16. A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding setting to outside number is allowed per system, including Call For-
warding – All Calls, Busy Line, No Answer.
•
•
MP without expansion memory (standard) : up to 240 setting
MP with expansion memory (optional) : up to 496 setting
Call Forwarding – Destination
General Description
This feature allows a station (A) user to set Call Forwarding – All Calls from another station (B) within the sys-
tem, to the user's station (A).
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
• To set Call Forwarding – Destination from destination station
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – Destination set key or dial the Call Forwarding – Destination feature access
code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the station number to be forwarded and receive service set tone. The LCD displays:
SET
XXXX
(Forwarded Station)
4. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls
• To cancel Call Forwarding – Destination from destination station
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – Destination Cancel key or dial the Call Forwarding – Destination Cancellation
code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the user's station number (forwarded station) and receive set tone.
4. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
From a Single Line Telephone
• To set Call Forwarding – Destination from destination station
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the specific Call Forwarding – Destination feature access code and receive dial tone.
3. Dial the station number to be forwarded and receive service set tone.
• To cancel Call Forwarding – Destination from destination station
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – Destination cancellation code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the user's station number (forwarded station) and receive service set tone.
• To cancel Call Forwarding – Destination from Call Forwarded station
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – All Calls cancellation code and receive service set tone.
Service Conditions
1. There is no limit to the number of stations which can set Call Forwarding – Destination.
2. Stations can be allowed or denied this feature by Class Of Service in system programming.
3. There is no limit to the number of Call Forwarding – Destinations which can be set to forward to a station
simultaneously.
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls
General Description
When a forwarded call is rerouted to a station which has also set a Call Forward, the call can be forwarded to
another station. A call can be forwarded up to a maximum of five times, as specified in system programming.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
The same operating procedures for Call Forwarding – All Calls apply.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 82
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls
Service Conditions
1. Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls can forward a maximum of five times when the called station sets Call
Forwarding – All Calls to a station that has set Call Forwarding – All Calls or Call Forwarding – Busy Line.
2. Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls cannot be performed for data calls.
3. If a calling station has been set to Call Forwarding – All Calls five times and encounters a sixth Call For-
warding – All Calls, the calling station is not forwarded, but receives busy tone if the destination station is
busy, or ringback tone if the destination station is idle.
4. If the destination of Call Forwarding – All Calls is set for Call Forwarding – Busy Line and is busy, for-
warding occurs.
5. When combining Call Forwarding – All Calls and Call Forwarding – Busy Line, and the fifth destination
station is busy, the calling party will hear busy tone.
6. If a destination in a Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls situation is busy, and has not set Call Forwarding
– Busy Line or All Calls, the calling party will receive busy tone.
7. If a destination station is busy, the calling station can activate Call Back, Camp On, Message Reminder, or
Executive Override to that destination station.
8. When Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls occurs, the display of the calling party's Multiline Terminal with
LCD will show the station number to which the call was forwarded. The display of the answering Multiline
Terminal with LCD will show the calling party (station or trunk) and the called number.
9. If the destination station in a combined Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls and Call Forwarding – Busy
Line situation is Call Forwarding – No Answer, Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer will be put into
effect. If the destination station of Call Forwarding – No Answer is set to Call Forwarding – Busy Line, Call
Forwarding – All Calls forwarding will be restricted.
10. If two stations have set Call Forwarding – All Calls to each other, an incoming call to either of these stations
will not be forwarded; therefore, an infinite loop cannot occur.
11. If the incoming call returns to a station that has already taken part in a Multiple Call Forwarding (Busy or
All Calls) of that call, Call Forwarding – All Calls service from that station is not be performed again.
12. If an incoming call encounters Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls and the final destination of the call for-
ward is the Attendant Console, the incoming call will appear on the ATND key.
13. If a station has set Call Forwarding – All Calls to another station in a different tenant and that station is set
to Call Forwarding – Busy Line or All Calls to the Attendant Console, the calling station will be connected
to the first station's Attendant Console.
14. A Direct In Termination call to a station which has set Call Forwarding – All Calls will be forwarded. The
call can be forwarded to another station or to an Attendant Console.
15. If the destination station of Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls is in a hunt group and is set to Call For-
warding – Busy Line to a station in another hunt group, it can be determined through system data whether
the calling party hunts to the called party's hunt group or the terminating party's hunt group when the for-
warded to stations are busy.
16. If the destination of Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls is the pilot of an Automatic/Uniform Call Distri-
bution (ACD/UCD) group, ACD/UCD is executed.
17. If a member of an ACD/UCD group is a member of a Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls sequence, that
station is skipped in ACD/UCD hunting.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line
Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line
General Description
This feature permits a call to a busy station to be forwarded, multiple times, to a predesignated idle station.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
The same operating procedures for Call Forwarding – All Calls apply.
Service Conditions
1. Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line can not be performed for data calls.
2. Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line can route a call up to five times when the called station sets Call For-
warding – Busy Line to a station that is busy that has set Call Forwarding – Busy Line and so on.
3. If the calling station is set as the forwarded destination of its own call in a multiple call forwarding scheme,
Call Forwarding – Busy Line at that point will not take place.
4. If the incoming call returns to one of the stations that has taken party in the process of multiple call forward-
ing, the Call Forwarding – Busy Line from that station will not be performed.
5. If all the stations are busy in a multiple call forwarding sequence, a calling internal station may then activate
Call Back, Message Reminder, Camp On, or Executive Override to the called station.
6. If the station is a Direct In Termination call, Call Forwarding – Busy Line is not activated. The calling party
may be forwarded to the Attendant Console, to Trunk Answer any Station, put in Automatic Camp-On, or
can receive ringback until the station becomes idle.
7. If the called station is set as the forwarded destination in a multiple call forwarding scheme, Call Forwarding
– Busy Line at that point will not take place.
8. If the called station is set to Call Forwarding – Busy Line to another station in a different tenant and that
station is set to Call Forwarding – Busy Line to the Attendant Console, the calling station will be connected
to the calling station's Attendant Console.
9. For Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy Line, the display of a Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the
called station number and the final forwarded station number for the calling party. For the final forwarded-
to station, the display of the Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the called number and the calling party
(station or trunk).
Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer
General Description
This feature permits a call to an unanswered station, the ability to be forwarded multiple times to a predesignated
station that does not have Call Forwarding – No Answer set or to the Attendant Console.
Station Application
All stations.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 84
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
Operating Procedure
The same operating procedures for Call Forwarding – All Calls apply.
Service Conditions
1. Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer can only be performed for non-data calls.
2. Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer can be forwarded as many times as desired. The call will stop for-
warding when it terminates to the Attendant Console or to a station not assigned with Call Forwarding – No
Answer.
3. When a station encounters a Call Forwarding – No Answer condition and the station it is forwarded to is
busy, the system will check the status of the forwarded busy station at intervals pre-assigned in system pro-
gramming.
4. Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer service can be utilized by the following incoming calls:
•
•
•
•
•
Intra-office
Direct Inward Dialing
Direct In Termination
Night Service
Hot Line
5. If a station transfers a call to another station that set Call Forwarding – No Answer and releases from the
connection, recalls will override Call Forwarding – No Answer if the call is unanswered after a pre-deter-
mined time.
6. Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer will not be activated if the calling party encounters a busy station
that has activated Call Forwarding – Busy Line.
7. If a station sets Call Forwarding – No Answer to another station in a different tenant and that station is set
to Call Forwarding – No Answer to the Attendant, the calling station will be connected to the calling sta-
tion's Attendant Console.
8. For Multiple Call Forwarding – No Answer, the display of a Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the
final forwarded-to station number for the calling party. If the final forwarded-to station is a multiline termi-
nal with LCD, the forwarded-from station number and the calling party number (station on trunk) will be
displayed.
Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
General Description
This feature allows all internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to different destinations in-
dividually, regardless of the busy or idle status of the extension.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To activate Split Call Forwarding, both Split Call Forwarding and Call Forwarding settings are required. For
Call Forwarding settings, refer to the description of Call Forwarding – All Calls.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
• To set split Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Split Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired destination number (0-9) and receive service set tone.
Number
Destination
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 0)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 1)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 2)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 3)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 4)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 5)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 6)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 7)
Target station for Call Forwarding – All Calls
Station Speed Dialing
The associated LED lights and the LCD displays:
SET
XXXX
(Target Station)
or
SET
OPR
(Operator)
The LED of the associated feature button lights.
4. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To monitor Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone or special dial tone (when lifting the handset).
2. Press the Split Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access key.
The LCD displays:
CF ALL
XXXX (Target station)
3. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To cancel Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Split Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access key and receive special dial tone.
The LCD displays:
CF ALL
XXXX (Target station)
3. Press the * key and receive service set tone. The LCD displays CANCELand the associated LED goes off.
4. Restore the handset or press the Speaker key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
From a Single Line Telephone
• To set Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired destination number (0-9) and receive service set tone.
Number
Destination
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 0)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 1)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 2)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 3)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 4)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 5)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 6)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls (Block 7)
Target station for Call Forwarding – All Calls
Station Speed Dialing
4. Replace the handset.
• To monitor Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset.
2. When Split Call Forwarding – All Calls has been set, special dial tone is heard.
3. Replace the handset.
• To cancel Split Call Forwarding – All Calls
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Split Call Forwarding – All Calls cancellation code and receive service set tone.
3. Replace the handset.
Service Conditions
1. This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations. One is the target station assigned
for Call Forwarding – All Calls, the other is the target station assigned for Split Call Forwarding – All Calls.
The target stations for Split Call Forwarding are assigned in system programming.
2. Either Call Forwarding – All Calls or Split Call Forwarding – All Calls can be selected for the feature avail-
able per tenant in system programming, depending on the type of the incoming call which is an internal call/
attendant assisted call, a Tie Line call, or a C.O. call.
3. Split Call Forwarding – All Calls allows any incoming Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct Inward Termi-
nation (DIT), Tie Line, Transfer, and internal calls to be forwarded to a predetermined location (Attendant
Console, another station, or voice mail equipment).
4. When the station user that has set Split Call Forwarding lifts the handset, the station can receive special dial
tone by system programming.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line
Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line
General Description
This feature allows internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to separate destinations. Desti-
nations may be an internal station, Attendant Console, or voice mail.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To activate Split Call Forwarding, both Split Call Forwarding and Call Forwarding settings are required. For
Call Forwarding settings, refer to the description of Call Forwarding – Busy Line.
From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
• To set split Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired destination number (0-9) and receive service set tone.
Number
Destination
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 0)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 1)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 2)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 3)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 4)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 5)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 6)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 7)
Target station for Call Forwarding – Busy Line
Station Speed Dialing
The LCD displays:
SET
XXXX
(Target Station)
or
SET
OPR
(Operator)
The LED of the associated feature button lights.
4. Restore the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To cancel Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access key and receive special dial tone. Press the * key and
receive service set tone. The LCD displays CANCELand the associated LED goes off.
3. Restore the handset or press the Speaker key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 88
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Split Call Forwarding – No Answer
From a Single Line Telephone and Multiline Terminal without Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature key
• To set Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding – Busy Line feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial destination number (0-9) and receive service set tone.
Number
Destination
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 0)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 1)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 2)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 3)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 4)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 5)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 6)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line (Block 7)
Target station for Call Forwarding – Busy Line
Station Speed Dialing
4. Replace the handset.
• To cancel Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial Call Forwarding – Busy Line cancellation code and receive service set tone.
Service Conditions
1. This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations. One is the target station assigned
for Call Forwarding – Busy Line, the other is the target station assigned for Split Call Forwarding – Busy
Line. The target stations for Split Call Forwarding are assigned in system programming.
2. Either Call Forwarding – Busy Line or Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line can be selected for the feature
available per tenant in system programming, depending on the type of the incoming call which is an internal
call/attendant assisted call, a Tie Line call, or a C.O. call.
3. Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line allows any incoming Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct Inward Ter-
mination (DIT), Tie Line, Transfer, and internal calls which encounter a busy condition to be forwarded to
a predetermined location (Attendant Console, another station, or voice mail equipment).
4. Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line and Split Call Forwarding – No Answer must be set to the same desti-
nation to result in Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line/No Answer.
Split Call Forwarding – No Answer
General Description
This feature allows internal and external calls, to extensions that do not answer, to be rerouted to separate des-
tinations individually.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Split Call Forwarding – No Answer
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To activate Split Call Forwarding, both Split Call Forwarding and Call Forwarding settings are required. For
Call Forwarding settings, refer to the description of Call Forwarding – No Answer.
From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
• To set split Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Split Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access key and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired destination number (0-9) and receive service set tone.
Number
Destination
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 0)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 1)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 2)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 3)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 4)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 5)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 6)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 7)
Target station for Call Forwarding – No Answer
Station Speed Dialing
The LCD displays:
SET
XXXX (Target station)
4. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
• To cancel Split Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Split Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access key and receive special dial tone. Press the *
key and receive service set tone. The LCD displays CANCELand the associated LED goes off.
3. Replace the handset or press the Speaker key.
From a Single Line Telephone
• To set Split Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Split Call Forwarding – No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 90
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding – Override
3. Dial desired destination number (0-9) and receive service set tone.
Number
Destination
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 0)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 1)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 2)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 3)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 4)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 5)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 6)
Target station for Split Call Forwarding – No Answer (Block 7)
Target station for Call Forwarding – No Answer
Station Speed Dialing
4. Replace the handset.
• To cancel Split Call Forwarding – No Answer
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the specific Split Call Forwarding – No Answer cancellation code and receive service set tone.
3. Replace the handset.
Service Conditions
1. This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations. One is the target station assigned
for Call Forwarding – No Answer, the other is the target station assigned for Split Call Forwarding – No
Answer. The target stations for Split Call Forwarding are assigned in system programming.
2. Either Call Forwarding – No Answer or Split Call Forwarding – No Answer can be selected for the feature
available per tenant in system programming, depending on the type of the incoming call which is an internal
call/attendant assisted call, a Tie Line call, or a C.O. call.
3. Split Call Forwarding – No Answer allows any incoming Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct Inward Ter-
mination (DIT), Tie Line, Transfer, and internal calls which encounter a no-answer condition to be forward-
ed to a predetermined location (Attendant Console, another station, or voice mail equipment).
4. Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line and Split Call Forwarding – No Answer must be set to the same desti-
nation to result in Split Call Forwarding – Busy Line/No Answer.
Call Forwarding – Override
General Description
This feature allows the call forward destination station to call the station which set call forward. The call forward
setting will be ignored.
Station Application
All stations.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL FORWARDING
Group Diversion
Operating Procedure
Normal call handling procedures apply.
Service Conditions
This feature is allowed to all stations and the Attendant Console.
Group Diversion
General Description
This feature allows all calls terminated to an extension that are not answered within a predetermined time to be
forwarded to a predesignated station.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The system provides three methods of Call Forwarding – No Answer:
Call Forwarding -
No Answer
Call Forwarding -
No Answer
(Individual)
(System)
Group Basis
Group Diversion
From MAT/CAT
Individual Station Basis
Tenant Basis
Set/Cancel
Applicable for
Priority
From STA/ATT
From MAT/CAT
STA call
TRK call (DID, DIT, TIE Line)
ATT call
STA call
TRK call
ATT call
TRK call
(DID/TIE only)
ATT Transfer Recalls
(1)
(3)
(2)
2. The maximum number of Group Diversion groups per system is 31.
3. The number of stations that can be included in the same group is unlimited.
4. The Group Diversion group has no relation with Call Pick Up Group, Station Hunting Group, or any other
group.
5. No-Answer timing for Group Diversion is the same timing as for Call Forwarding – No Answer.
6. The destination of this service must be assigned for each group separately.
7. An Attendant Console cannot be assigned as the destination of this feature.
8. Incoming direct trunk appearances will not follow Group Diversion programming.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 92
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL PARK
Call Park - System
CALL PARK
General Description
This feature enables a station user or attendant to place a call into predesignated Call Park locations. The station
user or attendant is then free to process other calls. This feature is available system wide and for individual ten-
ants.
Call Park - System
General Description
When a call is parked by Call Park-System, the call can be retrieved from Call Park by any station in the system.
Station Application
All stations and Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
To place a call into Call Park-System
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive feature dial tone.
2. The call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold.
3. Dial the Call Park-System feature access code.
4. Dial the Call Park-System location number (00-19) and receive service set tone. (If the Call Park number is
busy, dial another location number using the Step Call feature until an idle park location is accessed).
5. Restore the handset.
• From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
1. Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone.
2. The call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold.
3. Dial the Call Park-System feature access code. The first available Call Park location is selected by the sys-
tem and displayed in the LCD. Receive service set tone.
4. Restore handset.
OR
1. Press the Call Park-System feature key and receive service set tone.
2. Restore the handset.
• From a Multiline Terminal without LCD
1. Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone.
2. The call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold.
3. Dial the Call Park-System feature access code, or press Call Park-System feature key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL PARK
Call Park - System
4. Dial the Call Park location number (00-19) and receive service set tone. (If Call Park-System number is
busy, dial another location number using the Step Call feature until an idle park location is accessed.)
5. Restore the handset.
• From an Attendant Console
1. Dial Call Park-System feature access code. The first available Call Park location is selected by the system
and displayed in the LCD. Receive service set tone.
2. Press the RELEASE Key.
To retrieve a call from Call Park-System
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. From any station, go off hook and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Park-System retrieval access code.
3. Dial the Call Park-System location number (00-19).
4. Converse.
• From a Multiline Terminal with a Trunk Direct Appearance
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Press Trunk Direct Appearance feature key flashing.
• From an Attendant Console
1. Press LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Park-System feature access code or press the Call Park-System feature key.
3. Dial the Call Park-System location number (00-19).
4. Converse.
Service Conditions
1. A station user can originate and receive calls while having a call in Call Park-System.
2. A maximum of 20 simultaneous calls can be parked within a system. A station user can place multiple calls
into Call Park-System provided the maximum number is not exceeded.
3. Any internal or external call can be placed into Call Park-System.
4. Any call left on Call Park-System for more than a preprogrammed time interval will recall to the primary
extension of the station which originally parked the call. Once this recall has started, the Call Park-System
location becomes idle. When Call Park-System recalls, the parked party hears ringback tone.
5. If the trunk which was placed in Call Park is assigned to any Multiline Terminal as a direct trunk appearance,
the system can be programmed on a per system basis whether or not the Multiline Terminal can retrieve the
parked call by pressing the Trunk key. Trunk key LED indication is as follows:
•
•
Possible to retrieve:flashing Green/Red (hold)
Impossible to retrieve:steady Red (busy)
6. When a Call Park-System recalls to a station, any other station can pick it up using Call Pickup - Direct, Call
Pickup - Group or Call Pickup - Designated Group.
7. When attempting to set Call Park-System to a busy Call Park-System location, Step Call can be used to ac-
cess an idle location.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 94
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL PARK
Call Park - Tenant
8. A call can be retrieved from Call Park-System while receiving feature dial tone.
9. If a station other than the station that originally parked the call retrieves the call, Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) will record a transfer.
10. Parked calls receive Music On Hold, if provided.
11. When a Call Park-System recalls to an Attendant Console, no LED indication is provided. However, the call
park location will appear in the display.
12. No LED indication for the Call Park-System key on an Attendant Console is provided.
Call Park - Tenant
General Description
When a call is parked by Call Park-Tenant, the call can be retrieved from Call Park-Tenant by any station within
the tenant from which the call was originally parked.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To place a call into Call Park-Tenant
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive feature dial tone.
2. Call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold.
3. Dial the Call Park-Tenant feature access code.
4. Dial the Call Park-Tenant location number (1-8) and receive service set tone. (If Call Park number is busy,
dial another location number using the Step Call feature until idle Call Park location is accessed).
5. Receive service set tone.
6. Restore the handset.
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone.
2. Call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold.
3. Dial Call Park-Tenant feature access code.
4. Dial Call Park-Tenant location number (1-8) and receive service set tone. (If Call Park number is busy, dial
another location number using the Step Call feature until idle Call Park location is accessed).
5. Receive service set tone.
6. Restore handset.
OR
1. Press the Hold key if Call Park-Tenant feature key is provided on the Multiline Terminal.
2. Restore the handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL PARK
Call Park - Tenant
To retrieve a call from Call Park-Tenant
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Go off hook and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Park-Tenant retrieval access code.
3. Dial the Call Park-Tenant location number (1-8).
4. Converse.
• From a Multiline Terminal with Call Park-Tenant feature key
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Call Park-Tenant feature key (flashing).
3. Dial the Call Park-Tenant location number (1-8).
4. Converse.
• From a Multiline Terminal with Trunk - Direct Appearances
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Trunk-Direct Appearances key flashing.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 8 simultaneous calls can be parked within a tenant. A station user can place multiple calls
into Call Park-Tenant provided the maximum number is not exceeded.
2. A station user can originate and receive calls while having a call in Call Park-Tenant.
3. Any internal or external can be placed into Call Park-Tenant.
4. Any call left on Call Park-Tenant for more than a preprogrammed time interval will recall to the primary
extension of the station which originally parked the call. If the call was parked using a Call Park-Tenant key,
the call will recall to that key. (When Call Park-System recalls, the parked party will hear ringback tone.)
5. If the trunk which was placed in Call Park is assigned to any Multiline Terminal as a Trunk Direct Appear-
ance, system programming determines whether or not the Multiline Terminal can retrieve the parked call by
pressing the Trunk key. Trunk key LED indication is as follows:
•
•
Possible to retrieve: Flashing as Green/Red (hold)
Impossible to retrieve: Steady as Red (busy)
6. When attempting to set Call Park-Tenant to a busy Call Park-Tenant location, Step Call can be used to ac-
cess an idle location.
7. A call cannot be retrieved from feature dial tone.
8. If a station other than the station that originally parked the call retrieves the call, Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) will record a Transfer.
9. Parked calls can receive Music On Hold.
10. A Call Park-Tenant location key (1-8) can be assigned to a Multiline Terminal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 96
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL PICKUP
Call Pickup - Direct
CALL PICKUP
General Description
This feature enables a station user to answer any call directed to another station, to a station within their own
Call Pickup Group, or to a station within a different Call Pickup Group. Three Call Pickup methods are avail-
able: Call Pickup - Direct, Call Pickup - Group, and Call Pickup - Designated Group.
Call Pickup - Direct
General Description
This method permits a station user to pickup a call to any other station in the system by dialing a specific Call
Pickup feature access code and the number of the called extension.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Single Line Telephone
1. Go off hook and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Pickup - Direct feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the extension number of ringing station.
4. Converse.
From a Multiline Terminal
1. Go off hook on an extension line and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Pickup - Direct feature access code or press Call Pickup - Direct function key and receive fea-
ture dial tone.
3. Dial the extension number of the ringing station.
4. Converse.
From an Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Call Pickup - Direct feature access code.
3. Dial the extension number of the ringing station.
4. Converse.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL PICKUP
Call Pickup - Group
Service Conditions
1. All ringing calls directed to an extension, including voice calls, can be picked up by this feature, except for
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing and Call Back.
2. This feature can be activated from feature dial tone.
3. This feature may be allowed or denied based on station Class of Service.
4. A fully restricted station cannot pickup an incoming C.O. call.
5. An Attendant console can only use Call Pickup - Direct for calls that have been transferred by another At-
tendant console.
Call Pickup - Group
General Description
This method permits a station user to answer any calls directed to other extensions in their preset pickup group
by dialing a Call Pickup - Group feature access code.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Ringing telephone in your Call Pickup Group
1. Go off hook on an extension line and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Pickup - Group feature access code.
3. Converse.
Service Conditions
1. All ringing calls directed to extensions in the same Call Pickup Group can be picked up by this feature, ex-
cept for Trunk Queuing - Outgoing and Call Back.
2. This feature can be activated from feature dial tone.
3. There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup Groups.
4. A fully restricted station cannot pickup an incoming C.O. call.
5. An individual station may be assigned to only one Call Pickup Group.
6. The maximum number of telephones within a group is 60.
7. If more than one station within the group is ringing, the system will connect the calls in the order in which
the system data for the group is stored.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 98
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL PICKUP
Call Pickup - Designated Group
Call Pickup - Designated Group
General Description
This method permits a station user to answer an incoming call directed to another group by dialing the Call Pick-
up - Designated Group feature access code and any station within the group to which the ringing station belongs.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Ringing telephone in another Call Pickup Group
1. Go off hook on an extension line and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial Call Pickup - Designated Group feature access code.
3. Dial any station number within the Call Pickup Group to which the ringing station belongs.
4. Converse.
Service Conditions
1. All ringing calls directed to an extension in a Call Pickup Group can be picked up by this feature, except for
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing and Call Back.
2. This feature can not be activated from feature dial tone.
3. A fully restricted station cannot pickup an incoming C.O. call.
4. If more than one station within the group is ringing, the system will connect the calls in the order in which
the system data for the group is stored.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL REDIRECT
CALL REDIRECT
General Description
Without answering incoming calls or held calls which terminates to the line keys of a Multiline Terminal, the
calls can be transferred to a pre-programmed station or Voice Mail System. Two transferring destination number
can be designated per tenant, in system data programming. This feature can be used together with the Caller ID
Display feature.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
When Caller ID Display feature is provided to the Multiline Terminal
1. Confirm the calling party’s information by the operation of Caller ID Display.
Note: For the operating procedure of Caller ID Display, refer to the pages of Caller ID Display.
2. While in the Caller ID Display (CID) mode (while the CID key lamp lights), press the Call Redirect (CRD)
key assigned to one of the programmable key on the Multiline Terminal.
The call is transferred to the pre-assigned destination station and the CID key lamp goes out.
When Caller ID Display feature is not provided to the Multiline Terminal
1. Press the CRD key. The Multiline Terminal comes into CRD (Call Redirect) mode for six seconds, the CRD
key lamp lights.
2. While in the CRD mode (while the CRD key lamp lights), press the line key of the incoming/held call.
The call is transferred to the pre-assigned destination station and the CID key lamp goes out.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 8 Multiline Terminals can operate the Call Redirect (CRD) simultaneously per system,
including the terminal which is on Caller ID Display (CID) mode.
If the CRD key is pressed on the 9th Multiline Terminal, CRD key lamp lights in a moment (0.5 seconds),
then the call is transferred to the destination station.
2. CRD mode is continued for 6 seconds after the CRD key is pressed. After 6 seconds, the CRD key lamp
goes out automatically and CRD mode is cancelled.
3. Two transfer destination can be designated per tenant by system data programming. However, one of these
must be a station, and the another must be a voice mail station.
4. If the call cannot be transferred to the destination station due to the busy or restriction of the destination,
CID and CRD mode is cancelled.
5. When the following terminating system is assigned to the trunk, the call which is terminated to the trunk
access key can be transferred by the CRD key.
•
•
Trunk-Direct Appearances
Trunk-Direct Appearances+TAS
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL REDIRECT
6. On the following conditions, the call cannot be transferred by the CRD key because the destination is re-
garded as busy state.
•
•
•
When the call is a Camp-On call, and the destination is a UCD queue.
When the call is held on an extension line/trunk access key, and the destination is a UCD queue.
When the call is terminating to or held on a trunk access key, and the destination is setting Call For-
warding-All Calls-Outside/Busy Line-Outside.
7. A call which is set Exclusive Hold by the other station cannot be transferred by the CRD key.
8. A voice call and a call from an Attendant Console cannot be transferred by the CRD key.
9. The system regards the Call Redirect operation as a Call Forwarding-No Answer. Information of the CRD
setting station is sent to the destination station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL TRANSFER
Call Transfer - All Calls
CALL TRANSFER
General Description
This feature permits a station user to transfer a call to another station in the system directly, or with assistance
from the attendant.
Call Transfer - All Calls
General Description
This feature permits a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing calls to another station within the system
without attendant assistance.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To transfer a call in progress from a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive feature dial tone.
2. Dial the third party and receive ringback tone.
3. Restore the handset before the third party answers. The first and third parties will be connected when the
third party answers.
OR
Wait for the third party to answer and announce the transfer while keeping the first party on Consultation
Hold. When the station user hangs up, the first and third parties are connected automatically.
To transfer a call in progress from a Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone.
2. Dial the third party and receive ringback tone.
3. Restore the handset before the third party answers. The first and third parties will be connected when the
third party answers.
OR
Wait for the third party to answer and announce the transfer while keeping the first party on Consultation
Hold. When the station user hangs up, the first and third parties are connected automatically.
Service Conditions
1. The station performing the Call Transfer can abandon the connection before the called party answers. If the
called station does not answer within the predetermined time, a recall is initiated to the transferring station.
2. Outgoing calls may be transferred immediately.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 102
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL TRANSFER
Call Transfer - Attendant
3. A three-party Conference can be accessed from the Call Transfer state. The three parties connected can be
as follows:
•
•
•
Three stations
Two stations and one trunk
One station and two trunks
4. A four-party Conference can be accessed from the Call Transfer state by Multiline Terminals only. When
the Consultation Hold of a three-party Conference connection is followed by calling another internal station,
a four-way connection can be initiated. Refer to the Conference (Three/Four party) Features and Specifica-
tions for additional information.
5. The maximum number of simultaneous Conferences per system is 16.
Call Transfer - Attendant
General Description
This feature permits a station user, while connected to an internal or outside call, to signal the Attendant and
have the Attendant transfer the call to another station within the system or to an outside connection.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Calling the Attendant
1. While engaged in a call, press the FLASH key on a Single Line Telephone or the Transfer key on a Multiline
Terminal and receive feature dial tone.
2. Dial the operator access code (normally "0"). The Attendant Console RCL lamp flashes and ringing is heard.
The station receives ringback tone.
3. After the Attendant answers, request the transfer and restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is available for incoming and outgoing C.O. calls and station-to-station calls.
2. When the Attendant Console is in Night Service, the transferring station will receive reorder tone. Refer to
Attendant Night Transfer Features and Specifications for more information.
3. The Call Transfer-Attendant feature allows a station user, while participating in a two-party connection, to
call the Attendant so that the Attendant may transfer the call or provide other assistance as required. A two-
party connection can be comprised of two stations, or a station and a trunk
4. The Call Transfer - Attendant feature can be used by a fully restricted station. The Attendant can transfer a
fully restricted station to another station only.
5. Any station, including Housephones without a dial, can transfer a call to the Attendant. Some additional sys-
tem programming may be necessary.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLER ID CLASS
CALLER ID CLASS
General Description
This feature receives the calling subscriber’s name and number sent from a public network using a MODEM
signal and displays the name or number on an LCD of a Multiline Terminal and an Attendant Console.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD and Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
To display the calling subscriber’s name or number when receiving/answering a call
No manual operation is required.
In case of receiving both the name and the number, it can be specified by system programming which one has
priority for display.
To change the name/number display
Every time the Name/Number Display Change key is pushed on the Multiline Terminal or the Attendant Con-
sole, the name and number are shown alternately.
To store the subscriber’s number for Save & Repeat feature
During a call, push the S&R (Save & Repeat) 0/1/2 key.
The S&R lamp lights if the number has been stored.
In the case that no number has been sent from the public network, the S&R lamp will go off because the number
has not been stored.
To redial by Save & Repeat feature
Push the S&R 0/1/2 key after hearing the dial tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 104
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLER ID CLASS
Service Conditions
1. Up to 14 digits of the calling subscriber’s name or number can be displayed on the LCD of a Multiline Ter-
minal or an Attendant Console.
2. Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber’s number can be recorded on the SMDR.
3. Up to 24 digits of the calling subscriber’s number can be sent to the OAI computer.
4. The 4RSTC card and the 4COTG/8COTQ card are required for receiving the Caller ID signals.
5. In case of receiving the subscriber’s name while another name is being assigned by system programming,
it can be set which one has priority.
6. The kind of the ringing tone can be assigned to each calling subscriber’s number respectively.
7. The destination station in the Day Mode/Night Mode can be specified for each calling subscriber’s number.
8. The priority for queuing (when the destination station belongs to an UCD group and all the stations are busy)
can be set by each calling subscriber’s number.
9. It can be specified whether Call Waiting will be set or not by each calling subscriber’s number.
10. Table 0 in CMDC YY = 00-63 is reserved for incoming numbers not programmed in the system.
11. When the system is in Mode “A” or “B,” caller ID follows night termination of caller ID Development Data
Assignment.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLER ID DISPLAY
CALLER ID DISPLAY
General Description
Without answering incoming calls or held calls which terminates to the line keys of a Multiline Terminal, the
calling party’s information can be confirmed by the indications on the LCD. The following information is indi-
cated according to the kind of the calls.
Displayed Information
Kind of Calling Party/Network
Upper on LCD
Station number
Lower on LCD
Extension
TI-ANI
Station’s name if provided
Kind of trunk, trunk number
Calling subscriber’s number
Calling subscriber’s number or
Calling subscriber’s name
Caller ID Class
ISDN
Kind of trunk, trunk number
Calling party’s sub-address
Station number
Calling subscriber’s number
Station’s name if provided
Calling subscriber’s number
None
CCIS
Kind of trunk
Other trunks
Kind of trunk, trunk number
“OPR”
Attendant Console
None
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
1. Press a CID (Caller ID Display) key assigned to one of the programmable key on the Multiline Terminal.
The Multiline Terminal stays in CID mode for six seconds, the CID key lamp lights, and the LCD displays
the calling party’s information of the incoming/held call for six seconds.
2. If there are plural incoming calls or held calls, press the desired line key while the CID key lamp lights.
The LCD displays the calling party’s information of the incoming/held call for six seconds.
If the line key which is pressed while CID mode has no incoming/held call, CID mode is cancelled.
3. When the CID key is pressed again in CID mode, the CID key lamp goes out and CID mode is cancelled.
4. When the CID key is pressed during conversation, the LCD displays the calling party’s information of the
incoming/held call for six seconds.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 8 Multiline Terminals can come into CID mode simultaneously per system, including the
terminal which is on Call Redirect operation.
2. CID mode is continued for 6 seconds after the CID key is pressed. After 6 seconds, the CID key lamp goes
out automatically and CID mode is cancelled.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 106
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALLER ID DISPLAY
3. If there is no incoming/held call on the line key and there is no Camp-On call, the Multiline Terminal does
not come into CID mode even if the CID key is pressed.
4. If there are plural incoming/held calls, Camp-On calls, the following priority for displaying is applied:
a. Camp-On call information set to the call in progress on the Multiline Terminal
b. Incoming/held call information in order of the line key number (lowest to highest number)
5. When a call is transferred by Consultation Hold, the display shows the following information.
Before the transfer operation finishes; the LCD displays the information of the station which holds the call.
After the transfer operation finishes; the LCD displays the information of the held station/trunk.
6. When a call is set Executive Hold, the call information cannot be displayed on the other Multiline Terminal.
7. The information of voice call cannot be displayed.
8. When the following terminating system is assigned to the trunk, the calling party information of the call
which is terminated to the trunk access key can be displayed by the CID key.
•
•
Trunk-Direct Appearances
Trunk-Direct Appearance+TAS
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMP-ON
CAMP-ON
General Description
This feature provides selected stations or outside calls with Camp-On capability to a busy internal station. Two
Camp-On methods are provided. The call waiting method allows a station or an outside party to camp itself on
to a busy station. The transfer method allows a transferred outside call to be camped-on to a busy station.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Camp-On (call waiting method)
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone.
2. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). Feature dial tone is received.
3. Dial the Camp-On (call waiting) feature access code and receive special ringback tone. Camp-On tone (4
tone burst) is sent to the busy station.
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone.
2. Press the Transfer key. Feature dial tone is received.
3. Dial the Camp-On (call waiting) feature access code and receive special ring back tone. Camp-On tone (4
tone burst) is sent to the busy station.
• From an outside party on DID incoming call
1. Dial desired station number and receive busy tone.
2. Camp-On (call waiting) is automatically set if the Camp-On feature is allowed.
3. Receive ringback tone. Camp-On tone (3 tone burst) is sent to the busy station.
To set Camp-On with an outside call in progress (transfer method)
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). The call in progress remains on Consultation
Hold and feature dial tone is received.
2. Dial the desired station and receive busy tone.
3. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). Feature dial tone is received.
4. Dial the Camp-On (transfer) feature access code and receive service set tone. Camp-On tone (two tone
bursts) is sent to the busy station.
5. Restore the handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 108
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMP-ON
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Transfer key. The call in progress remains on Consultation Hold and feature dial tone is received.
2. Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone.
3. Press the Transfer key. Feature dial tone is received.
4. Dial the Camp-On (transfer) feature access code and receive service set tone. Camp-On tone (two tone
bursts) is sent to the busy station.
5. Restore the handset.
To answer a Camp-On (transfer method or Call Waiting method) from any station
1. Receive Camp-On tone.
2. From a Single Line Telephone, momentarily press the hookswitch and dial the Call Hold feature access
code. From a Multiline Terminal, press the FLASH key or Answer key. The existing call is placed on Call
Hold and the Camp-On call is automatically answered.
To answer a Camp-On (Call Waiting method-outside calls) from any station
1. Receive Camp-On (Call Waiting) tone.
2. From a Single Line Telephone, momentarily press the hookswitch. From a Multiline Terminal, press the
FLASH key or Answer key. The existing call is placed on Call Hold and the Camp-On call is automatically
answered.
3. To alternate between two calls, press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) or Answer key.
OR
1. Receive Camp-On (Call Waiting) tone.
2. Complete the existing call and restore the handset.
3. The Camp-On call is automatically terminated.
4. Lift the handset.
Service Conditions
1. Camp-On tone for call waiting method (internal calls) is 4 (four) tone burst. Camp-On tone for transfer
method is two tone bursts. Camp-On tone for the call waiting method (outside calls) is three bursts.
2. When Camp-On is activated to a station, any other Camp-On attempts to that station are denied and reorder
tone is provided (transfer method) or busy tone is provided (call waiting method). Once the Camp-On recalls
to the originator or is answered (and the first call abandoned, or the camped on party abandons), another
Camp-On can be activated.
3. A Camp-On of an internal station will not recall. The station which sets camp-on must remain off-hook.
4. After a transfer Camp-On has remained Camped-On for a programmable period of time (8 to 128 seconds,
30 seconds as set in default), the station that set the Camp-On will be recalled.
5. The ability to activate this feature can be allowed or denied in the Station's Class of Service.
6. A maximum of 28 stations can set call waiting Camp-On simultaneously. A maximum of 128 stations can
set transfer Camp-On simultaneously.
7. A party camped on for a transfer will hear Music On Hold (when provided) while on Consultation Hold.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMP-ON
8. Periodic Camp-On tone can be provided every 4 seconds. This can be allowed or denied in system program-
ming on a per-system basis. When denied, a single Camp-On signal is received.
9. Camp-On can only be set if the called station is on a two-party call. Camp-On is denied if the busy station
is dialing or in Line Lockout, receiving a system generated tone, protected against any override by DND
key, a Data Station currently has a Camped-On call or if any of the following features are activated on the
busy station:
•
•
•
•
Attendant Override
Attendant Camp-On
Call Hold (by key)
Call Transfer
•
•
•
Conference
•
•
•
Executive Override
Privacy
Consultation Hold
Data Line Security
Voice Call
10. When Camp-On is denied, the caller will receive reorder tone and can return to the original party (in the
case of a Camp-On transfer).
11. When single digit access codes are enabled, Multline Terminal users can set a Camp-On without using the
Transfer key twice.
12. Camp-On (call waiting) for outside calls (DID, CCIS incoming calls) can be allowed or denied on a per-
trunk route basis or per-DID number basis.
13. When the called station is a pilot station in a Hunt group or UCD group, Hunting or UCD queuing is fol-
lowed. If all stations in the Hunt group are busy, the called station is camped on.
14. When the called station has set Call Forwarding-All Calls and the forwarding destination is busy, the for-
warding destination is camped on.
15. When the called station has set Call Forwarding-Busy Line and the forwarding destination is busy, the orig-
inally called station is camped on.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 110
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CENTREX COMPATIBILITY
CENTREX COMPATIBILITY
General Description
2
A combination of features allows full integration of the NEAX2000 IVS with Centrex service.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Refer to associated features.
Service Conditions
1. Flexible Configuration:
•
•
•
•
Universal Ports to meet high Trunk-to-Station ratio.
Building block approach for modular growth.
Flexible Line Assignment.
Wide variety of terminals.
2. Terminal Flexibility:
•
•
Choice of terminals to meet multiple applications.
Answering Positions:
16-line Multiline Terminal with Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field Console (DSS/BLF)
OR
Attendant Console
•
Standard Positions:
8-Line Multiline Terminal
16-Line Multiline Terminal with LCD
Single Line Telephones
3. High trunk-to-station ratio (256 trunks).
4. Ground/Loop Start Centrex line compatibility.
5. Centrex line Direct In Termination (DIT) to individual Single Line Telephones with secondary answering
at any Multiline Terminal.
6. Delayed Ringing for backup answer of Centrex incoming calls.
7. Hookflash to Centrex line from Multiline Terminal/Single Line Telephone.
8. Automatic seizure using dial access of individual Centrex lines with outgoing restriction control, up to 64
trunks.
9. Code Restriction allows for inspection to follow the Centrex access code for Direct Outward Dialing.
10. Flexible extension numbering to match Centrex numbering pattern.
11. KF registration (FCC Part 68).
12. Trunk Direct Appearance for Centrex lines.
13. Function keys at Multiline Terminals for easy access to Centrex features.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CENTREX COMPATIBILITY
14. Automatic pause after Centrex access code.
15. Listed directory numbers display at Attendant Console.
16. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) for quick and efficient handling of incoming calls.
17. Recall key provides timed hookflash to Centrex for feature access.
18. Prime line Assignment to Centrex line (when using direct trunk appearance). (Multiline terminals only.)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK IN/CHECK OUT
CHECK IN/CHECK OUT
General Description
When this feature is activated, the following operations occur:
•
Check In
Room Cutoff is cleared.
Check Out
•
Room Status printout is supplied.
Do Not Disturb is reset.
Room Cutoff is set.
Message Waiting is reset.
Automatic Wake Up is cleared.
Station Application
Multiline Terminals with LCD assigned as Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments.
Operating Procedure
To activate Check In/Check Out for an individual guest room
1. Press the Check In/Check Out feature key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key to set Check In.
4. Press the RESET key to set Check Out.
Service Conditions
1. This feature can only be activated from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument or the PMS (Property Man-
agement System). A line key on the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument must be assigned as a Check In/
Check Out function button.
2. This feature only applies to guest room stations.
3. Refer to the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument and Property Management System Features and Specifica-
tions for more information on Check In/Check Out.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLASS OF SERVICE
CLASS OF SERVICE
General Description
This feature permits all stations to be assigned a Class of Service in accordance with the degree of system use
desired. The Class of Service is used to assign restrictions for trunk access and feature access.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Normal operating procedures apply. Restrictions are automatically applied by the system based on the Class of
Service assignments in system data for each station.
Service Conditions
1. Every extension is assigned as one of the following by Class of Service:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
House phone
Hotline
Automatic Intercom
Dial Intercom
Manual Intercom
Multiline Terminal
Single Line Telephone
2. A trunk route restriction class (from 1 to 8) is assigned for each station. This assignment is used to determine
whether a station is allowed or denied outgoing or incoming access to trunk routes. All eight route restriction
classes are assigned to allow or deny each trunk route. This allows the system to compare the station assign-
ment with the trunk route assignment and determine whether access is denied or allowed. The default setting
allows all stations access to all trunk routes.
3. The trunk restriction class is also used to provide flexibility in Code Restriction. Refer to the Code Restric-
tion feature for details.
4. Sixteen combinations for each of three service classes (A, B, C) are available for assignment to stations.
Based on the service feature class, the station is allowed or denied access to specific features. Each service
feature class can be assigned to allow or deny each feature shown below.
•
Service Class A
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding - Destination
Call Hold
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing
Call Back
Executive Override - Originate
Executive Override - Receive
Speed Calling - System
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLASS OF SERVICE
Speed Calling - Station
External Paging
Automatic Wake-up/Timed Reminder - self
Automatic Wake-up/Timed Reminder - for others
Call Pickup Direct
Camp-On (Transfer)
Camp-On (Call Waiting) - Originate/Receive
Do Not Disturb from Station/Return Schedule Message Display
Priority Call
Trunk to Trunk Transfer
Message Wait- Set/Reset
Timed Queue
Account Code Entry
Authorization Code/Forced Account Code
Background Music (on Multiline Terminals)
Voice Recording Card Access (Record/Reply/Delete)
Announcement Service Replay (By Group Number)
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Back - Multiple Assignment
Message Reminder - Originate
Message Reminder - Receive
Internal Zone Paging Access
•
Service Class B
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS) Service
Individual Trunk Access from Station
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) Access
Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
Periodic Time Indication Tone
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument (Multiline Terminal)
Privacy Release
Dual Hold
Inhibit Override by DND
Group Listening
6/10 Party Conference Trunk Leader
Voice Call
Answer Hold
Multiline Terminal Attendant Position
•
Service Class C
Ringing Line Pickup
Tone Ring Selection (on Multiline Terminal)
Hookswitch Flash during internal call
Hookswitch Flash during outside (C.O.) call
Multiline Terminal type (with or without LCD)
Off-Hook Alarm overflow service (in case of busy terminating station)
a. Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution queuing with Camp-On (Call Waiting)
b. Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution queuing
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLASS OF SERVICE
c. Camp-On (Call Waiting)
d. Hunting
5. Separately from the above, each station can be assigned to have the following options:
Feature
Do Not Disturb - Group
Option
Provided/Not Provided
Provided/Not Provided
Provided/Not Provided
Provided/Not Provided
Provided/Not Provided
Provided/Not Provided
Room Cut Off - Group
Message Waiting Service
Howler Tone
Station Message Detail Recording
Data Line Security
Feature
Option
Ringing to a Single Line Telephone when the exten-
sion also appears on a Multiline Terminal
Provided/Not Provided
Secretary Station
Secretary Station/Ordinary (Boss Station)
Automatic Cancel/No Automatic Cancel
Automatic Message Waiting Cancel upon answering
call (from Message Waiting-Set Station)
Station Hunting for Non-DIT Calls
Station Hunting for DIT calls
VIP Class
Provided/Not Provided
Provided/Not Provided
Provided/Not Provided
FAX Station
FAX Station/Ordinary Station
6. Authorization Codes can be used to temporarily change the trunk route restriction class (incoming, outgo-
ing, and code restrictions) and the feature service class (A, B, C) when a station is used. Refer to the Autho-
rization Code feature.
7. Two assignments, one for day mode and one for night mode, are provided for trunk route restriction (incom-
ing, outgoing, and code restrictions) for each station. When the system is placed in night mode, the trunk
route restriction classes assigned for night mode are used for incoming and outgoing calls for all stations.
8. Non-restricted stations can transfer outgoing calls after dialing to stations that are outgoing restricted.
9. Only the Attendant Console can permit restricted stations to place outgoing calls by the Attendant Assisted
Calling feature.
10. If a restricted station is connected to an unrestricted station, the unrestricted station cannot add-on an outside
party using a trunk route to which the restricted station is denied dial access. Attempts to do so result in im-
mediate ringback to the station attempting the add-on. The outside call must be made first before attempting
to add-on the restricted station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 116
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CODE RESTRICTION
CODE RESTRICTION
General Description
This feature allows the system to be programmed to restrict outgoing calls according to specific area and/or C.O.
codes. This restriction is controlled on the basis of a three digit area code or six digit area and office code num-
bering plan.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The programmed restriction pattern may consist of either those codes to be allowed, or those codes which
are to be denied.
2. The Code Restriction feature is assigned on a per-station basis in Class of Service.
3. The system may be programmed to ignore digit 1 prefixing an area code pattern so that true 3/6 restriction
can be applied.
4. Trunk Queuing - Outgoing provides queuing on selected outgoing trunk groups which are busy when dialed.
The station user goes on-hook and is called back when an idle trunk is available. After answering the ring-
back, the station-user dials the C.O. number. The number dialed must be allowed to the toll-restricted station
user's line; otherwise, the trunk is immediately released and reorder tone is returned to the station user.
5. On a system wide basis, System Speed Dialing can be allowed to override or not override code restriction.
The default is not to override code restriction.
6. Direct trunk line appearances on Multiline Terminals can be code restricted.
7. Code restriction is implemented as follows:
a. The system determines the need for code restriction by checking the assignment of code restriction
(Yes or No) and the assignment of a digit code table for the selected trunk route.
b. The system compares the digits dialed with the digit code table assigned to the trunk route. If a match
is found, the system is provided with an assigned code restriction class. If no match is found, the call
is allowed to progress normally.
c. An intersection table is provided in system programming which relates the station's restriction class to
the code restriction classes. There are 16 code restriction classes and 5 route restriction classes which
can be used for code restriction deny/allow assignment. Once a code restriction class is obtained from
the digit code table, the intersection table is used by the system to decide whether the call is allowed
or denied.
8. When a toll call is denied, Reorder Tone will be returned to the calling party (Toll Denial). If desired, the
calling party can be routed to the Attendant Console ICPT key (Toll Diversion). Either toll denial or toll
diversion is set on a per-system basis.
9. Six-digit code restriction is assigned by using Least Cost Routing (LCR) pattern tables and programming
the system to check the 50 office code tables for allow or deny assignment based on the office code after the
area code is matched by the system.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY)
CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY)
General Description
This feature provides a station user the ability to add-on another party (trunk or station) to a call already in
progress. Single Line Telephone users can add up to one additional party and Multiline Terminal users can add
up to two additional parties.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To add a third party
• From a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press hookswitch). First party is placed on hold and feature dial tone
is received.
2. Dial the second party (either another station number or a trunk access code plus the outside number).
3. Wait for the second party to answer.
4. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). A three-party Conference is established.
• From a Multiline Terminal, with a call in progress
1. Press the Transfer key. First party is placed on hold and feature dial tone is received.
2. Dial the second party (either another station or a trunk access code plus the outside number).
3. Wait for the second party to answer.
4. Press the Conf key. A three-party Conference is established. The display shows CONFplus the name and
number of the trunks or station (if assigned).
To add a fourth party with three party Conference in progress
1. Press the Transfer key. The two parties are placed on hold and feature dial tone is received.
2. Dial the third party (another station).
3. Wait for the third party to answer.
4. Press the Conf key. A four-party Conference is established. CONFis shown in the LCD display.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of two trunks can be used in a Conference.
2. Single Line Telephones can add up to one additional party (three-party Conference).
3. Multiline Terminals can add up to two additional parties (four-party Conference).
4. A Single Line Telephone will disconnect the last party added to a Conference [after the Conference (1 sta-
tion, 2 trunk) is established] by providing a hookflash. This allows breaking up the Conference and returning
to a two-party connection with the first party.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 118
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY)
5. Multiline Terminals may allow other Multiline Terminals with the same line button appearance to enter the
conversation (and therefore establish a Conference) by using the Privacy feature. Refer to the Privacy Fea-
tures and Specifications for more information.
6. Once the second party answers, and prior to pressing the Conf key, Multiline Terminals may use the Trans-
fer or Answer key to alternate between the two parties. Refer to the Broker's Call Features and Specifica-
tions for more information.
7. During a three-party Conference, use of the Answer key on the Multiline Terminal will split the Conference
into a Broker's Call.
8. A maximum of 16 simultaneous Conferences can be established in the system.
9. The Hold key on Multiline Terminals can be used during a Conference to place the other parties on Hold
(Exclusive or Nonexclusive). The other parties can continue to converse.
10. Retrieval of the first party on Multiline Terminals (after pressing the Transfer key dialing another party and
receiving ringback with no answer or busy tone) is accomplished by pressing the Transfer key. Use of the
Recall key instead will provide feature dial tone and allows calling another party.
11. Attendant Override and Executive Override cannot be used on stations currently in a four-party Conference.
12. When attempting to call a second internal party after a hookflash, and the Single Line Telephone user en-
counters internal busy tone or internal ringback with no answer, the user can return to the first party by hook-
flashing again.
13. When a call is made to a second external party after a hookflash, the next hookflash will result in a Confer-
ence. By hookflashing again, the last connection is released, returning the Single Line Telephone user to the
original party.
14. Call Back and Message Waiting can be set to stations involved in a three- or four-party Conference.
15. Amplification is not provided for Conferences.
16. When a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal user goes on-hook during a three-party Conference
with two outside parties, a tandem connection will be established if one of the trunks provides a release sig-
nal. If neither trunk provides a release signal, the trunks will be dropped. Reentry into this tandem connec-
tion is not possible.
17. When a Multiline Terminal user presses the Conf key prior to going on-hook during a three-party Confer-
ence with two outside parties, a tandem connection will be established (Hold indication is provided). Reen-
try into this tandem connection is accomplished by pressing the held line button.
18. An internal party must be off-hook using the handset (or in speakerphone mode) in order to be included in
a Conference.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFERENCE (SIX/TEN PARTY)
CONFERENCE (SIX/TEN PARTY)
General Description
This feature permits a station user or Attendant (conference leader) to establish a Conference among as many
as six or ten parties (including the Conference leader).
Station Application
All stations and Attendant Consoles
Operating Procedure
Using the access code
• To make a Conference Call
1. The Conference leader goes off hook, or an Attendant presses a loop key.
2. Dial the access code (“A”) for a 6 or 10-party Conference and receive special dial tone. If the CFT trunks
are all busy or the leader is not assigned as the Conference leader with service feature class, reorder tone is
heard. If a participant's line (station or C.O./Tie line) is busy, repeat Step 2 after going on hook once (no
need to dial access code A again).
3. Dial the number of the first party to be added to the conference.
4. Press the Transfer key after the party answers and then dial the access code (“B”) to add then into the con-
ference.
5. Sequentially call all desired parties and connect them to the CFT trunk by dialing the assigned access code
B. The called party (station, C.O./Tie line) waits in the Conference mode until the leader is connected to the
CFT trunk.
6. After connecting the last participant to the CFT trunk, dial the access code B to enter the CFT trunk and
Conference can be started.
• To release a participant
1. Conference leader goes on hook, or an Attendant presses the RLS key.
2. Go off hook or press the loop key again. Dial the access code (“C”) for forced release dial the participant's
number. (Conference number 1 to 5 for a 6-party Conference, or 1 to 9 for a 10-party Conference). Confer-
ence numbers are allocated in calling order from the Conference leader.
3. Dialed Conference number of Station or C.O./Tie line party is released from CFT trunk and party hears re-
order tone.
4. The leader returns to CFT trunk.
Using the feature key of a Multiline Terminal
• To make a Conference Call
The 6-Party or 10-Party Conference feature key and a maximum of 5 or 9 line keys for participants must be as-
signed to the Multiline Terminal of the conference leader.
1. (Conference leader) Press the line key.
2. Dial the number of the first party (station or C.O./Tie line) to be added to the conference.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 120
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFERENCE (SIX/TEN PARTY)
3. After the party answers, press the Hold key.
4. Call all desired parties (station or C.O./Tie line) sequentially, using other line keys, and placing each on hold
after the party answers.
5. After holding the last party, press the Conference feature key. The line key associated with the last party
lights green. The last party is connected to the CFT trunk.
6. Sequentially press the holding line keys to connect the participants to the CFT trunk.
OR
1. (Conference leader:) Press the line key and then press the Conference feature key. The Conference feature
key lights red.
2. Dial the number of the first party (station or C.O./Tie line) to be added to the conference.
3. After the party answers, press the Conference feature key. The line key lights red, and the Conference fea-
ture key lights green. The first party is connected to the CFT trunk.
4. Press the Hold key. The Conference feature key flashes red.
5. Sequentially call all desired parties (station or C.O./Tie line) by using other line keys, and then connect them
to the CFT trunk by pressing the Conference feature key after each party answers.
• To release a participant
1. (Conference leader:) Go on-hook. The Conference feature key lights red.
2. Go off-hook and press the line key associated with the participant to be released. The participant is released
from the CFT trunk and is connected to the leader.
3. Go on-hook, and the participant is released.
4. Go off-hook and press the Conference feature key. The Conference feature key lights green.
5. The leader returns to the CFT trunk.
To end a Conference call (release CFT trunk)
CFT trunk is automatically released when only one participant remains connected.
Service Conditions
1. Access codes A, B and C must be different numbers. A is used to reserve the Conference board. B is used
to add Conference member. C is used to force release a member from the Conference.
2. Up to four CFT trunks can be accommodated in the system.
3. The maximum number of participants which can be connected in a Conference call is:
•
•
Six participants (inclusive of the leader) when one CFT trunk is used
Ten participants (inclusive of the leader) when two CFT trunks are used
4. The maximum number of Conference groups per system when using four CFT trunks (maximum) is:
•
•
•
Four, 6-party Conference groups
Two, 10-party Conference groups
Two, 6-party Conference groups and one, 10-party Conference group
5. A CFT trunk is used for either a 6-party or 10-party Conference. Dialed access codes determine which CFT
trunk is used for a Conference. If the leader dials the access code for a 10-party Conference when only one
CFT trunk is idle, the leader is restricted and hear reorder tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFERENCE (SIX/TEN PARTY)
6. The maximum number of C.O. line/tie lines that can be connected in a Conference is:
•
•
Up to five C.O. line/tie lines for a 6-party Conference
Up to nine C.O. line/tie lines for a 10-party Conference
7. Call charges for C.O. lines are charged to the leader (in SMDR).
8. Ten ports are required per CFT trunk.
9. The CFT time out until the first participant is connected into the CFT trunk after seizing the CFT trunk is
fixed at 1 minute.
10. Amplification is provided for Conferences.
11. When a conference using the access code and a conference using the feature key are held simultaneously in
a system, the LED of the Conference feature key is not controlled.
12. A Multiline Terminal user can not use both 6-party and 10-party Conference feature keys simultaneously.
13. The LED indication of Conference feature key is as follows:
LED indication
OFF:
STATUS
CFT trunk is not used.
Flash Red (60 IPM):
Steady Red:
CFT trunk is used. The leader is not attending by Hold key.
CFT trunk is used. The leader is not attending by going on hook.
Conference is established.
Steady Green:
14. A participant can replace a conference leader by pressing the Conference feature key of their Multiline Ter-
minal. If the kind of Conference key (6-party or 10-party) is different from that of the leader, replace is not
allowed. Call charges for C.O. lines are charged to the first leader (in SMDR).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 122
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING
CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING
General Description
For Speed Dialing, all digits are registered as a Speed Dialing Code. In the case of Consecutive Speed Dialing,
the common portion of the number is registered as a speed calling code, and the remaining digits of each number
are dialed by each individual calling station or by using a Station Speed Dial key on a Multiline Terminal.
Example:
9 1 5 1 6 7 5 3
X X X X
Stored digits sent
by Speed Dial
Additional digits
dialed by caller
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Speed Dialing feature access code.
3. Dial the abbreviated code.
4. Dial the remaining digits of the number or use a DSS key to dial a stored Station Speed Dial number.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is available with System Speed Dialing and Station Speed Dialing.
2. This feature can be used when the calling station has a call on Consultation Hold or Call Hold.
3. The Attendant Console can also manually dial after accessing a System Speed Dialing number.
4. After any type of dialing, System Speed Dialing is not available for the duration of the call.
5. After any type of dialing, Station Speed Dialing accessed by dialing a code is not available for the duration
of the call.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONSULTATION HOLD
CONSULTATION HOLD
General Description
This feature permits a station user to hold any incoming or outgoing C.O. call, tie line call, or any intraoffice
call while originating a call to another station user within the system.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Multiline Terminal
• To hold the original call and place a second call
1. Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone.
2. The original call is placed on hold and receives Music On Hold, if provided.
3. Dial an internal station number and receive ringback tone.
4. The second station answers. The original call is now on Consultation Hold.
• To return to the original call
1. In any of the following cases, the calling station can return to the original call by pressing the Transfer key:
•
•
If the second station called is busy
If the calling station cannot gain access to second station due to restriction or no answer
2. If the second station hangs up, the calling station will automatically be returned to the original call.
3. If the second station remains connected, pressing the Transfer key returns the original call to the Multiline
Terminal while the second call enters Consultation Hold.
4. By pressing the Conf key, a three-party Conference will be initiated.
From a Single Line Telephone
• To hold the original call and place a second call
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch).
2. The original call is placed on hold and receives Music On Hold when provided.
3. Dial an internal station number and receive ringback tone.
4. The second station answers. The original call is now on Consultation Hold.
•
To return to the original call
1. In any of the following cases, the calling station can return to the original call by pressing the FLASH key
(or momentarily pressing the hookswitch).
•
•
•
If the second station called is busy
If the calling station cannot gain access to second station due to restriction
If the second station does not answer
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONSULTATION HOLD
2. If the second party hangs up, the calling station will automatically be returned to the original call.
3. If the originating station presses the FLASH key (or momentarily presses the hookswitch), a three-party
Conference will be initiated.
Service Conditions
1. An outgoing exchange network or tie line call can also be made by the station user with a call on Consulta-
tion Hold. Refer to Trunk-to-Trunk Connection and Conference Features and Specifications.
2. A station is only allowed to place one call on Consultation Hold at a time.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT)
CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT)
General Description
In addition to the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), programming of the system can be done from
selected Multiline Terminals with LCD. The designated Multiline Terminals can be placed in program mode,
and system data can then be changed. To prevent unauthorized changes, password levels are assigned, providing
authorization for access to certain areas of programming and denying access to others.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
Refer to of the Command Manual for programming instructions.
Service Conditions
1. Programming from a CAT can only be accomplished when the system is on-line.
2. The system must be initialized with default data before system data can be changed from the CAT.
3. All Multiline Terminals with LCD scanned during initialization will be CATs.
4. The commands CM00 (Office Data All Clear) and CM01 (Office Data Partial Clear) cannot be accessed
from the CAT. The CAT cannot delete itself from the system program.
5. Only two CATs can be in program mode at the same time.
6. The data that can be changed from the CAT can be limited by the Password level assigned. There are eight
levels of Passwords that can be assigned in system programming. The relation between Password level and
access to available commands is also assigned in system programming.
7. A password can consist of a maximum of any eight digits with the following limitation: The password can-
not be CCCCCCCC or FFFFFFFF.
8. Caution should be exercised when assigning Passwords to command authorization levels. If a password is
forgotten, access to system programming will be limited and a system initialization with subsequent pro-
gramming may be required.
9. Refer also to the MAT feature for information on Peg Count, Remove and Restore Service, and Fault Mes-
sage.
10. When the CAT is off-line for programming, it cannot access normal terminal functions.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 126
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATA LINE SECURITY
DATA LINE SECURITY
General Description
This feature allows line circuits which are used for data transmission to be protected from interruptions such as
Attendant Camp-On, Executive Override, and Attendant Override.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is assigned in system programming on a per-station basis.
2. Data Line Security functions on all calls.
3. Data Line Security cannot prevent disruptions from interfering with data transmission when the disruption
occurs outside the system.
4. The following connections are restricted when Data Line Security is allowed since transmitted tones are in-
volved in their operation. All interrupt attempts directed towards stations with a Data Line Security call in
progress result in reorder tone:
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Camp-On
Attendant Override
Boss-Secretary Override
Executive Override
Camp-On
5. The ringing interval provided to a station assigned for Data Line Security is fixed at 1 second ON – 2 sec-
onds OFF.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAYED RINGING
DELAYED RINGING
General Description
This feature enables trunks and station lines to ring immediately at the terminating station, but also, after a pro-
grammable period of time has elapsed, to ring at secondary Multiline Terminals with that trunk or line appear-
ance.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Delayed Ringing is assigned in system programming on a per line key basis.
2. The timing of call termination to the start of Delayed Ringing is programmable in system data in increments
of 2 seconds to a maximum of 40 seconds (default value = 10 seconds).
3. When Delayed Ringing and Call Forwarding - No Answer are applied to the same call, the feature which
timeouts first will take priority.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 128
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
General Description
To assist maintenance personnel, the system provides diagnostic capabilities such as fault code generation, de-
vice status information and alarm information recording which can be accessed from the Maintenance Admin-
istration Terminal (MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for operating procedures.
Service Conditions
1. The following station status information can be displayed on the MAT or CAT by direct command:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Idle
Line Lockout
Dialing
Tone Trunk Connection (reorder tone, busy tone, service set tone, etc.)
Types of Connection, (station to station, three way calling, voice calling, holding, etc.)
Destination number (trunk number, register number)
Short circuit on line
2. The following trunk status information can be displayed on the MAT or CAT by direct command:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Idle
Ringing in
Incoming queue to Attendant Console
Holding
In a tandem connection
Incoming queue to UCD
Dialing
Receiving dialed digits
3. The following information is stored and can be displayed on the MAT or CAT using a memory dump com-
mand in hexadecimal format:
•
•
•
•
Program address where an endless loop has occurred
Last initialization time for main program
Last initialization time for firmware program
The reason for initialization (power-on, RESET key, endless loop, sense switch, command from MAT
or CAT)
4. The system has a built in patrol program that monitors the status of all connected devices. Additionally,
when no response or an invalid response from a device is received, this program stores in memory the slot
number of that device. From the MAT or CAT a maintenance person can read the slot number of any device
which does not respond to the Main Processor or provides an illegal status to the Main Processor.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAL BY NAME
DIAL BY NAME
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to search for a desired number by name. The number and name
are registered in the system and they are shown on Multiline Terminal LCD. The Multiline Terminal user can
search for the desired number by name using up or down soft keys. When the Multiline Terminal user finds the
desired number, the call can be originated by pressing the Line/Trunk key or going off hook.
Station Application
Multiline Terminal with LCD and Soft Key.
Operating Procedure
To search calling number by name and originate a call by Speed Dialing-System
1. From the idle state, press the SYS soft key on the Multiline Terminal.
2. To search by name, enter up to the first four characters of a name using the keypad. (Refer to Service Con-
dition #2.)
3. Press the UP or DOWN soft key to start the search.
4. The name and the number are shown on the LCD. If more than one name matches the letters entered, scroll
through the matches with the UP or DOWN soft key. If no matches are found, the first System Speed Dial
buffer will be displayed.
5. To search for a different name, repeat Step 2.
6. Manual search is performed by pressing the UP or DOWN soft key until the desired name or buffer number
is located.
7. In either case, going off hook, pressing the Speaker key, or selecting a Line/Trunk key will originate a call
to the selected number.
To search calling number by name and originate a call by Speed Dialing-Station
1. From the idle state, press the STA soft key on the Multiline Terminal.
2. To search by name, enter up to the first four characters of a name using the keypad. (Refer to Service Con-
dition #2.).
3. Press the UP or DOWN soft key to start the search.
4. The name and the number are shown on the LCD. If more than one name matches the letters entered, scroll
through the matches with the UP or DOWN soft key. If no matches are found, the first Station Speed Dial
buffer will be displayed.
5. To search for a different name, repeat Step 2.
6. Manual search is performed by pressing the UP or DOWN soft key until the desired name or buffer number
is located.
7. In either case, going off hook, pressing the Speaker key, or selecting a Line/Trunk key will originate a call.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 130
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAL BY NAME
To register a name and number for call by Speed Calling-Station
1. From the idle state, press the STA soft key.
2. Using the UP or DOWN soft keys, select the buffer number to be programmed.
3. Press the FEATURE key.
4. Using the Alphabet on keys 2 through 9, assign the name first. (Refer to Service Condition #2.)
5. Press the FEATURE key to program the number.
6. Dial the internal station number or the trunk access code (i.e., 9); then dial the outside number.
7. Press the FEATURE key. “SET” will appear on the display.
Service Conditions
1. Service
a. Up to 32 Multiline Terminals are available to use this feature at the same time.
b. The Multiline Terminal returns to idle status after the ten seconds from pressing SYS/STA key and no
key operation is activated.
c. If the speed calling memory block is not assigned to the Multiline Terminal, the SYS/STA key is not
affected when the Multiline Terminal user presses these keys.
d. This service feature is ended or interrupted by pressing the Hold key.
e. When the Multiline Terminal uses this feature, the incoming call to My Line is rejected.
f. When the Multiline Terminal uses this feature, the incoming call to Sub-Line key or trunk line
appearance can be terminated to the Multiline Terminal. In this case, the related line/trunk lamp is
flashed without ringing. The Multiline Terminal can answer the incoming call by pressing the
associated line/trunk key or Answer key.
g. When the Multiline Terminal uses this feature and the user dials the Line/Trunk/Answer key, this
feature is ended and Line/Trunk/Answer key is activated.
h. When the Multiline Terminal is in this service, pressing the Recall, Transfer, and Conf key are not
affected.
i. Up to eight Multiline Terminals can use the Help key at the same time.
j. The explanation displayed by the Help key will automatically be cleared unless the Exit key is
pressed for 16 to 20 seconds.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAL BY NAME
2. Character Registration
a. The following table shows how to record the alphanumeric character to the system.
Press
Input Mode
Dial
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Alphabet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
!
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
”
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
#
a
d
g
j
m
S
t
Z
$
.
b
e
c
f
i
h
k
n
p
u
w
%
/
l
o
q
v
x
&
:
r
s
y
’
;
z
(
<
)
=
{
*
>
|
+
,
–
?
@
[
¥
]
^
_
`
not
(space)
}
used
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
b. There are two input modes for alphabet and number. The input mode is displayed on Multiline
Terminal soft key as following example. When left side soft key shows “ABC”, the alphabet can be
recorded. When “NUM” is displayed on soft key the number is recorded. The alphabet mode and
number mode can be changed by pressing the left side soft key which shows ABC or NUM.
11:22 PM MON 12 MAR 1999
11:22 PM MON 12 MAR 1999
ABC
UP
DOWN
NUM
UP
DOWN
Alphabet Mode
Number Mode
c. In the alphabet mode, the input character is fixed by # key.
Example 1:
Example 2:
Example 3:
Dial 222#22# → CB is recorded.
Dial 222999# → CY is recorded.
Dial 222#22 then press “ABC” soft key. → CB is recorded and input mode is changed
from alphabet to number.
d. The “DEL” key is not available in both alphabet and number mode.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAL BY NAME
3. Number and Name Registration
a. In the alphabet and number input mode, when the Feature key is pressed, the Feature key lamp is
flashed and Speaker key lamp is lit.
b. Up to 16 characters can be recorded as a name.
c. Up to four digits of trunk access code and up to 26 digits of station number can be recorded.
d. When the new name and number is recorded, the system automatically search the vacant memory
block after pressing Feature key.
e. In the name and number registration operation, if both name and number are not registered in speed
calling memory block, the Multiline Terminal LCD shows as follows.
35:
11:22 PM MON 12 MAR 1999
ABC
UP
DOWN
4. Search
a. Up to four characters are used as a key word when the number is searched by name.
b. If the Multiline Terminal user enters character exceeding four, it is invalid.
c. When the same name has been registered in the system, the LCD shows the name and number which
are assigned the lowest memory block number.
d. When searching is performed without entering a key word, the LCD shows the lowest memory block
number available for the Multiline Terminal.
e. When no key word for searching has been registered, the LCD shows the lowest memory block
number available for the Multiline Terminal.
f. After searching, the Multiline Terminal user can search next speed calling number by pressing UP or
DOWN key.
UP= displays the lower number than the block number displayed.
DOWN= displays the higher number than the block number displayed.
When the block number reaches the lowest/highest by pressing UP or DOWN key, one more pressing
rounds to the highest/lowest memory block number.
g. When searching is performed, the first 24 digits are displayed if the number exceeds 24 digits
including memory block number.
h. When system utilize the Speed Calling-Station memory block 0, 1, 2, and 3 for Speed Calling-
System, another “SYS” Soft Keys should be assigned for each memory block basis.
•
•
•
•
•
Speed Calling-System 300 memory
: F5014 (standard)
Speed Calling-System 1000 memory (Block No. 0): F5016
Speed Calling-System 1000 memory (Block No. 1): F5017
Speed Calling-System 1000 memory (Block No. 2): F5018
Speed Calling-System 1000 memory (Block No. 3): F5019
When the Speed Calling-System memory is limited to use by CM08, searching of the Speed Calling-
System 1000 memory should not be done. (Pressing SYS key is ineffective.)
i. When Speed Calling Security is effective, the speed calling number is not displayed on Multiline
Terminal LCD but the name is displayed on Multiline Terminal LCD.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAL BY NAME
5. Originating a Call
a. To originate calls after searching, press either TRK key, Line key (My Line/Sub Line) or Speaker
key, or off hook.
b. When the user originates call pressing TRK key, registered trunk access code is ignored. When the
user originates call pressing Line key or Speaker key, or going off hook, trunk access code registered
can be processed and appropriate trunk is selected.
c. When the user originates call after searching, the number is registered into the stack dial and Save &
Repeat.
6. Name Indication
a. A name is displayed on Multiline Terminal when a call is originated by Speed Calling-System with
the following operation.
•
•
Speed Calling-System originated with Access code and Speed Calling number.
Speed Calling-System originated with off-hook, press System Speed Dialing button and Speed
Calling number.
b. A name is displayed on Multiline Terminal when a call is originated by Speed Calling-Station with
the following operation.
•
•
Speed Calling-Station originated with Access code and Speed Calling number.
Speed Calling-Station originated with off-hook, press Station Speed Dialing button (F0064) and
Speed Calling number.
•
•
Speed Calling-Station originated with Station Speed Dialing button (F11XX).
Speed Calling-Station originated with Redial key and Speed Calling number.
c. A name is displayed on Multiline Terminal when Multiline Terminal user verifies the registered
Speed Calling number with the following operation:
•
•
•
•
Dial Speed Calling Access code and Speed Calling number
Press Station Speed Dialing button (F0065) and Speed Calling number
Press Feature key, Station and Speed Dialing button (F11XX)
Press Feature key, Recall Button, and dial Speed Calling number
d. A name is displayed when Multiline Terminal user originates a call by Speed Calling-One Touch.
e. A name is displayed when Multiline Terminal user verifies the registered Speed Calling number with
Feature key and One Touch Button.
f. When outgoing call encountered all trunk busy status and Route Advance (CM71/72) is activated, the
name is displayed on Multiline Terminal LCD.
g. A name is displayed when Multiline terminal user originates a call with Hot Line.
h. The Name Display/Guest Name are prior to name registered, in a station to station call made by
Speed Calling-One Touch key.
i. A name is displayed for about 6 seconds on Multiline Terminal LCD when Multiline Terminal user
originates a call by Speed Calling-System/Station/One Touch key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAL CONVERSION
DIAL CONVERSION
General Description
The system can be assigned to use rotary Dial Pulse (DP) or Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) trunks and sta-
tions. This feature provides for the repeating of digits dialed by the station user onto the C.O. trunks.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Normal call handling procedures apply.
Service Conditions
1. Trunks are assigned for DP and/or DTMF on a trunk route basis.
2. Single Line Telephone circuits are assigned for DP and/or DTMF through station Class of Service for the
station number assigned to the circuit. The Single Line Telephone circuits can accept 10 or 20 PPS.
3. The system will automatically provide Dial Conversion when the station is a DTMF Single Line Telephone
and dialing is being done on a DP trunk.
4. The system can be assigned to provide DTMF dialing on trunks for Attendant Consoles only, while gener-
ating rotary dial pulsing for station dialing.
5. For an outgoing call on a trunk once the outgoing register times out (6 seconds after the last digit is dialed),
further digits dialed out by a Multiline Terminal will be DTMF and the duration of the tones will be the same
as the length of time the dial pad key is pressed. This feature allows Multiline Terminals to send DTMF
signals to external equipment such as computers and other dial up services.
6. The dial pulse make ratio is programmable for 33% or 39% (default is 39%). The dial pulse interdigit pause
can be set from 300 ms to 900 ms (in increments of 100 ms) or 1100 ms (default is 800 ms).
7. The DTMF signal width is programmable for 64 ms or 128 ms (default is 64 ms). The DTMF interdigit
pause can be set for 32, 64, 80, 96, 160, 192, or 240 ms (default is 96 ms).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT DATA ENTRY
DIRECT DATA ENTRY
General Description
This feature allows a maid or other hotel personnel to enter numeric data to the PMS (Property Management
System), using the guest room station for entry through dial operation. The same numerical data can be output
to a Hotel/Motel Printer by system data programming.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Direct Data Entry access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial input data to the PMS or Hotel/Motel Printer, and receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is activated from a guest room telephone.
2. The digit 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 can be used for the input data.
3. The input data can be sent out to the PMS and/or Hotel/Motel Printer. The output option can be selected by
system data programming.
4. A maximum of 30 digits can be entered in one operation to the PMS and/or Hotel/Motel Printer. If data ex-
ceeds 30 digits, the guest room station receives reorder tone.
5. If the input data to be sent is less than 30 digits, “#” can be used to end the digit string. (The “#” is not sent
to the PMS and Hotel/Motel Printer.)
Example: Access code + 1234567890#
6. When the Hotel/Motel Printer is used, “*” can be used to separate the data entry (“*” is not printed out, but
is sent out to the PMS). In this case, the input data including “*” shall be up to 30 digits.
Example: Access code + 001*002*12345*3#
7. Reorder tone will be received instead of service set tone if the PMS does not respond within 15 seconds or
sends a negative answer to the system.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 136
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT DATA ENTRY
8. There are two types of printout format for the Hotel/Motel Printer. The printout format can be selected by
the system data programming. The following figure shows examples of the printout format 1 and 2.
Example: Input data = 001*002*12345*3# (* is used to separate the input data. * is not printed out but
sent out to the PMS.)
Printout format 1
Printout format 2
1995 04/10 17:20 MON
1995 04/10 17:20 MON
NO.
220
NO.
220
CODE1
CODE2
CODE3
CODE4
001
002
12345
3
CODE1
QUANTITY
CODE2
001
002
12345
3
QUANTITY
a. The maximum number of characters per line is 20.
b. The maximum number of input data per line is 10. When the number of input data is 11 or more, the
data over 10 characters are printed out on the next lines.
Example: Input data = 1*123456789012*12*2*1#
Printout format 1
Printout format 2
1995 04/10 17:20 MON
1995 04/10 17:20 MON
NO.
220
NO.
220
CODE1
CODE2
1
CODE1
1
1234567890
QUANTITY 1234567890
12
12
CODE4
CODE4
2
1
CODE2
QUANTITY
2
1
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT DATA ENTRY
c. In Printout Format 2, even if the data corresponding QUANTITY is not entered, the system does not
recognize that the data entry is an error (no reorder tone is received).
Example: Input data = 1*2*3*#
Printout format 1
Printout format 2
1995 04/10 17:20 MON
1995 04/10 17:20 MON
NO.
220
NO.
220
CODE1
CODE2
CODE3
1
2
3
CODE1
QUANTITY
CODE2
1
2
3
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE
DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE
General Description
2
This service feature provides the capability to connect trunks from the NEAX2000 IVS directly to T1 carrier
links using either a private or public network.
DS-1 signal level
PCM transmission line
(24 channel)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Digital
PABX
OFFICE
REP
LINE
REP
LINE
REP
OFFICE
REP
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Each Office Hierarchy is defined as follows:
a. Source office
One center will operate as the Source Office. This location has two highly stabilized source oscillators,
and distributes the Source Clock to all the systems through the Digital Interface lines.
b. Sub-Source office
This office operates using a Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) to synchronize with the clock at the Source
Office. If the Source Clock fails, the Sub-Source office can operate using its own backup oscillator.
c. Receiver office
This office is arranged so it will have at least two clock routes, one for Source and the other for standby.
Synchronization Clock is derived from incoming PCM bit stream from higher hierarchy offices.
d. Local Receiver office
This is the end office in a digital network arrangement. This office will not be provided with a backup
route for the PLO because this office is the only one influenced in the event of trouble occurrence.
2
2. When a digital network is implemented using the NEAX2000 IVS , the NEAX2400 IMX can function as a
2
Source office or Sub-Source office while the NEAX2000 IVS functions as a Receiver and/or Local Receiv-
er office.
3. Each digital office is equipped with a PLO used for network synchronization. Clocks from the Source Os-
cillator or Digital Interface Package should be connected to inputs on each PLO.
4. D3 Channel Banks are not required since the switch can be equipped with a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
compatible with DS-1 signal level.
5. The DTI provides signalling interface, bipolar/unipolar conversion, frame synchronization, insertion/ex-
traction and alarm detection.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE
6. The DTI can be provided with circuit cards to interface with T1 carrier.
7. The DTI boards are mounted in the AP board slot of the Port Interface Module (PIM).
8. The following two methods may be used for network synchronization (see below):
a. Source - Receiver System (Source)
b. Source - Receiver System (Receiver)
S
SS
R
Source office
Sub-Source office
Receiver office
S
NEAX2400 IMX
LR
Local Receiver office
Direction of clock signal supply
SS
R
SS
R
2
NEAX2000 IVS /
NEAX2400 IMX
LR
LR
LR
S
SS
R
Source office
Sub-Source office
Receiver office
S
Direction of clock signal supply
2
SS
R
SS
R
NEAX2000 IVS
9. The maximum number of trunks for DTI is 240 ports (10 24 DTI boards:24 ports/DTI board or 8 30 DTI
boards, 30 DTI: 31 ports/DTI card). The total number of ports (DTI and other AP) must be less than 256
ports.
2
10. The NEAX2000 IVS includes built-in PLO (Source or Receiver mode only) in the MP card.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 140
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
General Description
This feature provides for incoming calls from the exchange network (except FX or WATS) to reach any station
within the system without attendant assistance.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
The calling party outside the system dials the appropriate telephone number. The call will ring directly at the
called station, bypassing the attendant.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is normally used when direct in service is desired on an extension or system-wide basis.
2. DID must be provided by the serving C.O.; however, not all telephone company C.O. are capable of pro-
viding this service.
3. One of the following control signaling methods can be used on incoming DID trunks: immediate start, delay
start and wink start.
4. Dual-Tone, Multi-Frequency (DTMF) or rotary dial signaling is available. This is assigned on a trunk route
basis.
5. Calls to invalid numbers can be routed to an Attendant, a predesignated station, or to a recorded announce-
ment.
6. When a station has activated Call Forwarding (all types), the DID call will be forwarded to the designated
station rather than to the specific station dialed.
7. If the called station is assigned as a pilot in Station Hunting and is busy, the call follows the preset hunting
pattern.
8. On an incoming call to a busy station, the Call Forwarding feature takes precedence over the Station Hunting
feature. If the Call Forwarding feature and the Station Hunting feature are not activated, the caller will re-
ceive busy tone or will reroute to the Attendant Console, predesignated station, or recorded announcement
depending on the assignment in system programming.
9. Stations in Do Not Disturb will be provided with visual indication but no audible indication. Secondary ap-
pearances will ring when assigned. The calling party will receive ring back tone until answered.
10. An incoming Listed Directory Number (LDN) received from a DID line can be displayed on the LCD of a
Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console. This system data is assigned on a trunk route basis.
11. The DID incoming LDN display is one digit to four digits.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID Call Waiting
DID Call Waiting
General Description
This feature allows an incoming call on a DID trunk or a tie line to automatically be Camped-On to the desti-
nation station if the destination station is busy.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
The camp-on occurs automatically once this feature is assigned. For details on how to respond to the camp-on,
refer to the Camp-On Features and Specifications.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is assigned on a per trunk route basis and on the basis of which number is dialed into the DID/
tie trunk.
2. The outside party receives ringback tone while waiting for the station to answer the Camp-On.
3. Refer to the Camp-On Features and Specifications for more information and service conditions related to
Camp-On.
DID Digit Conversion
General Description
This feature allows the system to convert the digits received from the serving C.O. to valid station numbers when
the C.O. numbering plan differs from the desired station numbering plan.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Addition and deletion of digits can be implemented to coincide with the existing numbering plan.
2. When digit conversion of DID incoming LDN has been activated, the number received from the C.O. before
conversion is displayed.
3. A DID incoming LDN can be converted to a PBX station number, by analyzing the upper two-four digits
of DID incoming LDN. A maximum of 10,000 DID incoming LDN can be converted to a maximum of
1,000 PBX station numbers.
•
•
MP without expansion memory (standard) :up to 500 station numbers
MP with expansion memory (optional) :up to 1,000 station numbers
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
General Description
This feature allows an outside caller to access the system using an exchange network connection without Atten-
dant or station assistance. The outside user may originate calls over any or all of the system's facilities such as
WATS, FX, Tie Line or CCSA. The outside user can also directly call stations and access miscellaneous trunks
for such features as dictation access.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
1. Dial the number to connect to the system.
2. After ringback tone, service set tone is received.
3. Dial the DISA identification code. If accepted, system dial tone will be heard. If denied, busy tone will be
heard.
4. Dial the desired number (trunk access code, station number, or Digital Announcement Trunk Card access/
record code, and then card number).
Service Conditions
1. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Code Limitations
a. In the case of a system with AP01 card:
•
Number of digits: 1 digit-10 digits (If Check Code is provided, limited to 8 digits)
If AP01 card is utilized for Authorization Code, the same number of digits must be assigned to Au-
thorization Code and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Code.
•
Number of codes: Up to 1,000 codes combined with Authorization Code and forced Account Code
b. In the case of a system without AP01 card:
•
•
Number of digits: 1 digit-8 digits
Number of codes: The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit
number. For details, refer to APPENDIX 3.
2. Dual-Tone, Multi-Frequency (DTMF) instruments are required for DISA. A portable tone generator may be
utilized in circumstances where such instruments are not available.
3. A DISA identification code must be programmed into the system to identify the user accessing this service.
4. The DISA identification code may be assigned a Class of Service limiting access to capabilities by an out-
side caller.
5. DISA identification codes can be entered from the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), the Cus-
tomer Administration Terminal (CAT) and Attendant Console.
6. A dedicated trunk is used for DISA access. The outside user dials a dedicated number to access this capa-
bility.
7. DISA codes can be printed out in the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) record for Tandem Con-
nection.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
8. If the called station is busy or does not answer, or the number dialed is a feature access code, any one of the
following operations can be set:
•
•
•
The C.O. line can be released.
Dial tone can be supplied.
An alternate call terminating destination (Attendant, Trunk Answer Any Station, Direct Inward Termi-
nation) can be provided.
9. The outside user can access a Digital Announcement Trunk Card via DISA, if programmed.
10. The feature cannot use the DTMF Receiver on the MP card.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT)
DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT)
General Description
This feature automatically routes incoming network exchange calls directly to a preselected station without At-
tendant assistance. The call can then be processed by the called party. Three-party Conference, Call Transfer,
etc., are handled in the same manner as any normal trunk call.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Bothway trunks can be used for Direct Inward Termination, but incoming only trunks are recommended.
This minimizes DIT calls meeting busy conditions.
2. If there is no answer at a station, the calling party will continuously receive ringback tone. Call Fowarding
- No Answer will occur if set or the calling party will be transferred to the Attendant or Trunk Answer any
Station by system programming if enabled.
3. Once a call is answered, it can be processed by the called station in the same way as any normal trunk call.
4. If the DIT is assigned to a pilot number of a Station Hunting group or Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution
(ACD/UCD) group, the incoming call will follow the hunt group station assignment. If the station is Call
Forwarded, the incoming call is connected to the Call Forward target station according to the types of Call
Forwarding set and the condition of the DIT station.
5. This feature is normally utilized where direct-in service is required on a limited basis. The number of sta-
tions thus serviced is limited to the number of trunks available for Direct Inward Termination.
6. Multiple trunks can be assigned to Direct Inward Terminate to an extension, but a trunk cannot be assigned
to Direct Inward Terminate to multiple extensions.
7. When the Direct Inward Termination station is busy, the call can be preprogrammed to either go to the At-
tendant, Trunk Answer any Station, or Camp-On. During night mode, the call can be pre-programmed to
Camp-On or go directly to Trunk Answer any Station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)
DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)
General Description
This feature permits any station user the ability to gain access to the exchange network by dialing an access code
and receiving new dial tone. The user may then proceed to dial the desired exchange network number.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To place an outside call
• From any station
1. Go off-hook and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the trunk access code.
3. Receive outside dial tone.
4. Dial the desired outside number.
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Speaker key and receive extension dial tone.
2. Press a trunk appearance line key.
3. Receive outside dial tone.
4. Dial the desired outside number.
Service Conditions
1. Outgoing restriction can be assigned on an individual station basis. Refer to Class of Service.
2. Code Restriction may be applied to Direct Outward Dialing (DOD).
3. Various types of trunks (FX, WATS, Tie, DID, etc.) can be accessed by stations using this feature.
4. The trunk route access code can be one to three digits.
5. Use of the DOD feature can be denied on a per trunk route basis when one of the following restrictions is
active on the originating station line.
•
•
•
Fully restricted stations: Direct Outward Dialing attempts are routed to reorder tone when the station is
fully restricted.
Restriction from outgoing calls: A station assigned this feature is denied the ability to access preselected
trunk routes. Attempts are routed to reorder tone.
Code Restriction: Levels of this feature restrict unauthorized stations the ability to complete outgoing
C.O. or foreign exchange calls to a specified area or office codes within an area code. Refer to the Least
Cost Routing feature. A station with Toll Denial is routed to reorder tone when a restricted number is
dialed after the trunk access code has been dialed.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)
6. Exchange network call completion using the Hotline Outside feature is permitted. The originating station is
automatically routed to the assigned trunk route and the digits are dialed automatically when the station goes
off-hook.
7. This feature is disabled when the switch on the MP card is set to KF registration.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD
(DSS/BLF) CONSOLE
General Description
This feature allows a Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) Console to be associated with a
Multiline Terminal. When the buttons on the DSS/BLF Console unit are programmed for Direct Station Selec-
tion (DSS) buttons, up to 60 stations can be directly accessed in addition to those already appearing on the Mul-
tiline Terminal. Busy status for each station is indicated by a red LED associated with each button.
In addition, the DSS/BLF console can provide the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Message Waiting - Set/Cancel/Status Display
Do Not Disturb - Set/Cancel/Status Display
Automatic Wake Up No Answer - Status Display/Cancel
Agent Busy Out - UCD - Status Display
Line Lockout - Status Display
Room Cutoff - Set/Cancel/Status
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To initiate a call
1. Press the desired DSS key.
2. Lift handset and converse when party answers.
OR
1. Lift handset and receive dial tone.
2. Press the desired DSS key.
3. Converse when party answers.
To display Line Lockout status
No manual operation is required. When stations are currently in Line Lockout mode, their associated LED will
flash red at 30 ipm.
Service Conditions
1. A Multiline Terminal can be equipped with as many DSS/BLF Console units as necessary.
2. The maximum number of DSS/BLF Console is 8 per Firmware Processor (FP). The maximum number of
DSS/BLF Console that can be programmed in the system is 32 (DSS/BLF+Add-On Modules).
3. A maximum of 60 Direct Station Selection keys can be assigned on each DSS/BLF Console.
4. When a call is made using the DSS/BLF Console, the associated Multiline Terminal's LCD displays the
same indication that is provided for internal calls made from the line keys of the Multiline Terminal.
5. Feature Access keys cannot appear on the DSS/BLF Console.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 148
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE
Busy Out Status Console
6. The DSS/BLF Console can be provided with a Message Wait (MW) key, a Do Not Disturb (DND) key, a
Night Transfer (NT) key, a Wake Up No Answer (WU) key, a Room Cutoff (RC) key, and a Agent Busy
Out (BYO) key for the following purposes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
MW key
DND key
NT key
Message Waiting Set/Cancel/Status Display
Do Not Disturb Set/Cancel/Status Display
Day/Night mode change for the associated tenant
Automatic Wake Up No Answer Cancel/Status Display
Room Cutoff Set/Cancel/Status Display
WU key
RC key
BYO key
Agent Busy Out - UCD Status Display
These keys must be assigned to the last three (3) keys (key no. 57, 58 and 59) on the DSS/BLF Console.
7. Key operation from MW, DND, WU, and BYO key on the DSS/BLF Console are effective for only the first
48 DSS keys (key no. 00 to 47), which have two (2) LEDs (red and green) in each key. Direct Station Se-
lection, busy status indication, and Line Lockout status indication are effective for all 60 keys on the DSS/
BLF Console.
8. When the following operations from the DSS/BLF Console are used, the Function Mode key must be as-
signed to one of 60 DSS keys.
•
•
•
Message Waiting Set/Cancel using MW key
Do Not Disturb Set/Cancel using DND key
Automatic Wake Up No Answer Cancel using WU key
9. A 4DLC/8DLC card is required when a DSS/BLF Console is installed.
Busy Out Status Console
General Description
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Busy Out Sta-
tus Console. This feature is activated by use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console. The Busy Out
Status for each station is indicated by a red LED associated with each button.
Station Application
All stations with an associated DSS/BLF Console.
Operating Procedure
To display station Busy Out (BYO) status
1. Press the Function Mode key on the DSS/BLF Console assigned for Busy Out Status display. An LED as-
sociated with the BYO key lights.
2. When stations are currently in the Busy Out state, their associated LED will light green.
3. Press the same Function Mode key to return to DSS/BLF mode, if desired.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE
Do Not Disturb Console
Service Conditions
1. If the system is initialized (Reset) the Console Function Mode will return to DSS/BLF.
2. The Busy Out Status of a station cannot be set or cancelled from a Busy Out Status Console.
3. Refer to the DSS/BLF Console and the Uniform Call Distribution Features and Specifications for more de-
tails.
Do Not Disturb Console
General Description
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Do Not Disturb
(DND) Console. This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console. DND set
status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button. In addition, the Multiline Ter-
minal user can set/cancel the DND status of other stations using the DND Console.
Station Application
All stations with a DSS/BLF Console.
Operating Procedure
To set and cancel Do Not Disturb (DND)
1. Press the DND key. When stations are currently in DND their associated LED will light green.
2. Press the Function Mode key: an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red.
3. Press the desired DSS key(s) to set or cancel. A lit LED indicates DND is set.
4. Press the DND key again to return to DSS/BLF mode, if desired.
Service Conditions
1. The DND Console displays the set status for those stations for whom DND was set, by the station user of
the DND console or by the set station only. Indication is not provided when another DND Console, the At-
tendant Console, a Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument, or a PMS changes the status of a station.
2. If the system is initialized (reset), the Console function mode will return to DSS/BLF.
3. Refer to the DSS/BLF Console and the Do Not Disturb Features and Specifications for more details.
Message Waiting Console
General Description
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Message Waiting
(MW) Console. This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console. The Mes-
sage Waiting status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button. In addition, the
Multiline Terminal user can set/reset MW status using the MW Console.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 150
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE
Room Cutoff Console
Station Application
All stations with a DSS/BLF Console.
Operating Procedure
To set and cancel Message Waiting
1. Press the MW key. When stations are currently in MW their associated LED will light green.
2. Press the Function Mode key: an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red.
3. Press the desired DSS key(s) to set or cancel. A lit LED indicates MW has been set.
4. Press the MW key again to return to DSS/BLF mode, if desired.
Service Conditions
1. The MW Console only displays/cancels the set status for those stations to whom Message Wait was set, by
the station user of the MW Console.
2. If the system is initialized (reset), the Console function mode will return to DSS/BLF.
3. Refer to the DSS/BLF Console and the Message Waiting Features and Specifications for more details.
Room Cutoff Console
General Description
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Room Cutoff Con-
sole. This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console. The Room Cutoff
status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button. In addition, the Multiline Ter-
minal user can set/cancel Room Cutoff to another station using the Room Cutoff Console.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with a DSS/BLF Console.
Operating Procedure
To set and cancel Room Cutoff
1. Press the RC key. When stations are currently in RC their associated LED will light green.
2. Press the Function Mode key: an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red.
3. Press the desired DSS key(s) to set or cancel. A lit LED indicates RC has been set.
4. Press the RC key again to return to the DSS/BLF mode, if desired.
Service Conditions
1. The Room Cutoff Console only displays/cancels the set status for those stations which were set into room
cutoff by the station user of the Room Cutoff Console. Indication is not provided when another Room Cut-
off console, the Attendant Console, a Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument, or a PMS changes the RC status
of a station.
2. If the system is initialized (reset), the Console function mode returns to DSS/BLF.
3. Refer to the DSS/BLF Console and the Room Cutoff Features and Specifications for more details.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE
Wake Up No Answer Console
Wake Up No Answer Console
General Description
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Wake Up No An-
swer (WU) Console. This feature is activated by a function mode key on a DSS/BLF Console. The No Answer
status for each station is indicated by a flashing green LED associated with each button.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with a DSS/BLF Console.
Operating Procedure
To display and cancel Wake Up No Answer
1. Press the WU key. If stations failed to answer their wake up call, their associated LED flashes green at 30
ipm.
2. Press the Function Mode key: an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red.
3. Press the flashing DSS key(s) to turn out the desired station's LED.
4. Press the WU key again to return to the DSS/BLF mode, if desired.
Service Conditions
1. The Wake Up No Answer Console is only used to display/cancel the No Answer status of the Automatic
Wake Up feature after the station has failed to answer. The Automatic Wake Up feature cannot be set from
the Wake Up No Answer Console.
2. If the system is initialized (reset), the Console function mode will return to DSS/BLF.
3. Refer to the DSS/BLF Console and the Automatic Wake Up Features and Specifications for more details.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 152
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
General Description
This feature provides Distinctive Ringing patterns to the station so that the station user can distinguish between
internal and external incoming calls. This feature also enables the LED associated with the line key of the Mul-
tiline Terminal to flash in two colors according to the kind of incoming call.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Ringing pattern for incoming internal calls:
1 second on, 2 seconds off
OR
2 seconds on, 4 seconds off
2. Ringing pattern for incoming external calls:
1 second on, 2 seconds off
OR
2 seconds on, 4 seconds off
OR
0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off
0.4 seconds on, 2.0 seconds off
3. Ringing pattern for Call Back, Trunk Queuing - Outgoing and Executive Calling:
0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off
0.5 seconds on, 1.5 seconds off
4. All recalls (to Multiline Terminals):
0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off
0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off
5. When calling a third station (three-party Conference, Consultation Hold, etc.), the ringing signal sent to the
called station is dependent upon the type of call placed on Hold. If the call is a trunk call, external ringing
is provided; if the call is an extension call, internal ringing is provided.
6. Ring frequencies of Multiline Terminals can be assigned in programming through station Class of Service.
Refer to the Ring Frequency Control Features and Specifications.
7. The ringing pattern for incoming internal calls is programmable on a system basis.
8. The ringing pattern for incoming external calls is programmable on per trunk route basis.
9. The ringing pattern of recalls to Single Line Telephones is the same pattern as that of the original call.
10. The distinctive lamp indication is applicable only for Multiline Terminals during call termination (including
a recall).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
11. The lamp indication patterns are as follows:
•
•
Incoming internal calls
Incoming external calls
Red, 120-ipm flashing
Green or Red, 120-ipm flashing
The lamp color for incoming external calls can be selected to be green or red.
12. The lamp color for incoming external calls can be designated on a per-trunk-route basis.
13. The distinctive lamp indication is valid for Direct Inward Termination, Automated Attendant, Direct Inward
Dialing, and Tie line incoming call.
14. The flashing lamp color depends on system data (assigned for Distinctive Ringing (CM08, 137)) and is used
to indicate the termination of a transferred external incoming call.
15. If the system is installed behind Centrex or the main PBX, this feature provides Distinctive Ringing patterns
to the Multiline Terminal in the system so that the station user can distinguish between internal calls from
the main PBX and external incoming calls. The C.O. trunk to the main PBX must be assigned on Trunk -
Direct Appearances on the Multiline Terminal.
16. When Distinctive Ringing in behind system is activated, Delayed Ringing is not available for the related
C.O. trunk.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 154
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB
DO NOT DISTURB
General Description
This feature restricts incoming calls to a station and can be set by an individual station or from the Attendant
Console. Placing a station in Do Not Disturb (DND) does not prevent a station from originating a voice or data
call or from receiving a data call. This feature also allows a station to ensure privacy from telephone interrup-
tions while on an outgoing call. Additionally, the Attendant Console can place a group of stations in the Do Not
Disturb condition.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Single Line Telephone
• To set
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Do Not Disturb feature access code and receive service set tone.
3. Restore the handset.
• To cancel
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Do Not Disturb cancel code and receive service set tone.
3. Restore the handset.
From a Multiline Terminal
• To set
1. Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the DND function key and the associated LED lights. If equipped with an LCD the display will indi-
cate SET.
3. Press the Speaker key.
• To cancel
1. Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the DND function key and the associated LED goes out. If equipped with an LCD the display will
indicate CANCEL.
3. Press the Speaker key.
From the Attendant Console
• To set an individual station in DND
1. Dial the desired station number.
2. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB
3. Press the START key. The DD LED lights steady and service set tone is received.
4. Press the RELEASE key.
• To cancel an individual station in DND
1. Dial the desired station number.
2. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
3. Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out.
4. Press the RELEASE key.
• To set a group of stations in DND
1. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
2. Press the START key and the DD LED lights steady.
3. The designated group is now in DND.
• To cancel a group of stations in DND
1. Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes.
2. Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out.
3. The designated group is no longer in DND.
• To call a station that set DND (Attendant Only)
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the station number and the DD LED flashes and reorder tone is received.
3. Press the DDOVR key.
4. The station will ring.
Service Conditions
1. Calls to stations that are in Do Not Disturb will receive reorder tone or on a tenant basis, can be assigned to
transfer to the Attendant or a predesignated station.
2. The station in Do Not Disturb can originate calls in the normal manner.
3. Call Forwarding can be set to a station in Do Not Disturb.
4. A Do Not Disturb station will be omitted from the Station Hunting chain. If a DIT call is directed to a pilot
of a hunt group, hunting will be provided. Internal calls will receive a fast busy tone.
5. The Do Not Disturb station can cancel DND even though the condition was set by the Attendant.
6. Verification of stations in Do Not Disturb is only possible from the Attendant Console. Multiline Terminals
with LCD and a DND key assigned can verify their own DND setting.
7. The ability to set DND can be controlled on a per station via Class of Service or a per system basis.
8. This feature can only be set or canceled by the station while the station is receiving internal dial tone.
9. When a Multiline Terminal is set in DND, calls to the primary extension and secondary extensions will not
ring. Trunks programmed to ring will not do so while DND is set, but flashing LED indications are still
provided. DND will not deny an Executive Override.
10. Only the Attendant has the ability to place a group of stations in Do Not Disturb. There is only one group
available and the stations within the group are programmed in system data. There is no limitation on the
number of stations in the group.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 156
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB
Do Not Disturb - Hotel/Motel
11. A station included in a DND group, retains the ability to place their particular station in DND.
12. When the Attendant places a group in DND, an individual station within the group can cancel the DND set-
ting to their station.
13. A feature access line key can be assigned on Multiline Terminals for DND set and cancel.
14. If the DND key is pressed while connected to a trunk or station, the following interruptions are denied until
that call is completed:
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Camp-On
Attendant Override
Boss Secretary Override
Camp-On
Executive Override
15. Refer also to the Data Do Not Disturb feature, and the Hotel/Motel Do Not Disturb feature.
16. DND is displayed on a Multiline Terminal with LCD when calling a station in DND.
17. The priority for service checks (features activated) on a station is as follows:
a. Call Forwarding - All Calls
b. Call Forwarding - Busy Line
c. Station Hunting/UCD
d. Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb - Hotel/Motel
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant Console(s), Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument(s), guest stations or Property
Management System (PMS) terminal(s) to place individual stations into Do Not Disturb. Calls can be placed
from stations set in DND.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
• To set Do Not Disturb
1. Press the DD key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations.
5. Press the RLS key.
• To cancel Do Not Disturb
1. Press the DD key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB
Do Not Disturb - Hotel/Motel
3. Press the RESET key.
4. The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations.
5. Press the RLS key.
• To set Do Not Disturb to the station currently connected
1. Press the DD key.
2. Press the SET key.
3. Press the RLS key.
• To cancel Do Not Disturb to the station currently connected
1. Press the DD key.
2. Press the RESET key.
3. Press the RLS key.
From a guest station or administrative station
• To set Do Not Disturb
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Do Not Disturb setting code.
3. Receive service set tone and restore the handset.
• To cancel Do Not Disturb
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Do Not Disturb cancellation code.
3. Receive service set tone and restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. Automatic Wake Up and Timed Reminder will override Do Not Disturb.
2. A station in Do Not Disturb can be called from the Attendant Console or the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instru-
ment using the DNDOVR key.
3. Do Not Disturb is automatically cleared when Check Out is performed.
4. Depending on system programming, an incoming call addressed to a station in DND condition is routed to
one of the following on a per-tenant basis:
•
•
•
Reorder tone
Attendant Console
A predesignated station
5. Refer to Attendant Console and Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument Features and Specifications for addi-
tional information on Do Not Disturb.
6. When a member station within a Station Hunting group is in DND, calls will bypass the member station and
continue hunting. A pilot station in DND places the Hunt group in DND.
7. Call Forwarding - Busy settings by stations in DND will result in calls being forwarded, even if the stations
are idle.
8. Message Waiting and Message Reminder can not be set to stations in DND during conversation.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 158
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB
Do Not Disturb - System
9. Call Back cannot be set to stations in DND.
10. Recalls will override the DND setting, and ring back to a station in DND.
Do Not Disturb - System
General Description
This feature simultaneously restricts incoming calls to a preassigned group of stations by operation from the Ho-
tel/Motel Front Desk Instrument(s). Attendant Console(s) and Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments can use the
DND OVR key to override this Do Not Disturb setting.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Do Not Disturb - System from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the DD key.
2. Press the GROUP key.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the RLS key.
To cancel Do Not Disturb - System from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the DD key.
2. Press the GROUP key.
3. Press the RESET key.
4. Press the RLS key.
Service Conditions
1. Stations are assigned to the Do Not Disturb (DND) Group in Class of Service.
2. Calls to extensions whose stations are in Do Not Disturb will receive reorder tone.
3. The station in Do Not Disturb can originate calls in the normal manner.
4. Verification of stations in Do Not Disturb is possible from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument and At-
tendant Consoles.
5. The ability to set DND is both on a per-station basis, and a per-system (for DND group) basis.
6. Only Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments and Attendant Consoles have the ability to place a group of sta-
tions in Do Not Disturb. There is only one group available, and the stations within the group are pro-
grammed in system data. There is no limitation on the number of stations in the group.
7. A station included in a DND group retains the ability to place that particular station in DND.
8. When the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument places a group in DND, an individual station within the group
can cancel the DND setting to that station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DO NOT DISTURB
Do Not Disturb - System
9. Refer to the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument Features and Specifications for more information.
10. Refer to Do Not Disturb Features and Specifications for the interactions between DND and system features.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELAPSED CALL TIMER
ELAPSED CALL TIMER
General Description
This feature provides a display of the elapsed time while a Multiline Terminal with LCD is connected to any
trunk.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The elapsed time is displayed in the seven upper left-hand positions of the LCD display.
2. The elapsed time can reach a maximum of 9 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds after which the clock resets
to zero.
3. When a call is placed on Consultation Hold, Exclusive Hold, and Nonexclusive Hold, the elapsed time dis-
play will disappear. The Elapsed Call Timer will not reset to zero when a call is retrieved from Hold (Con-
sultation Hold, Exclusive Hold, or Nonexclusive Hold) by the same station.
4. When a call is transferred or parked, the time display of the party receiving the transfer begins at zero.
5. The elapsed time is not displayed when the station is in a Conference.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENHANCED 911
ENHANCED 911
General Description
This feature allows the PBX to transmit a callers’ emergency service identification information to an Enhanced
911 Emergency system.
Station Application
All stations and Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset and receive a dial tone.
2. Dial the trunk access code and telephone number (e.g., 911).
3. The system automatically completes a call and sends the pre-assigned number: calling area code + calling
station number.
Service Conditions
1. Up to four 911 Sender trunk can be accommodated in the system which includes T1-ANI/Caller ID Receiver
trunk.
2. The caller’s telephone number must be sent in Automatic Number Identification (ANI) format,
corresponding to Centralized Message Accounting (CAMA) standards. A trunk circuit capable of
performing these functions is called a CAMA type trunk.
3. The calling station in the system will receive ROT if there is a C.O. line failure on the CAMA trunks.
4. If the system has multiple CAMA trunks and the calling station receives ROT due to a C.O. line failure, the
calling station must go on hook and then attempt the call again.
With CM 35, YY = 83 set to “1” (by allotter) for the CAMA trunk route, the PBX will select the next
available CAMA trunk.
Note: For this purpose, it is recommended that the system has a minimum of two CAMA trunks for Enhanced
911.
5. The physical interface for Enhanced 911 can be any of the following:
•
•
•
Digital (T1) configured as Loop Start or E&M type lines
Analog E&M type lines
Analog Loop Start lines
Note: These lines must be ordered from the C.O. as CAMA type trunks.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXECUTIVE CALLING
EXECUTIVE CALLING
General Description
This feature allows a station to be assigned a VIP class. This provides special ringing to a called station when
that station is idle, and automatic sending of three tone bursts to a called station when that station is busy, pro-
vided the call was originated from a station assigned as VIP class.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To initiate an Executive Call
1. The station assigned as VIP class goes off-hook.
2. The station dials another extension.
3. If the called station is busy, three tone bursts will be sent to the called party to indicate there is a call waiting.
The called party can now hang up and answer the Executive Call.
4. If the called station is idle, a distinctive ring will be sent to the called party to indicate an Executive Call is
ringing in.
Service Conditions
1. Executive Calling (VIP class) is assigned in Class of Service.
2. This feature is station based. This feature applies only when a station assigned for VIP class is used.
3. When a Single Line Telephone's extension is assigned as VIP class, all internal calls originated from that
station are Executive Calls.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
General Description
This feature allows selected users to override a busy condition on a called station. A warning tone is transmitted
to both stations in the busy call before the busy condition is overriden, and a three-party Conference is then es-
tablished.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From a Multiline Terminal
1. When busy tone is heard, press the key assigned for Executive Override. The associated LED lights and a
warning tone is transmitted to both parties.
2. The Multiline Terminal is now bridged into a three-party Conference.
From a Single Line Telephone
1. When busy tone is heard, press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive feature
dial tone.
2. Dial the Executive Override feature access code. A warning tone is transmitted to both parties.
3. The station is now bridged into a three-party Conference.
Service Conditions
1. Two burst tones of 0.8 seconds each are transmitted upon activation to alert the connected parties that an
Executive Override will occur. On a system-wide basis the tones transmitted to the C.O. line may be denied.
The station will still receive alert tones.
2. When a three-party Conference is established and one party hangs up, the remaining two parties are still
connected.
3. The Executive Override access code is flexible and can be assigned in system programming.
4. The maximum number of simultaneous Executive Overrides per system is eight or sixteen, depending upon
conferencing hardware installed.
5. If the called station has set the Call Forwarding - Busy/All Calls feature, and the target station is also busy,
the Executive Override will interrupt the originally dialed station. If the target station is not busy, the call
will be forwarded.
6. Executive Override can be set when the busy station is connected to another station or a trunk in a two-party
connection.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 164
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
7. Executive Override is denied if the busy station is dialing, in Line Lockout mode, receiving a system gen-
erated tone, protected against Executive Override in Class of Service, protected against any override by
DND key, or when any of the following features are in progress:
•
•
•
•
Attendant Override
Data Line Security
Call Transfer
•
•
•
•
Consultation Hold
Hold
•
•
•
•
Call Back
Paging
Privacy
Camp-On
Voice Call
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing
Conference
8. When Executive Override is denied, the caller will receive reorder tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME
EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME
General Description
This feature allows a station user or attendant dial-access to local voice paging equipment and connects both
parties automatically after the paged party has answered the page by dialing an access code.
Station Application
All stations and Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
To page
• From any station
1. The calling station dials External Paging feature access code and receives continuous ringback tone for 1
second.
2. The calling station pages desired party.
3. The calling station remains off-hook or hangs up.
• From an Attendant Console
1. Place the incoming call on hold by pressing Hold key.
2. Seize an idle LOOP key.
3. Dial the External Paging feature access code and receive continuous ringback tone for 1 second.
4. Page the desired party.
5. Press the RELEASE key.
To answer
• From any station (Non-delay operation)
1. The paged party dials the Meet-Me access code.
2. The paged party is immediately connected to the calling party.
• From any station (Delay operation)
1. The paged party dials Meet-Me access code.
2. The party paged receives ringback tone.
3. The calling station rings.
4. The calling station goes off-hook and is immediately connected to the paged party.
To cancel the page from an Attendant Console
1. Press the External Paging feature key while paging.
2. The page is canceled.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 166
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME
Service Conditions
1. Amplifiers and speakers must be provided locally.
2. One trunk circuit from a COT card is required for each zone of external paging.
3. One PN-DK00 (or built-in DK00 in MP) is required for every four zones of external paging in order to share
a common amplifier and background music source.
4. The maximum length of paging access codes is three digits. Paging access codes and Meet-Me codes must
be preprogrammed.
5. A maximum of 10 zones of external paging can be set up.
6. Meet-Me service is programmable. When Meet-Me service is not provided, there is no system timeout on
paging. When Meet-Me service is provided, a system timeout is applied to the delay Meet-Me operation.
In the case of delay operation, both the paging period and the period of waiting for the Meet-Me call are
combined. After this timeout expires, Meet-Me attempts will be denied and the paging circuits become
available again. (Refer to the Variable Timing Parameters feature for timeout information).
7. If additional dialing is required after seizing a paging trunk, the Radio Paging Equipment Access feature
may be used.
8. No LED indication for the External Paging key on an Attendant Console is provided.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR
FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR
General Description
When a call from a C.O. line (Direct-Inward-Termination, Direct-Inward-Dialing, Automated Attendant), sta-
tion or tie line has terminated to a facsimile machine, a related lamp on a predesignated Multiline Terminal is
caused to light, indicating reception of a facsimile call. The lamp indication is as follows:
Status
Indication
Lamp (red); 120-ipm flash
Receiving
(The chime beeps on start of message reception)
Lamp (red); Steady Lighting
Lamp Off
Receive End
Not Receiving/Clear
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To turn off the facsimile call lamp, press the FACSIMILE INCOMING CALL key.
Service Conditions
Note: In the following service conditions, the term facsimile station refers to the actual facsimile machine sin-
gle line station number. Facsimile call station refers to the button assignment on the Multiline Terminal.
1. The number of facsimile station numbers and facsimile call station numbers that can be assigned varies with
each of the following cases.
a. When Hot Lines-Inside/Outside are used to implement this feature, a maximum of 100 facsimile
stations can be assigned. In addition, a maximum of 100 facsimile call stations can be assigned.
b. When House Phone groups are used to implement this feature, a maximum of four facsimile stations
can be assigned. In addition, there is no limit to the number of facsimile call stations that can be
assigned to each facsimile station.
2. Termination of a facsimile call is indicated on the lamp of the flexible line key to which a facsimile call
station number is assigned.
3. This feature does not indicate a call termination on the LCD.
4. One facsimile call number can be assigned to flexible line keys of multiple Multiline Terminal sets.
5. Multiple facsimile call numbers can be assigned to a flexible line key of any one specific Multiline Terminal
set.
6. When a new call terminates while the facsimile incoming call lamp is lit, the lamp indication changes to
120-ipm flash.
7. The chime which signals starting reception of a facsimile message beeps even if the Multiline Terminal is
busy, unless the speaker is in use at that time.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 168
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURE ACTIVATION FROM SECONDARY EXTENSION
FEATURE ACTIVATION FROM SECONDARY EXTENSION
General Description
This feature allows the Multiline Terminal user to access an appearance of another extension and program cer-
tain features from that extension.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the applicable feature for operating procedures.
Service Conditions
1. The following features may be set on a secondary extension:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Busy In/Busy Out - ACD
Busy In/Busy Out - UCD
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Pickup - Group
Return Message Schedule Display
2. After a call has been originated from a secondary extension, Call Back or Trunk Queuing - Outgoing can be
set. The primary extension of the station that set the feature will be recalled. If Trunk Queuing - Outgoing
is already set on the primary extension, it cannot be set on the secondary extension.
3. When an incoming call rings on the Call Pickup - Group to which the secondary extension belongs, the in-
coming call can be picked up.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT
FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT
General Description
Multiline Terminals can have any desired line key assignment. This feature permits assignments to be tailored
to each individual's needs. (The terminal's primary extension line appearance is the only line key which cannot
be reassigned.)
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Each line key can be assigned as one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Trunk Access
Extension
Save and Repeat
Do Not Disturb
Data
Intercom
Hotline
Feature Access
Refer to the applicable Features and Specifications for more information on that feature.
2. Line key assignment is made in system programming using the Maintenance Administration Terminal
(MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
3. The Multiline Terminal with 16 buttons has 15 programmable line keys. One line key is reserved for that
station's primary extension.
4. The Multiline Terminal with 8 buttons has 7 programmable line keys. One line key is reserved for that sta-
tion's primary extension.
5. A maximum of one Do Not Disturb key and three Save and Repeat keys can be assigned per Multiline Ter-
minal.
6. Stations desiring dial tone from a specific line can press that line key before lifting the handset.
7. When Station Speed Dialing is assigned to the line key on a Series E Multiline Terminal with no DSS key
by the system data, and an extension number is assigned to the line key by the station user, a lamp of the
line key indicates the busy/idle status of the extension.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 170
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN
FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN
General Description
The system has a Flexible Numbering Plan. All access codes and station numbers and can be assigned in system
programming. Refer also to the Single Digit Dialing Features and Specifications which further increases the
flexibility of the system.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Normal call handling procedures apply.
Service Conditions
1. The system is provided with a Resident System Program; however, the flexibility of the system allows all
access codes and station numbers to be changed to any desired number (from one to three digits for access
codes, and one to 8 digits for station numbers), provided access codes and station numbers do not conflict
with each other.
2. Up to four different numbering plans may be assigned in the same system. When there are multiple tenants,
any one of the four numbering plans can be assigned to each tenant.
3. Any combination of 1 to 8 digits can be assigned as station numbers within the same numbering plan. When
assigning different amounts of digits to stations the leading digits of the shorter extension numbers cannot
be the same as the leading digits of the longer extension numbers. For example: extensions 60 and 607 can-
not be assigned in the same numbering plan.
4. The system can also be programmed to provide a group of fixed single-digit feature access codes. These
codes allow a station user to dial a single digit to activate specific features. These codes can only be applied
while the station user is receiving ringback or busy tone. The following feature access codes can be dialed
while receiving busy tone:
Access Code
Feature
Call Back, Trunk Queuing Outgoing
Executive Override
2
3
4
5
6
*
Camp-On (transfer)
Camp-On (call waiting)
Message Reminder
Step Call
The following feature access codes can be dialed while receiving ringback tone:
Access Code
Feature
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
Call Back
1
2
6
Message Reminder
5. The single-digit feature access codes used while receiving ringback tone can be used by Single Line Tele-
phones with a DTMF dialpad, after pressing the FLASH key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT
FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT
General Description
This feature allows lines on Multiline Terminals to be individually programmed to ring or not ring.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The following priority applies to ringing of multiple incoming calls:
a. Voice call (Station to Station on extension, Automatic or Dial Intercom)
b. Recalls
c. Incoming External Calls
d. Incoming Internal Calls, Dial Intercom ringing calls, Manual Intercom
2. Delayed Ringing is available. Refer to the Delayed Ringing Features and Specifications for more informa-
tion.
3. Flexible Ringing Assignment is assignable in system programming.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 172
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE
General Description
This feature forces the user to enter an Account Code (up to 8 or 10 digits) for all outgoing calls. The Account
Code must be dialed before dialing the outgoing number. Calls are processed only when the dialed Account
Codes are valid.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
When dialing an outgoing call:
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Enter the Forced Account Code feature access code and receive service set tone.
3. Enter the Forced Account Code (up to 8 or 10 digits) and receive dial tone.
4. Dial the desired number.
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of digits in the Forced Account Code is programmable, (for the entire system), from
1 to 8 or 10 digits.
2. The Forced Account Code access code can be 1 to 3 digits.
3. Forced Account Code Limitations
a. In the case of a system with AP01 card:
•
Number of digits: 1 digit-10 digits (If Check Code is provided, limited to 8 digits)
The same number of digits must be assigned to Authorization Code and Forced Account Code.
•
Number of codes: Up to 1,000 codes combined with Authorization Code and Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) Code.
b. In the case of a system without AP01 card:
•
•
Number of digits: 1 digit-8 digits
Number of codes: The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit
number. For details, refer to APPENDIX 3.
4. Both Authorization Code and Forced Account Code can be provided for the same system.
5. Stations are assigned this feature according to Class of Service programming in system data.
6. Forced Account Codes are recorded in the System Message Detail Records.
7. Existing restriction assignments will be applied even after a Forced Account Code is entered.
8. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature is not available.
9. A Forced Account Code can be assigned per a station number so that one code is used only on the specific
station. Application Processor (AP01) is required.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GROUP CALL
Automatic Conference (6/10 Party)
GROUP CALL
Automatic Conference (6/10 Party)
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user or single line telephone user within the system to establish a con-
ference among as many as six or ten parties. From a Multiline Terminal /Single Line Telephone, a maximum of
9 stations can be paged simultaneously plus the originator. The stations are assigned to the simultaneous paging
groups as a participants by the system data beforehand.
Station Application
All Stations.
Operating Procedure
To make a conference call
1. Press the speaker key or go off hook, and receive a dial tone.
2. Dial the access code, or press feature access key (Multiline Terminal only), for a desired paging group and
receiver a ringback tone.
To answer the paging
1. The called terminals receive ringing. The LCD of the Multiline Terminal shows Paging, plus the station
number of the originator.
2. Answer the ringing page from the originator.
3. You can converse with the originator and other participants.
To participate in the middle of the conference
1. Press the speaker key or go off hook, and receive a dial tone.
2. Dial the access code, or press feature access key (Multiline Terminal only), for re-participation to the paging
group.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of nine stations are paged simultaneously including the originator.
Even if more than nine stations are assigned to one group, the first nine stations are paged in order of regis-
tered number on the system data.
2. Single Line Telephones, Multiline Terminals, can be assigned as the stations within the conference groups
(Virtual line cannot be assigned). A station can belong to multiple groups.
3. Up to eight groups can be assigned as conference groups by system data.
4. The maximum number of participants which can be connected in a conference is:
•
•
Six participants (Inclusive of the leader) when one CFT trunk is used.
Ten participants (inclusive of the leader) when two CFT trunks are used.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GROUP CALL
2 Way Calling
Up to four CFT trunks can be accommodated in the system.
The maximum number of conference groups per system when using four CFT trunks (maximum) is:
•
•
•
Four, 6-party conference groups
Two, 10-party conference groups
Two, 6-party conference groups and one, 10-party conference group
A CFT trunk is used for either a 6-party or 10-party conference. Dialed access codes determine which CFT
trunk is used for a conference. If the leader dials the access code or press the feature access key for a 10-
party conference when only one CFT trunk is idle, the leader is restricted and hear reorder tone.
5. A Single Line Telephone, Multiline Terminal, can be an originator and make a conference call to a group,
even if it does not belong to the group.
6. A Single Line Telephone, Multiline Terminal, which does not belong to the group, can be a participant of a
conference by dialing the re-participation access code or by pressing the feature access key(Multiline Ter-
minal only), when the CFT trunk has an idle circuit.
7. An originator cannot page two or more groups simultaneously.
A group cannot be paged simultaneously by the multiple originators.
A group cannot be paged while a conference of the group is in progress.
8. If all stations within the paged group are busy, the originator hears the reorder tone.
If a station does not answer the paging by certain time (whichi is determined by the system data), the orig-
inator leader hears the busy tone.
9. When a station cannot answer the paging by paging time out, or busy state , the station can participate the
conference by dialing the re-participation access code or by pressing the feature access key while the con-
ference is in progress.
10. If the originator leaves the conference, the originator can re-participate by dialing the re-participation access
code or by pressing the feature access key while the conference is in progress.
11. A station can be paged in the idle state. When the station is busy at the time of paging, the station cannot be
paged even if the station returns to idle afterward.
12. Even if a station sets Call Forwarding, the originator can page the station.
2 Way Calling
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal/Single Line Telephone to page a maximum of fifteen parties simulta-
neously including the originator. After one of paged parties answers, the paging becomes the 2 Way Calling be-
tween the originator and the first answered party, automatically stops paging other parties. The stations are
assigned to the simultaneous paging groups as a participants by the system data beforehand.
Station Application
All Stations.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GROUP CALL
2 Way Calling
Operating Procedure
To page stations of a group
1. Press the Speaker key or go off hook, and receive a dial tone.
2. Dial the access code, or press feature access key (Multiline Terminal only), for a desired paging group and
receive a ringback tone.
To answer the paging
1. The called terminals receive ringing. The LCD of the Multiline Terminal shows PAGING, including the sta-
tion number of the originator.
2. Answer the ringing page from the originator.
3. Paging stops after one of paged stations answer.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of fifteen stations are paged simultaneously including the originator.
Even if more than fifteen stations are assigned to one group except the leader, the first fifteen stations are
paged in order of registered number on the system deta. Also one station can belong to multiple groups.
2. Single Line Telephones, Multiline Terminals, can be assigned as the stations within the group call groups
(Virtual line cannot be assigned). A station can belong to multiple groups.
3. Up to eight groups can be assigned as the call group by system data, including voice paging and Group Call-
Automatin Conference.
4. A Single Line Telephone, Multiline Terminal, can be an originator and page a group, even if the originator
does not belong to the group.
5. The originator cannot page two or more groups simultaneously.
A group cannot be paged simultaneously by the plural group call leaders.
6. If all stations within the paged group are busy, the originator hears a reorder tone.
The Group Call leader will continue to hear ringback tone until the page is answered. If does not time out.
7. A station can be paged in the idle state. When the station is busy at the time of paging, the station will not
be paged even if the station returns to idle afterward.
8. Even if a station sets Call Forwarding, the originator can page the station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 176
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GROUP LISTENING
GROUP LISTENING
General Description
When a Multiline Terminal user makes a call using the handset, pressing the Speaker key will allow others to
listen through the built-in speaker of the Multiline Terminal. The user may continue talking on the handset at
the same time.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To monitor a call
1. Talk with a station/trunk by handset.
2. Press the Speaker key and the associated LED lights.
3. Continue the conversation on the handset.
4. To return to private conversation, press the Speaker key again.
Service Conditions
1. This feature applies to both internal and external calls.
2. Volume may be adjusted using the Multiline Terminal's volume control.
3. Group Listening is assigned in Class of Service on a per station basis.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK
HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK
General Description
This feature allows the station user to answer a voice call without lifting the handset.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To answer a voice call
1. Make sure the MIC (Microphone) is active and the associated LED is lit.
2. Respond to call handsfree.
Service Conditions
1. Handsfree Answerback may only be used when responding to calls on the primary extension.
2. The MIC LED on the Multiline Terminal must be lit before Handsfree Answerback can begin.
3. The MIC is turned on and off by pressing the Feature key followed by the digit 1 (one).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HANDSFREE DIALING AND MONITORING
HANDSFREE DIALING AND MONITORING
General Description
This feature allows the station user to dial or monitor a call without lifting the handset.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To initiate a call
1. Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the desired number.
3. When the called party answers, lift the handset.
To monitor a call
1. Press the Speaker key and replace the handset.
2. When the conversation resumes, lift the handset.
Service Conditions
1. This feature may be used for both internal and external calls.
2. Volume may be adjusted using the speaker volume control on the Multiline Terminal.
3. To talk to the called party, the user may use the handset, or handsfree if the MIC is active.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOLD
Call Hold
HOLD
General Description
This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progress. After Hold has been set, the station user can make or an-
swer new calls.
Call Hold
General Description
This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progress by sending a hookflash and dialing the Call Hold feature
access code, or by pressing the Call Hold key. This line can then be used for originating another call or returning
to a previously held call.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To Hold a call in progress
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive special dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Hold feature access code and receive dial tone.
3. The call in progress is held and the station may make a new call.
• From a Multiline Terminal with a Call Hold key assigned
1. Press the CALL HOLD key and receive dial tone.
2. The call in progress is held and the user may make a new call.
• From a Multiline Terminal without a Call Hold key
1. Press the Transfer key and receive special dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Hold feature access code and receive dial tone.
3. The call in progress is held and the user may make a new call.
To release a call and return to the original call
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Hang up to release the call in progress.
2. The original call rings back to station.
3. Lift the handset and continue with the original call.
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Go on-hook to release the call in progress.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 180
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOLD
Dual Hold
2. The original call rings back to Multiline Terminal.
3. Lift the handset and continue with the original call.
To Hold a call and return to original call
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch) and receive special dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Hold feature access code. The call is now on Hold.
3. The original call is automatically returned.
• From a Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Transfer key and receive special dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Hold feature access code. The new call is now held and the original call is automatically re-
turned.
Note: By repeating the above steps, the station users may alternately converse with two parties (Broker's Call).
• From a Multiline Terminal with a call in Call Hold and a call in progress on an extension line key
1. Replacing the handset will release the call in progress and initiate an immediate recall of the Call Hold call.
2. Pressing the Recall key will cause release of the call in progress and immediate connection to new Dial Tone
(unless the call in progress on the extension line key is via a trunk programmed as Centrex, in which case
the Recall key will generate a hookflash to the distant exchange for feature access there).
Service Conditions
1. Lines freed through use of this feature may also be used for answering incoming calls using the Call Pickup
Group or Trunk Answer any Station features.
2. If the controlling station user does not dial any further digits after the Hold feature access code, the station
will enter the Line Lockout mode after a preset time-out period.
3. Calls will remain on Hold until the controlling station user either replaces the handset, causing the held call
to ring back, or provides a hookflash and redials the Hold feature access code to return to the original call.
4. Only one call at a time may be held per station line, and the held call cannot be added to another call as in
three-party Conference.
5. Stations may be allowed or denied this feature in Class of Service programming in station data.
6. A maximum of 128 stations per system may simultaneously use this feature.
7. When a station has a Camp-On call, providing a hookflash and dialing the Call Hold feature access code
results in the station immediately connecting to the Camped-On party.
Dual Hold
General Description
This feature permits a station user who is placed on Hold by another station to place that station on Hold also.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOLD
Exclusive Hold
Operating Procedure
Internal party connection from a Multiline Terminal:
1. Station A presses the Hold key and Station B is placed on hold.
2. Station B presses the Hold key and Station A is placed on hold.
3. Dual Hold is now in progress.
Service Conditions
1. The party who placed the other party on Hold first will not receive a recall until the other party releases the
Dual Hold.
2. This feature is available for extension calls including Intercom calls.
3. When two Multiline Terminals activate this feature, the recall timer begins when second station goes on
Hold (the first hold is no longer timed). When the timer expires, the second station is recalled and upon
answering initiates a recall to the first station.
4. An Intercom Voice Call with Hands free Answerback cannot be placed on Hold. The called party must be
off-hook using the terminal's handset in order for this call to be placed on Hold.
Exclusive Hold
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold and to exclude all other station users from
retrieving the held call.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
While a call is in progress:
1. Press the Transfer key and then press the Hold key. The LCD displays: E-HOLD
OR
2. Press the Hold key twice. The LCD displays: E-HOLD
3. To return to the held call, press the held line key. The conversation is re-established.
Service Conditions
1. Exclusive Hold may be activated from any line appearing on a Multiline Terminal.
2. After Exclusive Hold has been set, the user can make or answer calls from any other line appearing on the
Multiline Terminal.
3. Only the Multiline Terminal that set Exclusive Hold may retrieve the held call.
4. The station initiating the Exclusive Hold will receive a distinctive I-Hold indication.
5. After a programmable period of time, the held call will be automatically recalled regardless of the status of
the Multiline Terminal. Ringing, however, is disabled while Do Not Disturb is activated.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 182
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOLD
Non-Exclusive Hold
6. The LEDs of other Multiline Terminals on which the held line appears will give a steady display while the
Exclusive Hold exists and during recall.
7. An internal station on Exclusive Hold cannot receive the following:
•
•
•
Camp-On
Attendant Override
Executive Override
Non-Exclusive Hold
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold which may be retrieved by any station that
has an appearance of the held line.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. With a call in progress, press the Hold key (once).
2. To retrieve a held call, press the held line key.
Service Conditions
1. Any Multiline Terminal displaying another appearance of the held line can seize the held call.
2. Automatic Recall is directed only to the station which placed the call on Hold.
3. The station initiating Hold will receive a distinctive I-Hold indication.
4. Two-Party Hold is available when a Multiline Terminal is engaged in a three-party Conference with stations
and/or trunks.
5. When two parties are put on Hold, service features such as Executive Override, Attendant Override, and
Camp-On cannot be activated to that busy line with the two parties on Hold.
6. The two held parties remain connected to each other and can talk to each other. Music on Hold is not acti-
vated.
7. The two held parties cannot be placed on Exclusive Hold by the Multiline Terminal user.
8. If one of the two held parties is released from the connection, Music On Hold will be activated on the re-
maining connection. When the holding party returns to the connection, a two-party connection is estab-
lished.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOTEL/MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE
HOTEL/MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE
General Description
The Attendant Console can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel Attendant Console. In addition to the
business features and functions of the Attendant, the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console can set Room Cutoff (in-
dividual and group), Automatic Wake Up, Message Waiting, and Do Not Disturb (individual and group).
Station Application
Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
Room Cutoff - Individual, Do Not Disturb - Individual and Message Waiting
• To set
1. Dial the desired extension.
2. Press the applicable function key.
3. Press the START key.
• To cancel
1. Dial the desired extension.
2. Press the applicable function key.
3. Press the RESET key.
Room Cutoff - Group and Do Not Disturb - Group
• To set
1. Press the applicable function key.
2. Press the START or key.
• To cancel
1. Press the applicable function key.
2. Press the RESET key.
Automatic Wake Up
• To set
1. Dial the desired extension.
2. Press the Automatic Wake Up function key.
3. Dial the digits applicable to the requested Automatic Wake Up time in military time (ex. 7:30 p.m. is 1930).
4. Press the START key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 184
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOTEL/MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE
• To cancel
1. Dial the desired extension.
2. Press the Automatic Wake Up function key.
3. Press the RESET key.
Service Conditions
1. A dedicated function key on the console must be assigned for each desired feature (Room Cutoff, Automatic
Wakeup, etc.).
2. The Room Cutoff and Do Not Disturb features are applicable to a group of stations and individual stations.
One group is available for each feature and the stations in the groups are programmed on a per station basis
in system data.
3. An Application Processor (AP00) is required to provide Station Message Detail Recording, Message Reg-
istration, Room Cutoff-Group, and Do Not Disturb - Group.
4. Pressing the DDOVR key, when calling a station that has DND set, will override the DND setting.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT
HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT
General Description
A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument.
This can be used to set and cancel standard H/M features such as Message Waiting, Do Not Disturb, Automatic
Wake Up, and Room Cutoff.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
Normal call processing procedures apply except for the following:
•
When calling a station that has set Do Not Disturb (DND), pressing the DNDOVR key will override the
DND condition.
To activate Do Not Disturb, Message Waiting, and Room Cutoff
1. Press the applicable function button.
2. Dial the desired station number where feature is to be set or canceled. (This procedure is not required when
speaking with that station in a Station-to-Station call or when setting the group functions.)
3. Press the SET key to set the desired function.
OR
Press the RESET key to cancel the desired function.
4. Repeat the above steps if multiple station assignments are desired.
OR
Press the RLS key to exit feature activation.
Note: For alternate operating procedures, refer to the applicable feature.
To activate Do Not Disturb-Group or Room Cutoff-Group
1. Press the DD or RC key.
2. Press the GROUP key.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the RLS key.
To cancel Do Not Disturb-Group or Room Cutoff-Group
1. Press the DD or RC key.
2. Press the GROUP key.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the RLS key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 186
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT
To activate Automatic Wake Up
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Dial the desired Wake-Up time in military format (in one minute increments).
3. Press the WK UP key.
4. Dial the station number.
5. Press the SET key.
Steps (4) and (5) can be repeated for additional stations.
6. Press the RLS key.
OR
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Dial the station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Dial the desired wake up time in military format (in one minute increments).
5. Press the SET key.
Steps (2) through (5) can be repeated for additional stations.
6. Press the RLS key.
To cancel Automatic Wake Up
1. Press WK UP key.
2. Dial station number.
3. Press RESET key.
Steps (2) and (3) can be repeated for additional stations.
4. Press RLS key.
To activate Automatic Wake Up while engaged in conversation with station
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Dial the Wake up time in military format (in one minute increments).
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the RLS key.
To cancel Automatic Wake Up while engaged in conversation with station
1. Press the WK UP key.
2. Press the RESET key.
3. Press the RLS key.
To activate Check In/Check Out
1. Press the Check In/Check Out function button.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key to set Check In.
OR
Press the RESET key to set Check Out.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT
To activate Room Status
1. Press the Room Status function button.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key. The features that are activated at the station will be indicated by the LED lighting at the
applicable feature function button and the LCD will display **:** unless Automatic Wake Up is set, in
which case the set time will be displayed. In addition (to the right of the display) the Room Status number
is displayed.
4. Press the RLS key to exit feature activation.
To activate Print Out
1. Press the Print Out function button.
2. Press the applicable function button for which a Print Out is desired. If Room Status is selected, a code must
be dialed to select which room condition is to be printed. If a code is not entered all room conditions will
be printed.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the RLS key to exit feature activation.
Service Conditions
1. The following Hotel/Motel functions can be accessed from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do Not Disturb
Room Cutoff
Message Waiting
Print Out
Check In/Check Out
Automatic Wake up
Room Status
Do Not Disturb Override
2. For each feature desired, a dedicated line key on the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument must be assigned.
3. The Room Cutoff and Do Not Disturb features are applicable to a group of stations and individual stations.
There is one group available for each feature and the stations in the groups are programmed on a per-station
basis in system data.
4. An Application Processor card (AP00) is required for this feature.
5. The Print Out function provides a hard copy on the status of the following features when the feature is set
or reset:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do Not Disturb
Room Cutoff
Message Waiting
Automatic Wake up
Room Status
Check In/Check Out
6. Successful and unsuccessful Wake Up attempts are printed out.
7. A printer must be provided locally.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT
8. The Print Out function allows selection of output based on individual station numbers (except for Room Sta-
tus).
9. When Check Out is done, the following functions are set or cleared:
•
•
•
•
DND - cleared
Message Wait - cleared
Room Cutoff - set
Automatic Wake Up - cleared
10. Room Status Codes are totally flexible, and the user determines the meaning for each code. The system will
print the maid ID or station number (if other than guest room) that set the specific code. Up to eight codes
(1-8) are available.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOTLINE - INSIDE/OUTSIDE
HOTLINE - INSIDE/OUTSIDE
General Description
This feature causes the terminal to place a call to another station or to an outside party automatically when the
user selects the Hotline extension.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To place a Hotline call from a Single Line Telephone
1. Lift the handset and receive ringback tone. The other party receives ringing indication.
2. Converse when the other party answers.
To place a Hotline call from a Multiline Terminal
1. Lift the handset.
2. Press the Hotline extension button (if not Prime Line). Receive ringback tone. The other party receives
ringing indication.
3. Converse when the other party answers.
Service Conditions
1. There is a maximum of 100 assignments for Hotline destination. If internal bidirectional Hotline calling is
required, two assignments (one for each direction) must be made. A maximum of 50 pairs of bidirectional
Hotlines can be assigned.
2. Hotline assignments are programmed into system data using the Maintenance Administration Terminal
(MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
3. A Hotline call can be transferred to another station using the Call Transfer feature.
4. On an internal Hotline call, the calling party hears reorder tone when the called station is in one of the fol-
lowing conditions:
•
•
•
Busy
In Line Lockout
In make busy through software programming.
5. Call Forwarding is applied whenever the destination station of the Hotline call has set Call Forwarding -All
Calls/-Busy Line/-No Answer.
6. Hotline calls can be directed to the outside exchange network by assignment of the destination as a system
speed dial memory location. When this Hotline is used, the system will access a trunk in the trunk route
associated with the trunk access code assigned in the system speed dial memory location, and then will dial
out the assigned outside number. See System Speed Dialing for the methods to reprogram the outside num-
ber.
7. On Hotline - Outside calls, when all trunks in the trunk route are busy, reorder tone is heard by the calling
party.
8. On Hotline - Outside calls, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will register the primary extension
of the station that used the Hotline and the system speed dial memory location code.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 190
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOUSE PHONE
HOUSE PHONE
General Description
This feature allows selected stations to reach the Attendant simply by going off-hook.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. The House Phone user lifts handset.
2. The Attendant Console is called automatically.
3. The attendant answers.
4. The attendant connects user to another station or a trunk.
Service Conditions
1. Attendant Console indications will appear as follows:
•
•
ATND lamp flashes.
Console buzzer sounds.
2. House Phones (locally provided) may be equipped without dials .
3. House Phone assignments are programmed into system data from the Maintenance Administration Terminal
(MAT) or the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
4. There is no limit to the number of House Phones permitted in the system provided the maximum amount of
available ports is not exceeded.
5. The Attendant has the option to process the call using the delay or non-delay operation or passing dial tone
to House Phones with dials.
6. The system's response to a hookflash from a House Phone can be assigned to provide feature dial tone or
recall the Attendant.
7. Four house phone groups are available.
8. Each house phone group can be assigned to automatically call the Attendant Console or a predesignated sta-
tion.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS
INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS
General Description
This feature permits a user to call a specific Attendant by dialing an Attendant call code.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To originate a call to the Attendant
1. Go off-hook and dial the Individual Attendant Access code.
2. Dial the individual Attendant number (0-7).
3. The desired Attendant receives Incoming Call Identification and answers using normal call handling proce-
dures.
Service Conditions
1. All stations, including fully restricted stations, can call an Attendant.
2. If Tenant Service is provided, each tenant can call his own Attendant via the same code. When this feature
is assigned, Attendant Night Transfers will not function for these calls.
3. Interposition Transfer uses the same Attendant call codes as Individual Attendant Access.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 192
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT
INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT
General Description
This feature provides the automatic interception of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and Tie Line calls which cannot
be completed due to unassigned station or level. The caller hears a recorded Intercept Announcement which
informs the caller that an inoperative number was reached, and may supply the number for information.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
To record a message
1. Go off-hook and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the voice recording feature access code and the voice recording card number. Three seconds of tone
will be supplied.
3. Record the message (maximum duration 60 seconds).
4. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. This feature requires a Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) circuits of MP card or a 2DAT/4DAT card pro-
grammed for Intercept Announcement.
MP card includes two DAT circuits and 2DAT/4DAT card provides 2/4DAT circuits.
2. Multiple calls may be connected to the Intercept Announcement board at the same time. If a second call
arrives while the first is being processed, the second caller may not hear the announcement from the begin-
ning.
3. If the caller does not hang up, the system will repeat the message.
4. This feature is only available on DID and tie line calls where answer supervision is provided.
5. The following call conditions, which cannot be completed, can be routed to an Intercept Announcement:
•
•
Vacant level
Unassigned station number
6. Calls to restricted access codes or feature access codes will always receive the Intercept Announcement.
7. Only one common message can be provided for the different intercept conditions.
8. There is no method to exempt individual DID or Tie Lines from Intercept Announcement.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERCOM
Manual Intercom
INTERCOM
General Description
Three types of Intercoms are available: Manual Intercom, Automatic Intercom, and Dial Intercom. Each type of
Intercom provides access to a small group of Multiline Terminals with simplified calling methods.
Manual Intercom
General Description
The Manual Intercom groups have up to six Multiline Terminals sharing a common signal path. Users can call
other members of the Manual Intercom group by pressing a Manual Intercom key; each press sends a tone burst
over the speakers of all the terminals in the group. When another user answers the call, a speech path is activated.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. The caller lifts the handset and presses the Manual Intercom key. The other members of the group receive
a tone burst.
2. Each subsequent press sends another tone burst.
3. Another user presses the same Manual Intercom appearance and establishes a station-to-station call by lift-
ing the handset.
Service Conditions
1. A Manual Intercom group can consist of two to six Multiline Terminals.
2. A maximum of 25 Manual Intercom groups can be assigned per system.
3. A Manual Intercom is always non-private; therefore, up to 4 members of the group can enter an Intercom
call.
4. Incoming call indications are given to all members of the Manual Intercom group except the originator of
the call.
5. Each Manual Intercom (from 2 to 6 appearances) uses a single extension which can be a software extension
(no supporting hardware is required).
6. Transfer, Call Park, and other extension line features are not available on Manual Intercom. Dual Hold and
Hold Recall are available on Manual Intercom.
7. More than one Manual Intercom can appear on a Multiline Terminal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 194
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERCOM
Automatic Intercom
Automatic Intercom
General Description
Automatic Intercom provides a path for Voice Announcement Calls with Handsfree Answerback between two
Multiline Terminals using a line key. Private conversations can be held by using the Multiline Terminal hand-
sets. The Busy/Idle status of the associated Multiline Terminal is displayed on the Automatic Intercom line key
LED.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. The caller lifts the handset and presses the Automatic Intercom key.
2. The called terminal receives a tone burst followed by Voice Announcement and can answer using Handsfree
Answerback.
OR
1. The caller can change the call to a ringing call by dialing 1.
2. The called terminal must press Automatic Intercom key and lift the handset to answer ringing call.
Service Conditions
1. Only two Multiline Terminals can share an Automatic Intercom path.
2. The maximum number of Automatic Intercom paired stations per system is 32.
3. More than one Automatic Intercom can appear on a Multiline Terminal.
4. Automatic Intercoms are private.
5. Each Automatic Intercom pair uses two extensions which can be software extensions (no supporting hard-
ware is required).
6. Dual Hold with hold recall is available on Automatic Intercom. Other extension features such as Call Trans-
fer, Call Park, etc. are not available.
7. When the called terminal is busy, the caller will receive busy tone.
Dial Intercom
General Description
Dial Intercom comprises up to 10 Multiline Terminals which can call each other using a dedicated Dial Intercom
line key with abbreviated dialing. Dial Intercom calls can be Voice Announce with Handsfree Answerback or
ringing calls.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERCOM
Dial Intercom
Operating Procedure
1. The caller lifts the handset, presses the Dial Intercom key, and receives dial tone.
2. The caller dials the one-digit Intercom code of the called Multiline Terminal (0-9).
3. The called terminal receives a tone burst followed by Voice Announcement and can answer using Handsfree
Answerback.
OR
1. The caller can dial 1 to change the call to a ringing call. (Each 1 dialed changes the mode from ringing to
Voice Announce or vice versa).
2. To answer a ringing call the user must lift the handset and press the flashing Dial Intercom key.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 25 Dial Intercom groups are available per system. A maximum of 10 Multiline Terminals
per Dial Intercom group are allowed.
2. A Multiline Terminal can have more than one Dial Intercom appearance.
3. Each Dial Intercom provides a single voice path.
4. Intercom number assignments are one digit (0-9).
5. A Dial Intercom is private, and the other members of the group can not enter an Intercom call.
6. Incoming call indication is only given to the called party within the Dial Intercom group.
7. Each Dial Intercom (from 2 to 10 appearances) uses a single extension, which can be a software extension
(no supporting hardware is required).
8. Dual Hold and hold recall are available on Dial Intercom. Other extension features such as Call Transfer,
Call Park, etc. are not available.
9. If the called party, within the Dial Intercom group, is busy (off hook) on its primary extension, the station
making the intercom call will receive busy tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 196
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALLING
INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALLING
General Description
Multiline Terminals can signal incoming internal calls by Voice Announcement or by ringing according to the
programmed mode (Voice first or Ring first) of the called terminal. The caller can dial the digit 1 to change from
Voice Announcement to Ring Tone or vice versa.
The Multiline Terminal assigned this feature can program the following two modes:
•
•
Voice Mode: allows an incoming call to terminate with Voice Announcement.
Tone Mode: allows an incoming call to terminate with ringing.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
When a called Multiline Terminal has been set to Ring first
1. Press the extension line key and lift the handset.
2. Dial extension number. The called party's extension will ring.
3. The handset must be used for reply
OR
Dial 1.
4. Wait for voice page alert tone.
5. Voice announce call.
6. The called party can reply handsfree.
When a called Multiline Terminal has been set to Voice first
1. Press the extension line key and lift the handset.
2. Dial extension number. Wait for voice page alert tone.
3. Voice announce call.
4. The called party can reply hands-free
OR
Dial 1.
5. The called party's extension will ring.
6. The handset must be used to reply.
To set Voice/Tone mode
1. Press the Speaker key.
2. Dial the Voice/Tone Programming access code and receive feature dial tone. The LCD will show the current
mode of the Multiline Terminal.
3. Dial any single digit (0-9). Voice mode is switched to Tone mode (or vice versa) and Service Set tone is
received.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALLING
4. Press the Speaker key.
Service Conditions
1. When a Multiline Terminal is receiving a Voice Announcement, it cannot receive any other audible signal.
2. Single-digit feature access codes must be allowed in system programming.
3. Voice Announce service on extension lines can be allowed or denied on a system basis.
4. Microphone control (MIC) lamp must be lit for Handsfree Answerback response.
5. Refer also to the Intercom Features and Specifications.
6. Voice announcement is available only to the primary extension of the dialed station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME
INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant Console and system users to page over the built-in speakers of the Multiline
Terminals within the assigned zone or all zones.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To page from a Multiline Terminal or a Single Line Telephone
1. Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the Internal Zone Paging feature access code for the desired zone/all zones or press line key assigned
for the desired zone/all zones.
3. Page the desired party.
To page from Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Internal Zone Paging feature access code for the desired zone/all zones.
3. Page the desired party.
To answer (Meet-Me) from a Multiline Terminal or a Single Line Telephone
1. Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the Meet-Me Answer feature access code.
3. Converse.
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of internal paging zones is 8, zone 0 through zone 7. Up to 8 Internal zones can be
accessed simultaneously by different stations.
2. The paging station can only page to one zone at a time. For all-zone paging, the paging station can page
Zone 0 through Zone 5 simultaneously.
3. The maximum number of Multiline Terminals within one zone is 16.
4. A busy Multiline Terminal will not be paged during an Internal Zone Page.
5. Multiline Terminals can be assigned to more than one zone.
6. Meet-Me Answer cannot be done after performing a consultation hold.
7. Any station can page any zone.
8. The paging station will not receive busy tone when all stations in the paged zone are busy.
9. For the following paging, a paged station must dial paging station number or attendant access code to an-
swer without Meet-Me Answer:
•
•
Zone Paging by Attendant Console
All Zone Paging by any station or attendant
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
General Description
This feature allows users to redial the last station-to-station or outside number they dialed using a feature access
key or a feature access code. This is useful when the called station is busy or does not answer.
Station Application
All stations and Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
From a Multiline Terminal
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Press the Redial key followed by #, or dial the Last Number Redial feature access code.
3. The system will redial the last number dialed from that station.
From a Single Line Telephone
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Last Number Redial feature access code.
3. The system will redial the last number dialed from that station.
From an Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Press the LNR key followed by #.
3. The system will redial the last number dialed from that attendant.
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of digits that can be stored for Last Number Redial is 32.
2. Dialing digits after going off-hook replaces previously stored digits with the new digits.
3. When the Step Call feature is used, the final destination number is stored in memory.
4. Pressing the Redial key when the Multiline Terminal is idle displays the stored number on the LCD, and
turns on the Speaker LED.
5. This feature stores numbers dialed on the Multiline Terminal's primary or secondary extension, or Direct-
Trunk Appearances. This feature does not store Dial Intercom or data calls.
6. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature is not available.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 200
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEAST COST ROUTING - 3/6 DIGIT
LEAST COST ROUTING - 3/6 DIGIT
General Description
This service feature allows the system to be programmed to route outgoing calls over the most economical fa-
cility (WATS, FX, DDD). Based on the individual area code and office code dialed (6-digit analysis), the sys-
tem examines the programmed tables and uses the trunk in the order specified.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the trunk access code and receive dial tone again.
3. Dial the area code, office code and telephone number.
4. The system automatically completes the call using the most economical route.
Service Conditions
1. Least Cost Routing can be programmed to choose a route based on the following criteria:
•
•
•
•
•
Digits dialed (first 3 or 6 digits of the outside number).
Day of Week
Time of Day
Tenant number
Route Advance
In addition, a special Digit Code Table is used to interpret the one, two, or three leading digits of the area
code: e.g., 01XX....X: International Call; 0: Operator Call; 0XXX: Toll Operator Call. The system exam-
ines the Digit Code Table when an ORT timeout has occured after dialing leading digits.
2. In addition to selecting the route, the system can be programmed to:
•
•
Add the prefix digit 1 for use with FX lines requiring 1+ dialing.
Add up to 32 digits in front of the number dialed by the station user to allow for equal access accom-
modation, or for secondary common carrier access or Central Offices which do not provide equal ac-
cess.
•
•
•
Delete the area code (for FX trunks).
Delete all digits, or up to 8 digits from the number dialed.
Allow or deny access to a specific trunk route based on the office code dialed.
3. All trunk routes in the system can be accessed using LCR (including DDD, Tie, FX, WATS, etc). Restric-
tion on outgoing calls and Code Restriction assignments are applied.
4. The following programmable tables are available:
•
Digit Code Table - Up to 8 tables of area codes are used to determine the route to be selected. Although
area codes are normally 3-digit codes, this table can be assigned with 1 to 8-digit codes. These codes
can be assigned to select any other LCR table.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEAST COST ROUTING - 3/6 DIGIT
•
•
Route Pattern Table - Up to 256 Route Advance tables are available, each with 4 entries. If more than
4 entries are required, up to 8 entries can be provided by combining two route pattern tables.
LCR Pattern Table - Up to 256 tables are available for assignment of digits to be added or deleted. Also,
the office code dialed can be checked to determine whether service is available for a specific office
code, and whether a prefix 1 should be added. This table can be used in conjunction with toll restriction
assignment for combined LCR/toll restriction capability. Refer to the Code Restriction Features and
Specifications.
•
Tenant Pattern Table - Up to 16 tables are used to select a route pattern table. The programmer can make
the system select a route pattern table based on which tenant the caller is associated. This allows sharing
of LCR and toll restriction capability among multiple tenants, while providing for the individual needs
of each tenant. Each of the 64 tables can be assigned a route pattern table for each of the 64 tenants.
In addition, the special Digit Code Table is used for assigning the same digits as leading one, two or
three digits of area code assigned to the Digit Code Tables above (e.g. 00XX.....X: International Call,
0: Operator Call, 0XXX:Toll Operator Call use the special Digit Code Table). The system examines
the special Digit Code Table when an ORT timeout has occurred after dialing leading digits.
•
•
Date Pattern Table - Up to 4 day-of-week tables determine whether a route pattern table, tenant pattern
table, or a time pattern table is used next in the routing procedure.
Time Pattern Table - Up to 8 time-of-day tables determine whether a route pattern or tenant pattern table
is used next in the routing procedure. The time is military time and can be input in half hour increments
(00:00 - 23:30).
•
•
Office Code Pattern Tables - Up to 50 tables contain office codes to be checked to see if a prefix digit
1 must be added, and to see if the office code dialed is allowed or denied for a specific trunk route (Ser-
vice area check).
Digit Addition Pattern Table - Up to 256 tables are available for assigning digit addition pattern. Up to
32 digits, including pauses, can be added.
5. Assignment of LCR is on an access code basis. All trunk access codes can be assigned for LCR. Up to 3
different LCR access codes can be assigned, per numbering plan, providing flexibility in choosing routes
by access code. When LCR is implemented, all stations within the system are subject to the LCR process.
6. To provide a group of stations access to trunks that are not subject to LCR, the associated trunk routes should
be given different access codes (not assigned to LCR). Other stations can be restricted from access to these
trunk routes.
7. Direct trunk appearances on Multiline Terminals are not subject to the LCR process.
8. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature is not available.
9. The following flow charts describe LCR system operation.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 202
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEAST COST ROUTING - 3/6 DIGIT
START
Is
first digit an
LCR access
code?
No
Normal operation
(no LCR)
Yes
Get LCR code to
digit code
development
pattern
Is an
LCR code to
digit development
pattern as-
No
Reorder tone
signed?
Yes
Receive next digit
Check assignment
for matched
pattern
Is a
match
found?
No
Yes
Is a
route, tenant,
No
Is a
Reorder tone
Check new digit
code development
pattern table
or time pattern
assigned?
digit code
development
pattern as-
Yes
Yes
signed?
Yes
No
What pattern
is assigned?
Route
Time
Is a
day of week
pattern as-
Check day of
week assignment
signed?
Tenant
No
B
C
D
A
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEAST COST ROUTING - 3/6 DIGIT
A
D
C
Is a
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
Check time of day
assignment
time of day pattern
assigned?
What pattern is
assigned?
Reorder tone
Route
Tenant
No
Is a
tenant
pattern
assigned?
Get route pattern
to be used
No
B
Get first priority
route and go to
assigned
Is a route
pattern
assigned?
LCR/TR table
No
Reorder tone
Is a
Check trunk
restriction table
trunk restriction
pattern as-
signed?
Yes
Get next priority
route and go to
assigned LCR/TR
table
No
Allowed
Denied
Allowed or
denied?
Is
Is this the
Yes
Yes
No
trunk route
busy?
last priority
route?
No
Yes
Reorder tone
Is a
6 digit
restriction
Check restriction
class
assigned?
Check 6 digit
trunk pattern
No
Allowed
Denied
Allowed or
denied?
Reorder tone
E
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEAST COST ROUTING - 3/6 DIGIT
E
Is a
Check digit
addition pattern;
add digits
digit addition
pattern as-
signed?
Yes
accordingly
No
Delete
area code?
Yes
Delete area code
No
Seize a trunk
in first trunk route
Delete
all digits?
Yes
No
Number of
digits to be
deleted?
Delete digits
accordingly
Yes
No
Seize a trunk in
selected priority
trunk route
and dial
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LINE LOCKOUT
LINE LOCKOUT
General Description
This feature automatically releases a station from the common equipment if the station remains off-hook for
longer than a programmed interval before dialing. Howler tone may be programmed to be sent to the station in
Line Lockout.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
For Line Lockout
1. The station user goes off-hook and receives dial tone.
2. If the user doesn't begin dialing within approximately 12 seconds, reorder tone is received.
3. After 30 seconds of reorder tone, the station is automatically placed into the Line Lockout condition and
receives no tone.
4. Upon replacing the handset, the station is released from the Line Lockout condition.
For Line Lockout with howler tone assigned
1. The station user goes off-hook and receives dial tone.
2. If the user doesn't begin dialing within approximately 12 seconds, reorder tone is received.
3. After 30 seconds of reorder tone, the station is automatically placed into the Line Lockout condition and
howler tone (30 seconds on, 30 seconds off) is sent to the station.
4. Upon replacing the handset, the station is released from the Line Lockout condition.
Service Conditions
1. A station in Line Lockout condition cannot receive or originate calls.
2. The Attendant cannot activate any feature to a station in a Line Lockout condition.
3. Howler tone can be allowed or denied on a per station basis.
4. This feature will also be activated if 12 seconds elapse between dialing digits.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 206
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LINE PRESELECTION
LINE PRESELECTION
General Description
This feature provides the station user with two ways to select an idle, held, recalling, or ringing line before going
off-hook.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. Press the desired line key.
2. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone or answer the incoming call.
OR
1. Press the line key and receive dial tone or answer the incoming call. (This procedure is programmable in
system programming on a system basis.)
Service Conditions
1. A line key whose associated LED is lit steady cannot be seized by pressing that key.
2. When the desired line key is pressed, line preselection will remain in effect for 6 seconds. After 6 seconds,
line selection returns to the Prime Line, if assigned.
3. Line Preselection has priority over Ringing Line Pickup and Prime Line assignment.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAID STATUS
MAID STATUS
General Description
This feature allows the Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, Property Management System (PMS) termi-
nal, or guest room station (using special access code) to register the condition of each guest room.
Station Application
All stations except House Phones.
Operating Procedure
To set Maid Status from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the STS key.
2. Dial the desired function status code.
3. Press the STS key again.
4. Dial the guest room number.
5. Press the SET key. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
6. Press the RLS key.
OR
1. Press the STS key.
2. Dial the guest room number.
3. Press the SET key - Room Status is displayed. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
4. Press the STS key again.
5. Dial the desired function status number code.
6. Press the SET key. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
7. Press the RLS key.
To set Maid Status from a guest room station by maid or repair person
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Maid Status feature access code and receive special dial tone.
3. Dial the Maid ID code.
4. Dial the desired function status number code.
5. Receive service set tone, then restore the handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 208
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAID STATUS
Service Conditions
1. There are a maximum of 8 types of room conditions as follows:
Status Number
Room Condition
Check In
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Check Out
Under Cleaning
Cleaning Finished
Check Finished
Out of Service
Needs Maintenance
Maintenance Complete
2. Although the system provides for a maximum of 8 types of room conditions, the 8 codes (1-8) provided are
not fixed for a given condition. This provides the end user with the flexibility to select any code (1-8) to
serve as the Maid Status code for any condition. When Maid Status is displayed, or printed out, the digit(s)
dialed as the code when the Maid Status was last changed are displayed or printed.
3. When dialing from a guest station, a Maid Identification code (Maid ID code) can be provided (up to 2 dig-
its). This is allowed or denied in system programming.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (MAT)
MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (MAT)
General Description
The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) is a personal computer that provides an interface to the PBX
via the system CPU card. The MAT PC must have the MATWorX Studio program properly installed to com-
municate with the PBX. MATWorX Studio is required for system software registration and activation.
MATWorX Studio is a Graphical User Interface (GUI) program that provides an efficient method to manipulate
the PBX database. This program contains extensive help files, Usage Wizards and Tool Tips, with hyperlinks
imbedded in the text. The hyperlinks provide quick access to the appropriate Add-In modules. Add-In modules
provide a user friendly intuitive method to customize the PBX database.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the MATWorX Studio User Guide.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 210
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)
MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)
General Description
This feature provides an interface with a customer supplied Voice Mail System (VMS) which can send Message
Waiting lamp control data to the system.
The Message Center Interface (MCI) can provide the following operations:
1. When terminating the call to the VMS, the system sends call connection status information to the VMS
through the MCI.
2. The VMS sends the Message Waiting Lamp on data to the MCI.
3. The system, upon receiving this control data from the MCI, illuminates the Message Waiting lamp of the
corresponding station.
4. The VMS, upon receiving retrieved message information, will send the Message Waiting lamp control data
requesting the system to extinguish the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding station.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To originate a voice mail message
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the voice mail pilot number and receive ringback tone.
3. Follow the instructions given by the VMS.
To set call forwarding to a VMS
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
•
•
•
Split Call Forwarding - All Calls
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Split Call Forwarding - No Answer
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the voice mail extension number and receive service set tone.
The LCD displays:
[SET xxxx]
VMS:Voice mail extension number
Connection when an extension line number whose call forwarding is set to a VMS is called from another
station
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone. The LCD displays:
[CF ALL xxxx]
VMS:Voice mail extension number
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)
3. Follow the instructions given by the voice mail system.
To retrieve a voice mail message from the voice mail system
1. The Message Waiting lamp is lit or the LCD displays:
[MESSAGE]
2. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
3. Dial the voice mail extension number and receive ringback tone. The LCD displays:
[
xxxx]
VMS:Voice mail extension number
4. Follow the instructions given by the voice mail system.
Service Conditions
1. The Voice Mail System (VMS) is interfaced to the system through the 4LCD/8LC card. (The 4LCD/8LC
provides disconnect supervision in the form of a momentary loop open.)
2. The UCD or Station Hunting feature is usually provided with the VMS station.
3. The Application Processor (AP00) is required to make a data link with a customer supplied VMS.
4. Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal, DTMF telephone, or the Attendant Console, but
not from DP telephones.
5. The MCI is available to a direct call or a forwarded call from a station/trunk/Attendant to the VMS. For de-
tails of the connecting patterns, refer to the Installation Procedure Manual/Feature Programming Manual.
6. Stations can set Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding - All Calls, No Answer, and Busy Line to the
VMS. The system sends out incoming call information to the VMS. A call to a station that has Call For-
warding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS.
7. The MCI can control the LCD display of a Multiline Terminal for “MESSAGE” Indication. The number of
messages is not displayed.
8. When the Message Waiting lamp control is activated with the MCI, the lamp control from the following
equipment will not be provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
From the Property Management System (PMS)
From the station (by dialing the access code)
From the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
From the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
From the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
From the Attendant Console
9. Only one system should be programmed (via system programming) to control Message Waiting lamps
through the CCIS network.
10. The system controls Message Waiting lamps normally when the time interval between messages is a mini-
mum of 350 msec. or more.
11. When the VMS interface line does not answer, all of the messages are sent out from the I/O port of the AP00.
12. If the VMS is not ready for information receiving (Busy Status), the AP00 can temporarily store up to 16
call records in its internal memory. If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is generated, the
system will write over the oldest stored record.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 212
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)
13. The Voice Mail Integration (Inband) feature cannot be combined with voice mail through the MCI in the
system. Either the Voice Mail Integration (Inband) feature or MCI feature must be selected in system pro-
gramming.
14. When terminating a call with the ANI information to the VMS through the MCI, the system can send the
ANI information to the VMS, if required. This is not available through CCIS interface.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE REGISTRATION
MESSAGE REGISTRATION
General Description
This feature provides output from the system to a call accounting system using an RS-232C connector. This
allows the Hotel/Motel clerk to retrieve the information needed to charge for local and toll calls.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. An Application Processor card (AP00) is required for this feature.
2. The Station Message Detail Recording call record information is used to provide Message Registration in-
formation to a call accounting system.
3. The call accounting system must be locally provided and compatible with the system.
4. Refer to Station Message Detail Recording Features and Specifications for more information.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 214
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE REMINDER
MESSAGE REMINDER
General Description
This feature allows a user or Attendant to turn on the message waiting (MW) lamp of a Single Line Telephone,
or the Message Reminder (MSG) LED of a Multiline Terminal (if assigned).
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Message Reminder from a Single Line Telephone
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder set access code.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone.
4. The MSG LED on the dialed Multiline Terminal or MW lamp on the dialed Single Line Telephone lights.
To set Message Reminder from a Multiline Terminal without calling the station to be set
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder set access code.
3. Dial the desired station number. Feature dial tone is received and the LCD displays SET XXXX(where
XXXXis the dialed station number).
4. The MSG LED on the dialed Multiline Terminal or MW lamp on the dialed Single Line Telephone will light
to indicate a message has been set.
To set Message Reminder from a Multiline Terminal (after dialing the station to be set)
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the desired station number. Ringback tone or busy tone is received.
3. Press the Message Reminder (MSG) key, or dial 6, if single digit feature access codes are enabled. Service
set tone is received and the LCD displays SET XXXX(where XXXXis the dialed station number).
4. The MSG LED on the dialed Multiline Terminal or MW lamp will light to indicate a message has been set.
To retrieve a message from a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder search access code.
3. Dial 2. The station which set the message is automatically called.
4. Converse when the call is answered.
OR
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder retrieve access code.
3. The station which set the message is automatically called.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE REMINDER
To clear the message indication without calling the station that set the message, from a Single Line Tele-
phone or a Multiline Terminal
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder search access code.
3. Dial 3. The message indication is cleared.
4. Restore the handset.
5. If more than one message has been set, repeat the above procedure as required.
To Search/ Retrieve/ Cancel a message from a Multiline Terminal with LCD
1. Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder Search access code; the LCD displays: MESSAGE XXXX(where XXXXis the
station number that set the message) and the time the message was sent.
3. Three options are now available:
•
•
•
Dial 1 to see the next message
Dial 2 to call the displayed station
Dial 3 to clear the message in the display
To call the first station that set a message, from a Multiline Terminal with a MSG key
1. Lift the handset, or press the Speaker key, and receive dial tone.
2. Press the MSG key. The first station that set a message is called.
3. Use the handset to speak when answered.
OR
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder retrieve access code.
3. The station which set the message is automatically called.
4. Converse when answered.
To set a message from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Message Reminder feature access code.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone. Message indication is set.
4. Press the RELEASE key to return to an idle condition.
To cancel a message from the Attendant Console
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
2. Dial the Message Reminder cancel access code.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone. Message indication is canceled.
4. Press the RELEASE key to return to an idle condition.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE REMINDER
To cancel a message from the station that set it
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Reminder cancel code.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone. The message is cleared at the dialed station.
4. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. Single Line Telephones must be connected to a 4LCD/8LC card for this feature to operate. Single Line Tele-
phones must be equipped with message waiting lamps for 70 Vdc.
2. Multiline Terminals can be assigned a MSG key for use with this feature. This line button serves as an in-
dicator for received messages, and allows setting of Message Reminder to other stations (after dialing the
station number).
3. A maximum of four messages can be set to one station. If a fifth message is attempted, reorder tone is heard
and the LCD at the setting station shows: RESTRICT(when LCD is provided.)
4. A maximum of 200 messages can be set from stations in one system.
5. Message indications are battery backed up and are not lost due to power failure or initialization of the sys-
tem.
6. In Multiple Console Operation, messages set by one Attendant can not be canceled by another Attendant.
7. Messages can be set to a station in any status condition (idle, busy, in Line Lockout, etc.). Message indica-
tions are not provided when a Single Line Telephone handset is off-hook.
8. When a Multiline Terminal calls a station that is forwarded and then presses the MSG key, the message is
left at the station to which the call was forwarded.
9. When all stations in a hunt group are busy, messages set by a Multiline Terminal using the MSG key are
left at the called station.
10. Voice Mail Systems that provide in-band signaling for this purpose may be able to set Message Remind-
er(s).
11. Operating procedures and service conditions of a message waiting LED on Multiline Terminals without
LCD are the same as those of Single Line Telephones, except that the message waiting LED remains on
when the terminal is off hook.
12. To set Message Reminder service for Multiple Stations, set Message Reminder for the first station, wait for
feature dial tone, and then set the reminder for the next station.
13. The number of messages is displayed while the Multiline Terminal is in an idle state.
14. The number of messages displayed includes the setting of Message Waiting.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE WAITING
MESSAGE WAITING
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant Console, Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, administrative station,
or Property Management System (PMS) terminal to light a lamp (on an uninterrupted or interrupted basis) on a
Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal to indicate a message is waiting.
In addition to the lamp indication control, this feature also provides the Voice Message Waiting service that an
originating station user can set the Message Waiting with a prerecorded message by using the Digital Announce-
ment Trunk (DAT) circuit.
•
Voice Message Waiting - System
An originating station user can choose the prerecorded message to be set by dialing the message number
associated. The messages are recorded by the predetermined station.
•
Voice Message Waiting - Individual
When setting Message Waiting, an originating station user announces the message to be recorded after di-
aling the station number.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
• To set Message Waiting
1. Press the MW key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations.
5. Press the RELEASE (RLS) key.
• To cancel Message Waiting
1. Press the MW key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the RESET key.
4. The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations.
5. Press the RELEASE key.
• To set Message Waiting while receiving ringback tone or busy tone
1. Press the MW key.
2. Press the SET key.
3. Press the RELEASE key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE WAITING
• To cancel Message Waiting while receiving ringback tone or busy tone
1. Press the MW key.
2. Press the RESET key.
3. Press the RELEASE key.
From the Attendant Console
• To set Message Waiting
1. Dial the desired station number.
2. Press the MW key.
3. Press the START key.
4. Press the RELEASE key.
• To cancel Message Waiting
1. Dial the desired station number.
2. Press the MW key.
3. Press the RESET key.
4. Press the RELEASE key.
From an administrative station
• To set Message Waiting
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Message Waiting set access code.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
• To cancel Message Waiting
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial Message Waiting reset access code.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
Note: Property Management System (PMS) procedures will vary, depending on the locally provided PMS.
Voice Message Waiting - System
• To record
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message - System record access code.
3. Dial the message number (0-9) and receive service set tone for 3 seconds.
4. Record the message.
5. Restore the handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE WAITING
• To check
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message Waiting - System replay access code.
3. Dial the message number (0-9) and receive service set tone for 3 seconds.
4. Listen to the message.
5. Restore the handset.
• To set
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Messaging Waiting - System set access code.
3. Dial the message number (0-9) and receive feature dial tone.
4. Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone.
5. Repeat Step 4 for additional stations.
6. Restore the handset.
• To cancel Voice Message Waiting - System to all stations
1. Lif the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message Waiting - System all stations cancel access code.
3. Dial the message number (0-9) and receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
• To cancel Voice Message Waiting - System to an individual station
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message Waiting - System cancel access code.
3. Dial the station number and receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
• To retrieve a message from a Single Line Telephone
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message Waiting - System retrieve access code.
3. Listen to the message.
4. Restore the handset.
• To retrieve a message from a Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Press the MSG key.
3. Listen to the message.
4. Press the Speaker key or restore the handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE WAITING
Voice Message Waiting - Individual
• To set
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message Waiting - Individual set access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive service set tone for 3 seconds.
4. Record the message.
5. Restore the handset.
• To cancel
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message Waiting - Individual cancel access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired station number and receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
• To set while receiving ringback tone or busy tone or performing voice call
(from a Single Line Telephone)
1. Dial "8" (or press the hookswitch and dial "8" for PB telephone and Voice Call); receive service set tone for
3 seconds.
2. Record the message.
3. Restore the handset.
• To set while receiving ringback tone or busy tone or performing voice call
(from a Multiline Terminal)
1. Dial "8" or press the function key of the Multiline Terminal; receive service set tone for 3 seconds.
0:00:03 PLS WAIT
1:34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999
2. Record the message.
0:00:00 CARD#XXX
1:34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999
3. Message Waiting lamp is lit on the called station (X=the number of messages).
MESSAGE__X
1:34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE WAITING
4. Restore the handset.
REC COMPLETE XXX
1:34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999
(XXX=Card No.)
• To set while receiving ringback tone or busy tone or performing voice call
(from the Attendant Console)
1. Dial "8"; receive service set tone for 3 seconds.
2. Press the RELEASE key or CANCEL key.
• To retrieve a message (from a Single Line Telephone)
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Voice Message Waiting - Individual retrieve access code.
3. Listen to the message.
4. Restore the handset.
• To retrieve a message (from a Multiline Terminal)
1. Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Press the MSG key.
3. Listen to the message.
4. Press the Speaker key or restore the handset.
Service Conditions
Message Waiting
1. When Check Out is performed, any remaining messages will be output to the printer and cleared from mem-
ory.
2. The Message Waiting function can be set even when the guest station is busy. The Message Waiting lamp
will not light while the guest station has the handset in use (on Single Line Telephones).
3. Message Waiting status is displayed by the Message Waiting lamp on Single Line Telephones or Multiline
Terminals.
4. Message Waiting can be automatically cleared by talking to the Attendant Console or the Hotel/Motel Front
Desk Instrument (on a system basis). If Message Waiting is not automatically cleared, the reset operation
is required.
5. A 4LCD/8LC card is required to provide Single Line Telephones with the Message Waiting function. Sin-
gle Line Telephones must be equipped with Message Waiting lamps for 70VDC.
6. When multiple Message Waiting indications are initiated from various points (Attendant Consoles, Front
Desk Instrument, other stations, etc.), clearing one message will remove the Message Waiting indication.
7. The flashing rate for the Message Waiting lamp on the Multiline Terminal is selected on a system-wide basis
for 60 IPM or lit steady.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 222
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE WAITING
8. When the user of a station that has a Message Waiting indication lifts the handset, the station can receive
special dial tone by system programming. It reminds the station user that a message is waiting.
Voice Message Waiting - System/Individual
1. A maximum of 10 messages can be recorded for Voice Message Waiting - System. A maximum of 128
messages can be set simultaneously for Voice Message Waiting - Individual. One Voice Recording Mem-
ory port per message is required.
2. The duration of an announcement is limited to 60 seconds in Voice Message Waiting - System/Individual.
3. Voice Message Waiting - System/Individual can be automatically cleared by retrieving a message from a
set station.
4. For the Voice Message Waiting - System, more than one connection can be made to a Digital Announce-
ment Trunk. Secondary connections can be made in the middle of a message. For the Voice Message Wait-
ing - Individual, only one station can be connected to each Digital Announcement Trunk Card at a time.
5. Any operations for Voice Message Waiting - System/Individual are not available from a station with a call
in Consultation Hold.
6. The message is repeated until the station goes on hook.
7. Voice Message Waiting - System/Individual can be provided on a system basis.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS
CCSA Access
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS
General Description
This feature allows the connection of various types of external facilities. In addition to Loop and Ground Start
Trunks, the following can also be interfaced with the system: CCSA Lines Code Calling Equipment, Dictation
Equipment, Foreign Exchange (FX) Lines, Radio Paging Equipment, and Wide Area Telephone Service
(WATS) lines. Refer to separate features, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), and Tie Line Access for more applica-
tions of Miscellaneous Trunk Access.
CCSA Access
General Description
This feature allows connection to or from a CCSA (Common Control Switching Arrangement) network. A
CCSA network is a special, privately-leased network constructed for one customer's exclusive use which replac-
es or augments the public switched network services.
The outgoing connections using CCSA lines are accomplished in the same manner as a normal outgoing call.
Incoming calls are received from the CCSA network as a series of digits from the network instead of a ringing
signal, and the connection is established in the same manner as a Direct Inward Dial (DID) or Tie Line connec-
tion.
For Tie Line applications, the customers can construct a network with their own numbering plan. In a CCSA
application, the numbers are issued by the C.O. following the CCSA network numbering plan.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To place an outgoing CCSA call from station
1. Lift handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial CCSA feature access code and receive second dial tone from CCSA switch.
3. Dial desired telephone number.
4. Converse when called party answers.
To answer an incoming CCSA call
• With Attendant assistance
1. DID lamp flashes and audible indication is received.
2. Attendant presses either the DID or ANSWER key.
3. Attendant extends call to desired station.
• Without Attendant assistance
Lift handset and converse.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 224
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS
Code Calling Equipment Access
Service Conditions
1. An access code needs to be assigned for CCSA Access.
2. 4-Wire Tie Line circuits (ODT board) must be provided for the interface with CCSA network.
3. The maximum number of ODT boards are 32/PIM.
4. Immediate, second dial tone, wink start or delay dial operation is available by system data on a trunk route
basis.
5. When the called station is busy, busy tone is returned to the calling party.
Code Calling Equipment Access
General Description
Code Calling Equipment consists of external paging units and external dialers requiring dial access from the
system.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To access Code Calling Equipment
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Code Calling feature access code.
3. Dial the code number for the Code Calling unit desired.
Service Conditions
1. Code Calling Equipment must be locally provided.
2. Loop Start or Ground Start trunks may be used to interface Code Calling Equipment to the system.
3. An external equipment control relay board (PN-DK00 or built-in DK00 in MP) can be used when external
equipment low power control is required (up to 125 mA). For higher power control, a locally provided ex-
ternal relay can be driven by the PN-DK00 or built-in DK00 in MP.
4. Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment.
Dictation Equipment Access
General Description
This feature permits dial access to customer provided Dictation Equipment, and in some instances allows them
to maintain telephone dial control of normal dictation system features.
Station Application
All stations.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS
Foreign Exchange (FX) Access
Operating Procedure
To access the Dictation Equipment from any station
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Dictation Equipment feature access code.
3. Proceed according to operation procedures of the Dictation Equipment.
Service Conditions
1. One trunk circuit is required for each piece of dictation interface equipment accessed.
2. Dictation Equipment must be able to receive DTMF signals if dial control is desired; however, access is also
available with rotary dial signals.
3. Dictation Equipment must be locally provided.
4. Dictation Equipment can be accessed from stations, Attendant Consoles, Tie Lines, or remotely. Refer to
the Direct Inward System Access Features and Specifications.
5. Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment.
Foreign Exchange (FX) Access
General Description
An FX line is a line which is extended and terminated at a distant C.O.. With this feature, outgoing calls over
the FX line become a local call at the distant C.O..
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Outgoing Call from any station
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the FX line access code and receive dial tone from distant C.O..
3. Dial the desired telephone number.
(Multiline Terminals can have direct trunk appearances of FX lines).
Incoming call to the Attendant Console
1. The FX lamp at the Attendant Console flashes and an audible signal is received.
2. The Attendant presses key assigned to the FX line or the ANSWER key.
3. The Attendant processes the call in a normal manner.
Service Conditions
1. One circuit on the COT board is required for each FX line interface.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 226
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS
Radio Paging Equipment Access
2. Care should be excerised in system data assignment when using this feature in conjunction with Least Cost
Routing (LCR) since FX lines may require that the digit 1 be dialed prior to the desired number, or that the
area code be deleted.
3. The maximum capacity of all trunk, including FX lines, cannot exceed 256 lines.
4. Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment.
5. FX lines can be assigned as Direct In Terminations.
Radio Paging Equipment Access
General Description
This feature provides station users dial access to Radio Paging Equipment, and to selectively tone - or voice/
tone-alert individuals carrying pocket paging devices. The paged party (when on premises) can be connected
to the paging party by going to the nearest station and dialing an answer back code.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To page
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Radio Paging Answer Code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the number of the paged radio and receive ring back tone.
4. The on premises paged party answers. The two parties can converse.
Service Conditions
1. Radio Paging Equipment must be locally provided. Refer to the manufacturer's documentation for the fol-
lowing specifications:
•
•
•
type of tones
capability of receiving individual radio number
maximum number of users that can be assigned individual radio access numbers
2. A maximum of three digits can be assigned as Radio Paging Equipment Access and answer codes.
3. Individual radio numbers can be a maximum of 4 digits.
4. The Attendant Console can originate a radio paging call.
5. The maximum number of radio paging answer zones is 9.
6. The maximum number of trunk routes that can be assigned radio paging is 9.
7. If the paged party does not answer within 300 seconds, the on-premises paging-answer capability will be
cancelled. This timing is programmable up to 900 seconds (15 minutes).
8. Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service Assignment.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) Access
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) Access
General Description
This feature allows any station user direct dial access to outgoing WATS lines.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Normal call handling procedures apply.
Service Conditions
1. One circuit on the COT card is required for each WATS line interface.
2. Least Cost Routing and Code Restriction can be applied to WATS lines.
3. The maximum capacity of all lines including WATS Lines cannot exceed 256 lines.
4. Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION
MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION
General Description
A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function similar to an Attendant position. This Attendant
position has limited access to Attendant related features and functions and can be substituted where an Attendant
is required but an Attendant Console is not necessary. When a DSS/BLF console is associated with this Atten-
dant Multiline Terminal enhanced operation is available.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
Answering and transferring an incoming C.O. line call
With an incoming call in progress (DDD, FX, or WATS line key LED is flashing, C.O. ring is heard):
1. Press the flashing line key or the Answer key.
2. The First available LOOP key LED lights steady green. Incoming indication stops. The LCD shows the
trunk name and number.
3. Press the Transfer key and dial the station number to be transferred to, or press the desired DSS key. The
LCD shows the called station number.
4. Press the RLS key or go on-hook.
To Hold a call
With a call in progress:
1. Press the Hold key. The LOOP key flashes green.
2. Go on-hook or press the RLS key.
To retrieve a held call
1. Go off-hook.
2. Press the flashing LOOP key. The LED key indication goes to steady green.
3. Converse.
To set/cancel Message Waiting
1. Press the MW key on the DSS/BLF console to enter the Message Wait mode.
2. Press the associated DSS key for the desired station. The associated LED lights steady green for set Message
Waiting or extinguishes when Message Waiting is canceled.
3. Press the MW key to return to the normal DSS mode.
To set/cancel Do Not Disturb
1. Press the DND key on the DSS/BLF console to enter the Do Not Disturb mode.
2. Press the applicable DSS key for the desired station. The associated LED lights steady green when Do Not
Disturb is set and extinguishes when Do Not Disturb is canceled.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION
3. Press the DND key to return to the normal DSS mode.
To set/cancel Night Service
1. Press the NT key on the DSS/BLF Console.
OR
Dial the Night Service set/cancel code when off-hook on the primary extension.
Answering an Operator call
1. Press the OPE key. The associated LED lights steady green and the LCD will display either the trunk name
and number or station name and number.
2. Converse.
Service Conditions
1. Transfer of calls is possible with the Transfer key.
2. Answering of calls is possible using the Answer key or by direct line key selection.
3. Normal internal call operation is available using the station's primary extension, a secondary extension, or
a software line appearance.
4. A DSS/BLF Console can be associated with the Attendant Multiline Terminal, and its keys can be assigned
as Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys and used in conjunction with the RLS key.
5. When the DSS/BLF Console is assigned for use with the Multiline Terminal, the unit can be provided with
a Message Wait (MW) key, a Do Not Disturb (DND) key, and a Night Transfer (NT) key. Using the MW
key converts the DSS/BLF Console into a Message Wait Console. Using the DND key converts the DSS/
BLF Console into a Do Not Disturb console. Using the NT key places the associated tenant into night mode.
Only one of these can be accessed at one time.
6. An RLS key can be assigned on the Multiline Terminal's line keys.
7. Use of the RLS key during a call in progress will terminate that call, unless a transfer is in progress, in which
case the transfer occurs. (The RLS key acts the same as going on-hook).
8. The associated LED for MW, DND or N.T. on the DSS/BLF Console will light steady green when in use,
and be off when canceled.
9. The associated LED for each station assigned MW or DND is lit steady green while it is set, but is displayed
only when the Multiline Terminal user activates the Message Wait mode or Do Not Disturb mode.
10. Direct trunk line appearances may be assigned to the Attendant Multiline Terminal. Operation is the same
as on normal Multiline Terminals. Attendant Console style operation is not available with Trunk Direct Ap-
pearances.
11. For operator calls from Tie lines, the outside party must dial a virtual line number associated with an ATT
position.
12. An NT key may be assigned to a Multiline Terminal when no master Attendant Console or no station for
Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing is provided by the tenant.
13. When a station has been in Line Lockout, the associated LED on the DSS Console flashes red at 30 ipm.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 230
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUSIC ON HOLD
MUSIC ON HOLD
General Description
This feature plays music when a line is placed on hold. Music is provided by a circuit board memory chip or a
local music source, such as a CD player or a radio.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Music may be played in three different cases: C.O. lines, Tie Lines, and internal Station-to-Station calls.
The same source can be used for all three.
2. If an external music source is desired, it must be locally provided. Refer to the Installation Procedure Man-
ual for installation instructions.
3. Any of the following can be selected as the Music On Hold source:
•
•
•
•
MP card provides the following two synthesized melodies: Nocturne or Menuett.
Hold tone
External source: tuner, tape deck, CD player, etc. connecting via COT or TNT or MP card.
Internal Recorded Message
4. Attendant operations resulting in Music On Hold being played include the following:
•
When incoming calls to the Attendant are answered and the Attendant presses the HOLD key or dials
an extension number, the held party receives Music On Hold.
•
When the Attendant camps on a call to a busy station, the calling party is connected to Music On Hold
until the called party answers or the Attendant reenters the switched loop.
5. When a station user in a two-party connection places the second party on hold, the second party is connected
to Music On Hold.
6. A maximum of ten Music On Hold input sources can be assigned. Each Music Source must be assigned to
a different tenant.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAILED-DOWN CONNECTION - DATA
NAILED-DOWN CONNECTION - DATA
General Description
This feature provides Data Interface which can transmit the intra-office or inter-office digital data on fixed path
connection.
The Data Interface equips the V.11 (X.21) interface.
A maximum data transmission speed of 64 Kbps is available.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. This connection is assigned using the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or Customer Admin-
istration Terminal (CAT) in the system data base.
2. The fixed connection is set automatically after initialization of the system.
3. If power failure occurs, the Nailed-Down Connection is lost until power is restored and the system has rein-
itialized.
4. For this feature, it is necessary to install the Data Port Controller (DPC) card. And when providing the inter-
office digital data transmission, it is necessary to install the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) card in addition
to the DPC card.
5. Refer to associated data features for more information on Data Communications.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 232
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE
Attendant Night Transfer
NIGHT SERVICE
General Description
This feature provides a variety of methods for handling incoming calls when the system is in night mode. These
include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Night Transfer
Call Rerouting
Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant Console
Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
Night Connection-Fixed
Night Connection-Flexible
Trunk Answer Any Station
Attendant Night Transfer
General Description
When the Attendant Console is in Night Service, any operator directed calls (dial 0 calls) are automatically rout-
ed to a preprogrammed station.
Priority Calls and Off-Hook Alarms which terminate to an Attendant are also routed by this feature.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. The calling party dials 0.
2. That call is automatically forwarded to the preprogrammed station.
3. The calling party receives ringback tone.
4. Ringing signal is sent to the preprogrammed station.
5. The preprogrammed station goes off-hook, and the answered call can be transferred to another station or
outside party.
Service Conditions
1. This feature may be provided together with Night Connection Fixed or Night Connection Flexible to a pre-
determined night station.
2. The predetermined night station for this feature can also be assigned as a night station for Night Connection
Fixed or Flexible.
3. If the night station is set for Call Forwarding, operator calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to
the designated station.
4. The night station can be assigned as a station in a Station Hunting group.
5. One night station per tenant is available in multiple tenant arrangements.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE
Call Rerouting
6. The night station can be assigned as a station in an Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group.
7. This operation is not applicable to Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls. For LDN calls, Night Connection
Fixed/Flexible or Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS) service is applicable.
8. Night stations can utilize the Call Hold, Call Transfer and Conference features, provided these features are
programmed into the night station's Class of Service.
9. Any calls to the Attendant (dial 0) during Night Service are routed to the night station.
10. Individual Attendant Access calls are not transferred to the night station assigned by Attendant Night Trans-
fer.
Call Rerouting
General Description
This feature provides flexible reroute capabilities for a variety of calls when the system is in night mode.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The following is the call rerouting table according to different types of calls.
Call Type
Operator Call (dial 0 call)
LDN Call
Reroutes To
Predetermined station (Refer to Attendant Night Transfer)
TAS or night station
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
DIT when busy
Predetermined station or Announcement Service
TAS or Automatic Camp-On until the station becomes idle
TAS or ringback tone
DIT when no answer
DID when busy or no answer
Tie Line when busy or no answer
Trunk Direct Appearance
Predetermined station or Announcement Service Note
Predetermined station or Announcement Service Note
TAS, night station, or TAS and night station with Trunk Direct Appearance.
Note: In the day mode, the call also reroutes to the same service or Attendant.
2. When an Attendant presses the NT key, any calls existing in call queuing memory or loop memory on the
Attendant Console should be completed first. New incoming calls, after hitting the NT key, will reroute
according to assigned Night Service programming.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 234
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE
Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant Console
Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant Console
General Description
This feature provides activation of DAY/NIGHT Mode Change by pressing a predetermined key from the At-
tendant Console.
Station Application
Attendant Console
Operating Procedure
To change Day to Night mode from SN610 Attendant Console
1. Dial the MODE feature access code or press the MODE key and the associated red LED lights. The LCD
displays DAYfor day mode and the LED of the DAY key lights green.
2. Press the NIGHT key and the associated LED lights red. The LCD display changes from DAYto NIGHT.
3. Press the ANS key and receive service set tone. The LCD displays SET NIGHT. The mode of the console
is now changed from day to night mode.
4. Press the RLS key.
To change Night to Day mode from SN610 Attendant Console
1. Press the MODE key and the associated red LED lights.
2. Dial a predetermined password number which will display on the LCD.
3. Press the DAY key and the associated green LED lights. The LCD display changes from NIGHTto DAY.
4. Press the ANS key and receive service set tone. The LCD displays SET DAY. The mode of the console is
now changed from night to day.
5. Press the RLS key.
To change Day to Night mode from SN716 DESKCON
1. Press Night key. Night lamp will be lit.
To change Night to Day mode from SN716 DESKCON
1. Press Night key when Night lamp is lit. Night lamp will be off.
Service Conditions
1. This feature can be activated only by a master Attendant Console.
Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
General Description
This feature allows selected stations to activate a change from day mode to night mode by dialing a special code.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE
Night Connection - Fixed
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
By dial access code
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the DAY/NIGHT Mode Change feature access code followed by 1 for DAY mode/2 for NIGHT mode/
3 for MODE-A mode/4 for MODE-B mode.
3. Restore the handset.
By function key on a Multiline Terminal
1. Go off-hook or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press the assigned feature access key.
3. Dial 1 for DAY mode/2 for NIGHT mode/3 for MODE-A mode/4 for MODE-B mode.
4. Restore the handset or press the Speaker key.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is assigned in the station's Class of Service.
2. If using a function key on a Multiline Terminal, the associated lamp will be lit when the tenant changes Day
mode to another mode.
Night mode
:Red lamp on
MODE-A mode:Red lamp flashing (60 int)
MODE-B mode:Red lamp flashing (120 int)
3. On a system basis, incoming trunk destination and trunk restriction class can be changed (depending upon
programming) when the tenant or system is placed in Night Service.
4. This feature is only available for the tenant without a master Attendant Console.
Night Connection - Fixed
General Description
This feature allows incoming calls normally terminated to the Attendant to reroute to a predetermined station
when the system is placed in Night Service.
Station Application
All stations, except fully restricted stations.
Operating Procedure
With an incoming call during Night Service:
1. The outside party hears ringback tone.
2. Ringing signal is sent to the night station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 236
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE
Night Connection - Flexible
3. The night station goes off-hook and answers the call. If necessary, the answered call can be transferred to
another station or outside party.
Service Conditions
1. Night Connection station can be assigned the following types of trunks:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Distance Dialing (DDD)
Foreign Exchange (FX)
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS)
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (available only for LDN calls)
TIE (available only for operator calls)
2. Each night station can be assigned multiple trunks.
3. A fully restricted station cannot be assigned as a night station.
4. If the night station to which an incoming call has been terminated is busy, the system can be programmed
to provide one of the following choices on a per-trunk basis:
•
•
•
Automatic Camp-On
Trunk Answer Any Station
Ringback tone.
5. If the night station does not answer after a predetermined time, the system can provide one of the following
options on a per-trunk basis:
•
•
Trunk Answer Any Station
Ringback tone.
6. The night station can be assigned to a Station Hunting Group.
7. The night station can be assigned to an Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group.
8. If the night station has set Call Forwarding, incoming calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to
the destination station.
9. If the night station has set Call Forwarding to the Attendant, this setting will be ignored and incoming calls
will terminate to the night station.
10. Night stations can access Call Hold, Call Transfer, and Conference provided these features are programmed
into its Class of Service.
Night Connection - Flexible
General Description
This feature provides incoming calls normally terminated to the fixed night station to be Call Forwarded to an-
other station.
Station Application
All stations, except fully restricted stations.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS)
Operating Procedure
Before placing the Attendant Console into Night Service, the Attendant sets Call Forwarding-All Calls from the
fixed night station to the desired station.
Note: The Call Forwarding setting should be canceled when the tenant or system is changed back to the day
mode.
Service Conditions
1. The Night Connection- Flexible station may be programmed from either the Attendant Console or the Night
Connected - Fixed station.
2. Refer to the Call Forwarding Features and Specifications for more information.
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS)
General Description
This feature allows any station, other than one with incoming restrictions, to answer incoming calls when the
system is in the night mode. When this feature is activated, incoming exchange network calls will activate a
common alert signal at the customer premises. By dialing a specified code, any station may answer the call and
then extend it to any other station by means of the Call Transfer feature.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To answer a Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS) call:
1. The TAS signal sounds.
2. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
3. Dial the specified TAS feature access code.
OR
Press the specified TAS key (on a Multiline Terminal if provided).
4. Connection to the incoming call is completed.
Service Conditions
1. TAS service can be assigned to the following types of lines:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Distance Dialing (DDD)
Foreign Exchange (FX)
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS)
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (available only for LDN calls)
E&M Tie (available only for operator calls)
2. TAS indication can be provided on a per-tenant basis, and there can only be one per tenant.
3. Stations which may access TAS service are programmed in Class of Service.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NIGHT SERVICE
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS)
4. Stations accessing TAS service must be in the same tenant group.
5. By dialing different access codes, stations can access other tenants' TAS service.
6. A 8LC or PN-DK00 (or built-in DK00 in MP) board is required to interface with the TAS equipment.
7. TAS Call termination to the Answer key on Multiline Terminals can be programmed on a per-system basis.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF-HOOK ALARM
OFF-HOOK ALARM
General Description
This feature allows a station user to call the Attendant, or a predesignated station, by simply staying off-hook
for a preprogrammed period of time. The calling number is automatically displayed at the Attendant Console,
or the predesignated station if equipped with an LCD.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset and stay off-hook.
2. After a predetermined time elapses (30 seconds as set in default), the call will terminate at the Attendant
Console or a predesignated station.
3. The calling station number will be displayed at the Attendant Console when answered.
Service Conditions
1. The predetermined timing interval of 4-32 seconds in 4-second increments is programmable through the
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
2. The station assigned as a terminating station of each Off-hook Alarm group can be a member of a hunting
group.
3. This feature is assigned on a station basis for origination of Off-hook Alarm and on a tenant basis for the
destination assignment.
4. The Attendant Console can answer by pressing the EMG key, which must be assigned by the MAT or CAT.
Answering by the Answer key will not give priority to the Off-hook Alarm.
5. The predesignated station, if allowed, can set Call Forward-All Calls and Call Forward-Busy. The Off-hook
Alarm will follow the Call Forward setting.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 240
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS
OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS
General Description
This feature allows the connection of a single line telephone in an off-premises location. The connection to the
Off-Premises Extension can be through direct copper or through the local telephone company.
Station Application
Single Line Stations.
Operating Procedure
Normal operating procedures apply.
Service Conditions
1. A PN-AUCA is required for connection of Off-Premises Extensions. The PN-AUCA is a 2-circuit card.
2. The maximum loop resistance for an Off-Premises Extension is 2500 ohms, inclusive of the resistance of
the telephone.
3. Message Waiting is not available for Off-Premises Extensions.
4. Disconnect supervision is not available on Off-Premises Extensions.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE (OAI)
OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE (OAI)
General Description
Provides a computer-to-PBX interface, allowing a computer to control the function of the system. The system
can be customized to accommodate most customer applications. Application software can be provided by
NECAM, an outside software house, or a customer.
Operating Procedure
For operating procesures, see the individual OAI features.
Note: For more detailed information, consult the manuals for each individual OAI feature.
Service Conditions
1. This feature requires the following hardware/software:
•
•
•
•
SPN-CC04 ETHER INT (AP)
APM Platform Software Rel FD 600C
OAI Application FD 600C (Specific Application Software)
OAI Computer
2. If the host computer goes off line for any reason, all OAI features will be unavailable.
3. Up to 24 digits of the calling subscriber’s number for Automatic Identification (ANI) can be sent out to the
OAI Computer by system programming.
4. This feature supports TAPI 2.1.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 242
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAD LOCK
PAD LOCK
General Description
This feature temporarily restricts telephones from making unauthorized calls by dialing special access code
when station users are away from their seats.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Pad Lock from a station
1. Lift the headset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Pad Lock access code 1 (access code for Authorization Code).
3. Dial Authorization Code and receive dial tone.
4. Dial the Pad Lock access code 2 (access code for Maid Status).
5. Dial 1 and receive service set tone.
6. Restore the handset.
To cancel Pad Lock from a station
1. Lift the headset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Pad Lock access code 1 (access code for Authorization Code).
3. Dial Authorization Code and receive dial tone.
4. Dial the Pad Lock access code 2 (access code for Maid Status).
5. Dial 2 and receive service set tone.
6. Restore headset.
Service Conditions
1. This feature restricts telephones from making C.O. outgoing calls and/or terminating calls from C.O. trunks,
stations, and Attendant. Stations in Pad Lock status are able to place Station-to-Station calls and outgoing
calls using Attendant assisted calling.
2. If the station under Pad Lock status dials a C.O. line access code, the station is rerouted to one of the fol-
lowing:
a. Reorder Tone
b. Attendant
3. Calls to stations in Pad Lock status will receive reorder tone or, on a tenant basis, can be assigned to transfer
to the Attendant.
4. The Pad Lock access code 1 and 2 can be one to three digits.
5. About Authorization Code Limitations, refer to Authorization Code Features and Specifications.
6. Authorization Codes are assigned in system data from the MAT, or CAT.
7. Pad Lock status will continue unless it is cancelled.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAD LOCK
8. An Authorization Code can be assigned per station number so that one code is used only on the specific
station. Application Processor (AP01) is required.
9. This feature cannot be used in the hotel system using Maid Status feature.
10. Application Processor (AP00) is required to supply the Pad Lock feature.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE
PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE
General Description
This feature provides a periodic tone to the station user who has made an outgoing call. This feature can be
allowed or denied for each station.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is allowed or denied in the stations' Class of Service assignment using the Maintenance Admin-
istration Terminal (MAT) or the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT). Additionally, this feature can
be allowed or denied on a system basis for C.O. lines and Tie Lines.
2. The Periodic Time Indication Tone is 80 ms. in duration. The interval between tones is programmable from
32 seconds to 724 seconds (180 seconds as set in default).
3. Outgoing calls initiated by the Attendant will not have this feature.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POOLED LINE ACCESS
POOLED LINE ACCESS
General Description
A line key can be assigned to access Pooled Lines. Each line key will allow incoming, outgoing, or both-way
access to a trunk route.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To originate a call on Pooled Lines
1. Go off-hook and select the Pooled Line key. The Virtual Line key is seized if it is available. If the Virtual
Line key is not available, the Primary Extension is seized. If neither line is available, Pooled Line Access
is impossible.
2. Receive dial tone from a trunk in that Pooled Line's assigned trunk route.
3. Dial desired number.
To answer a call on Pooled Lines
1. Go off-hook and select the ringing line key.
2. Converse.
Service Conditions
1. When all trunks in the Pooled Line group are busy, no visual indication is provided on the associated line
key LED. However, a different line key can be assigned for this purpose when required.
2. A user on a Pooled Line can access Call Park, Call Transfer, Conference, and Station Speed Dialing. Station
Message Detail Recording will provide a record of calls made on a Pooled Line.
3. When all trunks in the Pooled Line are busy and access is attempted, busy tone is received.
4. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature will not be available.
5. When originating a call on Pooled Lines, the Virtual Line key that is seized is the first idle extension found
by the key scanning program, starting at button number 1 (one) and counting up to the last line button as-
signed. Care should be taken in determining the line button assignments on Multiline Terminals with
Pooled Lines to prevent inadvertent (or undesired) selection of someone else's extension(s).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 246
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER FAILURE TRANSFER
POWER FAILURE TRANSFER
General Description
This feature provides for specified trunks to be automatically connected to designated Single Line Telephones
in the event of AC power loss. It is normally utilized when the system is not equipped with reserve power.
Station Application
Single Line Telephones.
Operating Procedure
Operation is automatic upon loss of input power to the system.
Service Conditions
1. If the Central Office provides ground-start trunks, Single Line Telephones must be equipped with ground
buttons to complete calls over the exchange network.
2. Power Failure Transfer (PFT) lines should not be wired to common bells, since these require outside power
sources and therefore will not operate.
3. Both the PN-AUC card and the PZ-8PFT card can be used as the Power Failure Transfer (PFT) circuit.
4. When using the PN-AUC card, the Power Failure Single Line Telephones must be interfaced with a PN-
AUC card. This card provides 2 Power Failure Transfer circuits (when the AUC card is used in the Long
Line Circuit (LLC) Mode). The connection between the AUC card and the 4COT/8COT card is made via
a flat cable. No. 0 and No.1 circuit of the 4COT/8COT can be used for the Power Failure Transfer connec-
tion.
5. When using the PZ-8PFT card, each Port Interface Module (PIM) can contain one PZ-8PFT card which sup-
plies 8 Power Failure Transfer circuits. This card is mounted on the front bracket of the PIM.
6. A maximum of 32 Power Failure Transfer connections are available per PIM.
7. When the Power Failure Transfer feature is activated, telephone service is limited to incoming calls and/or
outgoing calls through the serving C.O.. The Power Failure Single Line Telephone must be compatible with
the dialing scheme on the trunks, i.e. rotary dial or Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) dialing.
8. When the system is in power failure operation, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), CCSA, Tie Line and DISA
calls cannot be received.
9. Multiline Terminals cannot be used as power failure stations.
10. All calls in progress and/or established calls are lost when a power failure occurs. When commercial power
is restored, the system automatically reinitializes, dropping all calls in progress. Back-up battery is provid-
ed to the system data memory to retain the data for the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling - Station
Speed Calling - System
Message Waiting
Return Schedule Message Display
Do Not Disturb
11. When a COT card is used as a ground-start trunk, the Power Failure Single Line Telephone must be provid-
ed with a ground sending button for trunk access.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIORITY CALL
PRIORITY CALL
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant to answer a call before other calls, at the Attendant's discretion.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To initiate a Priority Call from any station
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Priority Call number.
To answer a Priority Call at the Attendant Console
1. The Attendant presses the designated Priority Call key.
Service Conditions
1. A Priority Call can be answered by pressing the Answer key, provided no other calls are waiting. If other
calls are waiting, the Priority Call must be answered by pressing the designated Priority Call key in order to
be answered first.
2. The designated Priority Call key must be assigned using the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
or the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
3. Two Priority Call numbers can be assigned. Separate Priority Call keys must be assigned at the Attendant
Console.
4. The ability to place a Priority Call can be allowed or denied in Class of Service.
5. A Priority Call to an Attendant Console when the system is in night mode receives reorder tone.
6. When a station is assigned as the destination of a Priority Call and the station has set Call Forwarding, the
Priority Call will follow the Call Forwarding setting.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 248
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIVACY
Direct Privacy Release
PRIVACY
General Description
This feature restricts Multiline Terminal users from pressing a busy line button and entering a conversation un-
less permitted by the Multiline Terminal user currently on that line button or if the line button is assigned for
Direct Privacy Release.
Direct Privacy Release
General Description
This feature allows a station user with a secondary appearance of another extension in the system to access that
extension when it is being used by someone else. This feature allows for a simplified method for establishing a
conference. In addition, this feature can be used to emulate PC dialing, where a single line extension connected
to a PC can appear on a Multiline Terminal and be accessed by the Multiline Terminal user after the PC is com-
pleted dialing.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
Accessing an extension already in use (lit steady red) by someone else
1. Press the line button associated with the extension to be accessed. The associated line button changes to
green, and the display shows a conference in progress (left side of display: CONF).
2. Inform parties of your presence and converse.
PC Dialing
(With desired communication program loaded and ready within the PC)
1. Initiate the dialing sequence in the communication program. Modem dials out on associated single line ex-
tension.
2. After modem has completed dialing, press the line button associated with the secondary appearance of the
single line extension on the Multiline Terminal.
3. On the PC, execute the command sequence to tell the modem to go on-hook.
4. Converse with called party when they answer.
Service Conditions
1. This feature can be allowed/denied to a Multiline Terminal via Class of Service assignment.
2. This feature is allowed only when the extension to be accessed is in conversation with another extension or
trunk. This feature is denied when the extension to be accessed is listening to a system tone (busy tone, ser-
vice set tone, internal ringback tone, etc.).
3. Access is denied to an extension that has a camp-on set to it or has been overridden via Executive Override
or Attendant Override.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIVACY
Manual Privacy Release
4. The ability to access a busy extension that is making an outside (trunk) call prior to being answered is de-
pendent on proper setting of the maximum digit dialed assignment (Command 85).
5. This feature is denied on an extension that has been placed on Call Hold by another extension or has placed
another party on Call Hold.
Manual Privacy Release
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to enter a conversation on a busy line button if the Multiline Ter-
minal user already in the conversation allows them by releasing Privacy.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To activate Privacy Release with a call in progress:
1. Press the Conf key. The Conf LED flashes.
2. Another station with the same line appearance presses that line button.
3. Privacy on that line is released and a three-party Conference is in progress.
4. Repeat above procedure to establish a four-party Conference, if desired.
Service Conditions
1. When a line is busy and Manual Privacy Release has not been activated on that line, any attempt to access
that line will result in busy tone.
2. Manual Privacy Release is available for Multiline Terminals connected to any extension line key.
3. When a Multiline Terminal user presses the Conf key, Privacy on the active line is released. If the Conf key
is pressed again or another party enters the connection, Privacy is reestablished.
4. After a third party enters the conversation, the Conf key can be pressed again. Privacy is released and a
fourth party is allowed to join the conversation by the same operating procedure.
5. Manual Privacy Release is activated only on a connection during which the Conf key is pressed. Once the
station releases the connection, Manual Privacy Release is canceled and Privacy is restored.
6. The primary extension of the station entering the conversation is accessed when that station enters the con-
versation. For this reason, the primary extension must be idle at the entering station for this feature to work.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 250
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIVATE LINES
PRIVATE LINES
General Description
Only a C.O. trunk assigned to that specific station is seized when a station user originates an outgoing C.O. call
or when an incoming C.O. call is terminated at the station designated by Direct-In-Termination. In this manner,
stations and C.O. trunks are to be associated on a 1-to-1 basis.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals and Single line Telephones.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Incoming and outgoing restriction assignments can be used to assure privacy.
2. The following features are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conference
Delayed Ringing
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Call Transfer
Call Park
Call Hold
Save and Repeat
Last Number Redial
Broker's Call
Station Speed Dialing using feature keys
3. When an outgoing call is placed, System Speed Dialing cannot be used.
4. The LED associated with the line key will be lit red when the trunk is busy, and green when being used by
the station that selected that trunk.
5. For further information, refer to the Flexible Line Key Assignment, Flexible Ringing Assignment, and
Trunk - Direct Appearance features.
6. This feature is valid for outgoing calls from a Single line Telephone or Multiline Terminal.
7. For an outgoing call, multiple trunks can be designated per station so that one specific trunk can be selected
out of them for seizure.
8. The following are valid methods for making an outgoing call from a Private Line:
•
•
•
•
•
Dialing the C.O. trunk access code
Station/System Speed Dialing
Least Cost Routing
Trunk Direct Appearance on a Multiline Terminal
Last Number Redial
9. Private Lines are not available when using Trunk Queuing-Outgoing and Timed Queue.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRIVATE LINES
10. If a station uses a direct trunk line appearance on a Multiline Terminal for an OG calling, the call is origi-
nated from the C.O. trunk corresponding to the key pressed.
11. Only C.O. (loop-start and ground-start) trunks and Tie Line trunks can be assigned as private lines.
12. If the designated trunk is busy, the system is able to hunt to the next trunk (following increasing trunk num-
ber order). When the route number of the trunk differs from the route number of the original designated
trunk, hunting stops and the caller receives busy tone.
13. If a station uses a secondary extension on a Multiline Terminal for an OG calling, the designated trunk for
the primary extension of that station is seized.
14. A designated trunk can not be seized unless the route of the trunk access code is the same as the route of
that trunk.
15. In the case of an outgoing call from an Attendant Console or a tandem call, a trunk is seized normally, irre-
spective of this feature.
16. An Account Code may be entered using a function key programmed for Account Code entry or Account
Code can be dialed on second dial tone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 252
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE
PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE
General Description
2
The NEAX2000 IVS provides a data interface to a locally provided Property Management System (PMS). This
2
enables communication between the NEAX2000 IVS and the PMS in order to provide computer control of Ho-
tel/Motel features.
Major functions and their interactions are indicated below:
2
Automatic Wake-up
Message Waiting
Automatic MW Lamp-off
Check In/Check Out
Direct Data Entry
Maid Status
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
NEAX2000 IVS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
PMS
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Do Not Disturb
Room Cut-off
Room Status
Room Change/Room Swap
SMDR
Guest Name Display
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
Operating procedures will vary with the locally provided PMS.
Service Conditions
1. One Interface Port is provided for PMS.
2
2. The NEAX2000 IVS sends information relating to the following features to the PMS upon request from
the PMS:
•
•
Do Not Disturb
Room Cut-off
3. An Application Processor card (AP00) is required for this feature.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Automatic Idle Return
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
General Description
There are four Multiline Terminals available which can be used with the system.
•
•
•
Series E
Series III
Electra Professional
The following features apply to these Multiline Terminals.
Automatic Idle Return
General Description
This feature returns a station to the idle state after 3 seconds of reorder tone is received due to the distant end
disconnecting.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Automatic Idle Return only applies when the call was made using the Speaker key.
2. The call can be either an internal or external call. If it is an external call, a remote disconnect signal from
the C.O. must be supplied.
3. Automatic Idle Return can be allowed or denied on a system basis.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 254
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Called Station Status Display
Called Station Status Display
General Description
This feature provides a display on the status of a called station on the LCD of the calling Multiline Terminal.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the desired station.
3. The status of the called station appears on the LCD.
Service Conditions
1. If the called station is idle, the called stations number will flash on the LCD until the call is answered. When
the call is answered, the number and the name of the called party will be displayed in the LCD. The called
party's name can be assigned in system programming.
2. If the called station is busy, the LCD will display BUSYand the called station's number.
3. If the called station is in Do Not Disturb, the LCD will display DNDand the called station's number.
4. If a restricted station is called, the LCD will display RESTRICTand the called station's number.
5. If the called station has set Call Forwarding -All Calls/-Busy Line/-No Answer, the LCD will display CF
ALL, CF BUSY, or CF NANS respectively, the called station's number and the target station's number.
6. If the called station is in a Call Pickup group and the call is picked up by another station, the LCD will dis-
play PICK, the called station's number and the number of the station that picked up the call.
7. Refer to the Alphanumeric Display and Elapsed Call Timer features for additional information.
Calling Name and Number Display
General Description
This feature provides a display on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal receiving a call, indicating the station num-
ber or trunk number of the incoming call.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Dynamic Dial Pad
Service Conditions
1. When a call terminates to a line other than the station's Prime Line, the Calling Name and Number Display
will be indicated only after the ringing line key is pressed or the call is answered. For trunk calls, the LCD
displays the trunk route name and trunk number. For internal incoming calls on the Prime Line, the LCD
displays the extension number and caller's name. For Direct Inward Termination (DIT), the LCD displays
DIT, the trunk route name and trunk number.
2. When an incoming call terminates to the Prime Line, the station number and name will be displayed when
the call begins ringing.
3. Refer to the Alphanumeric Display and Elapsed Call Timer features for additional information.
Dynamic Dial Pad
General Description
This feature allows to make an outgoing call at first hand by pressing a ten key of Multiline Terminal, without
pressing a Speaker key or going off-hook.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
Dial the desired station number by pressing a ten key, without pressing a Speaker key or going off-hook.
Service Conditions
1. An extension must be set as a Prime Line.
2. This feature is not available when the prime line is busy.
Handsfree Unit
General Description
The built-in Handsfree Unit enables full Handsfree operation for both internal and external calls (No optional
Handsfree Unit is required).
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. Press the Feature key followed by 1 to turn on the microphone: MIC LED is lit.
2. Press the Speaker key and the associated LED lights.
3. Dial the desired number.
4. When the called party answers, converse Handsfree.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 256
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
I-Hold/I-Use Indication
Service Conditions
1. The MIC LED must be lit to transmit during Handsfree operation. When the microphone is off, the outside
party cannot hear the Multiline Terminal user's conversation.
2. Clipping of voice transmission or reception may occur if the microphone is covered or the ambient noise
level in the area is too loud.
I-Hold/I-Use Indication
General Description
Multiline Terminals provide indication of which line keys have been placed on Hold, or are in use by that Mul-
tiline Terminal. The LED associated with the line key will give the appropriate indication.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Multiline Terminals provide a green LED lit steady at the line key currently being used by that Multiline
Terminal.
2. Multiline Terminals provide a green flashing LED at the line key placed on Hold by that Multiline Terminal.
3. The LED flash rate for calls placed on I-Hold (by that terminal) is .125 seconds on, .125 seconds off, .125
seconds on, .625 seconds off.
Microphone Control
General Description
All Multiline Terminals are equipped with a Microphone Control button with an associated LED.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
When the MIC LED is off, press the Feature key followed by 1 to activate the microphone. The associated LED
will light.
Service Conditions
1. When the MIC LED is lit, Intercom voice and extension voice calls to a Multiline Terminal can be answered
using the microphone.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Multiple Line Operation
2. When the MIC LED is off, Intercom voice signals will still be received, but the user must activate the mi-
crophone in order to respond using Handsfree Answerback.
Multiple Line Operation
General Description
This feature allows for the appearance of multiple lines on the Flexible Line Keys and feature keys of all Mul-
tiline Terminals.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The following lines can be assigned to appear on the line keys of Multiline Terminals:
•
Primary Extension - This line is associated with the extension number assigned to the circuit on the DLC
card.
•
Secondary Extension - This line is a secondary appearance of a primary extension appearing on another
Multiline Terminal, a Single Line Telephone extension, or a Software Line Appearance.
•
•
•
•
Trunk - Direct Appearances - Refer to the Miscellaneous Trunk Access feature for available trunks.
Intercom - Three types are available; refer to the Intercom feature for detailed information.
Hotlines - Refer to the Hotline feature for detailed information.
Pooled Lines - Refer to the Pooled Lines Access feature for detailed information.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Mute Key
Mute Key
General Description
This feature allows the distant extension user, of a station user that presses a mute key during conversation, not
to hear the station user’s voice though the station user can hear the distant extension user’s voice. By pressing
the mute key again, the mute status returns to original conversation.
Station Application
term
Multiline Terminals (D
Series E).
Operating Procedure
To activate muting
1. While a station is in conversation, the station presses a mute key.
The other side party cannot hear the voice of the station.
2. The station re-presses the mute key.
The station returns to the original call.
•
•
Service Conditions
1. While a station is muting, the associated lamp on the mute key lights.
2. Mute status is canceled when the mute key is pressed again, or the station user hangs up.
3. Mutes handset, headset, and internal microphone.
4. Does note mute external speakerphone or APR devices.
Off-Hook Voice Announcement
General Description
This feature provides a secondary voice path to the Multiline Terminal with an APR or APA unit. This allows
the station to receive a voice call through the speaker while on a handset call on the Primary Extension, a sec-
ondary extension, or a Direct Trunk Line Appearance.
The Multiline Terminal with this feature can program two modes:
•
•
Voice mode: allows an incoming call to terminate with Voice Announcement
Tone mode: allows an incoming call to terminate with ringing
Station Application
Multiline Terminals with an LCD, with APR or APA unit.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Prime Line Pickup
Operating Procedure
With a call in progress using handset
1. The terminal receives an incoming extension call directed to the Primary Extension, and hears voice-page
alert tone.
2. Respond hands-free (when MIC LED is lit).
3. Press the Answer key to respond with the handset. The original call is automatically put on Non-exclusive
Hold.
To set Voice or Tone mode
1. Press the Speaker key.
2. Dial Voice/Tone Programming access code and receive feature dial tone. The LCD will show the current
mode of the Multiline Terminal.
3. Dial any single digit (0-9). Voice mode is switched to Tone mode, or vice versa, and Service Set Tone is
heard.
4. Press the Speaker key.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is assigned in Class of Service on a per-station basis.
2. This feature is only available for the incoming call to the Primary Extension of a Multiline Terminal with
an APR or APA unit.
3. The Multiline Terminal with APR or APA unit requires two time slots: one for primary voice, one for sec-
ondary voice. Therefore, the maximum number of Multiline Terminals with APR or APA units is limited
by the total number of time slots in the PIM or the system.
4. The voice announcement to a Multiline Terminal in DND is restricted.
5. The voice call on Automatic Intercom/Boss-Secretary Transfer is not affected by the mode programming
(Voice/Tone mode) of the called station.
Prime Line Pickup
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to go off hook and originate a call from the line assigned as the
Prime Line without pressing the associated line key.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key.
2. Dial tone from the Prime Line is received.
3. Proceed with normal call processing.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 260
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Recall Key
Service Conditions
1. One Prime Line per station is allowed. Prime Line is assigned on a per-station basis by the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
2. Only extensions or Direct Trunk Appearances can be assigned as Prime Lines.
3. The default setting for Prime Line is the station's primary extension.
Recall Key
General Description
Each Multiline Terminal is equipped with a Recall Key that is used to generate a hookflash to access features
provided by the outside exchange, or to abandon a call while retaining the line for origination of another call.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
With an outside or Tie Line call in progress using extension appearance
1. Press the Recall key.
2. Receive internal dial tone and trunk is released.
With an outside or Tie Line call in progress using direct appearance
1. Press the Recall key.
2. Key operation is not affected. The call is still in progress.
With a CENTREX call in progress, using an extension or a Trunk Direct Appearance
1. Press the Recall key.
2. Receive CENTREX feature dial tone.
With an internal call
1. Press the Recall key.
2. Receive internal dial tone.
With a Conference in progress
1. Press the Recall key. The station is removed from the Conference.
2. Receive internal dial tone.
Service Conditions
1. The default duration of the timed disconnect signal or hookflash signal is 600 msec., and is programmable
on a per-system basis.
2. The Recall key functions differently, depending on the type of line key appearance and type of outgoing
trunk.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Relay Control Function Key
3. On trunk routes programmed as CENTREX, regardless of whether they are accessed using an extension or
Trunk Direct Appearance, a timed disconnect corresponding to a hookflash is sent to the distant exchange.
The duration of the hookflash is programmable on a system basis.
4. On Trunk Direct Appearances, a timed disconnect (of the same duration as that for CENTREX) is sent to
the C.O. The same trunk is reserved and new C.O. dial tone is received.
5. If a call was placed through Least Cost Routing, the Recall key releases the C.O. call and new extension dial
tone is received.
6. The Recall key does not function on Intercom calls.
Relay Control Function Key
General Description
This feature provides a Multiline Terminal with the ability to activate/deactivate relays (on a PN-DK00 or built-
in DK00 in MP) to control external devices.
Operating Procedure
To turn the relay on
•
Press the line key programmed to perform the relay function.
The associated line-key LED lights.
The relay will close and remain closed.
To turn the relay off
Press the line key programmed to perform the relay function.
•
The associated line-key LED will go off.
The contact will open and remain open.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 128 contacts per system can be controlled.
2. One PN-DK00 or (built-in DK00 in MP) is required for every four external items to be controlled.
3. The relay control key functions regardless of the Multiline Terminal condition (busy or idle).
4. The contact returns to the previous status, after a momentary open for a maximum of ten seconds, when the
system is reset.
5. The same relay control function key should not be assigned to more than one Multiline Terminals.
6. The relay control function key can also be assigned to Attendant Console.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 262
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Ring Frequency Control
Ring Frequency Control
General Description
The ring frequency of the Multiline Terminal can be controlled on a station basis in system programming (four
frequencies are available) or by use of a function key on the Multiline Terminal.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To change Ring Frequency:
1. Press the Feature key followed by 3: receive the new selected tone from the built in speaker.
2. Press the Feature key to return to idle.
3. Repeat this procedure until the desired tone is selected.
Service Conditions
The ring frequency for both internal and external calls can be controlled by system programming. For internal
calls, the frequency can be assigned on a per-station basis by Class of Service assignment. For external incoming
calls, the frequency can be assigned on a trunk route basis.
Ringing Line Pickup
General Description
This feature provides the ability to answer any call ringing into a Multiline Terminal by just lifting the handset.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
With an incoming call (or recall) in progress:
1. Lift handset and the call is answered.
2. Converse.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is assigned in station Class of Service.
2. The following priority applies for answering of multiple incoming calls:
a. Voice Call.
b. Incoming call on primary extension; recalls on primary extension.
c. Incoming call on trunk line key; recalls on trunk line key.
d. Incoming call on secondary extension; recalls on secondary extension.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Soft Keys
3. Ringing Line Pickup has priority over Prime Line Pickup in any case.
4. The Prime Line Pickup feature takes priority over Ringing Line Pickup when the Speaker key is used to
answer the call. If necessary, the Prime Line Pickup feature can be disabled on a per station basis.
Soft Keys
General Description
According to the status of the Multiline Terminal, function keys (Soft Keys) are displayed in the third line on
the LCD. If the status of Multiline Terminal changes, the Soft Keys will change automatically. Also if the Help
key is pressed, explanation of indicated Soft Keys are shown on the LCD.
Station Application
term
Multiline Terminals with Soft Keys (D
Series E).
Operating Procedure
To use Soft Keys
1. 4 Soft Keys are indicated in the LCD according to the status of the Multiline Terminal.
2. Press the Scroll Key to scroll the display to show the desired key if there are more than 4 Soft Keys.
3. Press a desired key under the indicated 4 Soft Keys on the LCD.
4. The service feature of the pressed Soft Key is operated.
To use the Help key
1. Press the Help key and Soft Key.
2. Explanation of the pressed Soft Key is indicated on the LCD.
3. Press the Exit key and the explanation is deleted.
(If the Exit key is not pressed for 16 to 20 seconds, the explanation is deleted automatically.)
Service Conditions
1. The indication of 4 Soft Keys are shown in the third line and each key is indicated by maximum 6 letters.
2. The combination of Soft Keys are maximum 4 patterns per system. The pattern can be selected for each sta-
tion by the system data programming (CM12).
3. The function of Soft Keys per pattern can be set by system data programming (CM9A).
Maximum 12 statuses can be set as the status of a Multiline Terminal, and maximum 16 Soft Keys can be
set in each status.
4. If more than 4 Soft Keys are set in one status, one Scroll Key should be assigned in every 4 Soft Keys.
5. Pattern No. 3 is fixed. If Pattern No. 3 is changed, the only way to reset to default is to clear all data in the
PBX and load the Resident System Program.
6. Help key is only available in Pattern No. 3, for English or French.
7. A maximum of eight station simultaneously can use the Help key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 264
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Soft Keys
8. The following list provides status and an example of the Soft Key function:
STATUS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Idle state
During dialing (holding no call)
During dialing (holding a station/trunk)
During calling (holding no call)
During calling (holding a station/trunk)
Being called
When called party is busy (holding no call)
When called party is busy (holding a station/trunk)
When called party sets Do Not Disturb
Trunk busy
During speaking (holding no call)
During speaking (holding a station/trunk)
FUNCTION
•
•
Scroll Key
Function Keys (The function assigned by CM90-F0XXX, F1XXX and F50XX can be set to the Soft
Keys by CM9A.)
For details, refer to the Command Manual.
<Example>
MIC ON/OFF
Save and Repeat
Call Pickup Direct
Call Forwarding All
Call Forwarding Busy-N/A
Outgoing Queuing
Do Not Disturb Set
Call Hold
Voice Call
Message Waiting Set
Transfer to Voice Messaging System
Ringer Tone Changing
Call Back Set
Scroll Key
Voice Messaging System Live Record
(For details, refer to NEAX Mail AD-8 User’s Guide.)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL
Volume Control
Volume Control
General Description
Multiline Terminals are equipped with common Volume Control keys for:
•
•
•
•
•
Built-in Speaker / Handset Receiver Volume
Ring Volume
C.O. Transmission Level
LCD contrast
Ring Tone Frequency
The Volume Control keys are located on the lower front side of Multiline Terminals (UP ↑ and DOWN ↓).
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
Built-in Speaker/Handset Receiver Volume
•
While in an off-hook state, press the ↑ (UP) key to increase the volume, or the ↓ (DOWN) key to decrease
the volume.
Ring Volume
1. Press the Feature key followed by 0: receive a test ring tone from the built in speaker.
2. Press the ↑ (UP) key to increase the volume, or the ↓ (DOWN) key to decrease the volume.
3. Press the Feature key, or lift the handset and restore the handset, to return to idle.
OR
When in a ringing state, press the ↑ (UP) key to increase the volume, or the ↓ (DOWN) key to decrease the
volume.
C.O. Transmission Level
•
While connected to a trunk, press the Feature key followed by 2 or 4:
Feature key + 2 : +5 dB (receiving) /+3dB (sending)
Feature key + 4 : +5 dB (receiving) /No gain (sending)
LCD contrast
While in an on-hook state, press the ↑ (UP) key to decrease the contrast, or the ↓ (DOWN) key to increase
the contrast.
•
Service Conditions
1. The Speaker/Handset volume control adjusts the volume of voice calls over the speaker/handset receiver,
and any tone sent by the system when using the speaker or handset.
2. The ring Volume Control adjusts the volume of all ring tones to the Multiline Terminal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 266
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q-SIG CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION
Q-SIG CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL - ETSI VERSION
General Description
2
This feature provides a tie-line connection between NEAX2000 IVS and the other Q-SIG PBX using the ISDN
protocol in conformity with ETS 300 172 standardized by ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards In-
stitute).
2
NEAX2000 IVS
ISDN
PBX
PBX
Q-SIG
Q-SIG
Another
Office
CCIS
Another
Office
Note 1: Layer 2 interface should be inconformity with Q.921.
Note 2: Connection to other vender’s PBXs requires prior System Interworking Tests.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Layer 2 and less should be activated normally.
2. Redundancy structure: One D-channel can control maximum 30 B-channels.
Interaction
The following services can be provided in conjunction with this feature:
1. Common station/voice service
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Transfer - All Calls
Hot Line
Calling Number Display
2. Network features
•
•
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
Tie Lines
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE HOLD
REMOTE HOLD
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to hold it on the line button of transferred terminal, by pressing
the Hold key.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. Multiline Terminal-A is talking with station/trunk party.
2. Press the Transfer key and dial the station number of Multiline Terminal-B.
a. Station/trunk party hears music on hold.
b. Multiline Terminal-B is rung or notified call transfer by Voice Call.
c. The line button of Multiline Terminal-B is flashing to indicate incoming transferred call.
3. Multiline Terminal-A presses the Hold key.
a. The ringing of Multiline Terminal-B is stopped
b. The line button of Multiline Terminal-B is flashing to indicate call in hold.
To answer
Press the line button on Multiline Terminal-B or other terminals that have line button of Multiline Terminal-
B.
OR
From other stations, dial access code for Direct Call Pick-up and the station number of Multiline Terminal-
B.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is provided according to Class of Service.
2. If the called terminal is single line telephone, this feature is not activated.
3. After setting Remote Hold, if the call is not answered for pre-assigned time, the original Multiline Terminal
is recalled, even if the called Multiline Terminal is set Call Forwarding - No Answer.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 268
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE PIM
REMOTE PIM
General Description
When the system has two or more PIMs, the PIMs can be installed separately by T1 digital interface. A maxi-
mum of 3 PIMs can be installed apart at the remote site.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
2
The same operating procedure as the regular NEAX2000 IVS apply for each service feature.
Service Conditions
2
1. The Main Site must be the NEAX2000 IVS . The Small Platform System cannot be the Main Site.
2. Only one PIM is available at each Remote Site.
3. The Remote PIM can be installed at a maximum of 1312 ft. distance from the Main Site. The distance can
be extended by using line extension equipment (repeater, MUX, etc.).
4. A maximum of 23 lines/trunks can be accommodated in one Remote PIM. Application processor cards can
not be accommodated in Remote PIM.
5. When the link between the Main Site and the Remote Site has been lost for a certain duration, the system
activates the PFT (Power Failure Transfer) automatically on the Remote Site, if it is provided.
6. The PIM for Remote Site requires the DAIB card.
7. The Wireless System is not available at the Remote Site according to the UTAM regulation.
8. Battery Backup Time: Using the internal battery kit, the Remote PIM, equipped with 23 ports, can operate
up to 100 minutes (1 hour, 40 minutes) when AC power is lost.
9. The resident system programming cannot be set to the Remote Site while the Main Site is set.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESERVE POWER
RESERVE POWER
General Description
This feature provides backup power from a 24V battery source in the event of a commercial power failure.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Batteries should be installed inside the PIM or separately from the system.
2. Sealed lead acid (or maintenance free) batteries must be locally provided.
3. No interruption of system operation should occur during switchover from commercial to battery power.
However, when the system senses the supplied voltage from the batteries has dropped to 20-21 volts, the
system will automatically shut down to prevent excessive discharge of the Reserve Power batteries.
4. Duration of battery operation is a direct function of the capacity of the batteries installed, and the quantity
and types of cards installed.
5. The Reserve Power requirements are dependent on the configuration of each individual system.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 270
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM
RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM
General Description
This feature provides the installers a simple procedure to have the system generate system data according to the
system hardware configuration, thereby providing immediate operation and shorter programming time. When
activated, the system scans hardware configuration (such as line/trunk card slot location) and assigns system
data (such as extension numbers, trunk numbers, etc.) according to a predetermined generic program
assignment.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the Command Manual for activation procedures.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is only applicable for equipment installed in Port Interface Module (PIM) 0 to 3.
2. System data is not assigned to any vacant slot.
3. Virtual extensions are not assigned.
4. The Resident System Program scans the hardware configuration.
5. Details of Resident System Program:
a. Extension Numbers:
Extension Numbers 200 through 455 are assigned according to sequential slot location number of the
associated circuit boards.
b. SN610 ATTCON Numbers:
Attendant Console Numbers E004 through E007 are assigned according to sequential slot location
numbers of the associated circuit card.
c. Trunk Numbers:
Trunk Numbers 000 through 255 are assigned according to sequential slot location number of the
associated circuit boards.
d. Multifrequency Receivers (8RSTA)/External Equipment and Key Interface (DK00)/Extension
Memory for AP00/Digital Announcement Trunk (2DAT):
Consecutive circuit numbers beginning at 00 are assigned according to sequential slot location
number of the associated circuit boards.
e. Extension data:
Following data is assigned on a per extension basis.
•
Type of dial signal: Dual-Tone, Multi-Frequency (DTMF) for Single Line Telephones
f. Trunk data:
Following data is assigned on a per-trunk basis.
•
Trunk Route Numbers:
00 for C.O. Lines
01 for 2 Wire E&M Tie Lines
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM
02 for 4 Wire E&M Tie Lines
03 for Direct Inward Dial lines
Incoming call indication:
•
Provided at trunk line appearance LED.
g. Trunk Route Data:
Following data is assigned on a trunk route basis.
•
Type of trunk:
RT00 → Direct Distance Dialing
RT01, RT02 → E&M Tie Lines (2W/4W)
RT03 → Direct Inward Dialing
•
Type of address signaling for all trunk routes is DTMF for incoming and outgoing calls.
Tie Lines are assigned for wink - start operation.
h. System Speed Dialing memory block data:
100 Memory blocks are allocated to tenant 00.
i. Multiline Terminal line key data:
The following data is assigned according to the type of the terminal.
•
8-button terminal:
Line key 08 - Primary extension
Line keys 01 through 07 - Trunks 000 through 006
•
16-button terminal:
Line key 16 - Primary extension
Line keys 01 through 04 - Trunks 000 through 003
j. Prime Line
For all Multiline Terminals, the primary extension is assigned as the Prime Line.
k. Memory allocation for Station Speed Dial:
•
•
Multiline Terminals without DSS keys - 10 buffers
Single Line Telephones - 10 buffers
Up to the maximum of 4500 buffers
l. All stations are assigned to tenant 01.
m. Numbering Plan
Numbering Plan
CM 20
Y (0 - 3)
Access Code
Setting Data
800
Service Features
0
0
11
Operator Call
Call Hold
A046
2, 3, or 4
803
First digit of three digit station number
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM
Numbering Plan (Continued)
CM 20
Y (0 - 3)
Access Code
Setting Data
Service Features
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5*
5#
60
62
66
68
6*
6#
72
73
74
75
7*
7#
9
A130
A131
A132
A133
A134
A138
A139
A140
A141
A142
A024
A025
A163
A110
A039
A043
A008
A009
A047
A021
A020
A037
A065
A066
100
Internal Zone Paging group 0
group 1
For calling
group 2
group 3
group 4
Internal Zone Paging group 0
group 1
group 2
group 3
group 4
For answering
Set
Timed Reminder/Automatic Wake Up
Cancel
Voice Call/Ring Tone programming
Assignment of station name
BGM on Multiline Terminal set/reset
Day/Night mode change by station dialing
Set
Call Park-System
Retrieve
TAS Answer A
Call Pickup-Direct
Call Pickup-Group
Call Pickup-Designated Group
Entry
Cancel
RT00
RT01
RT02
RT04
RT05
RT06
RT07
Station Speed Dialing
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
*1
#1
*2
#2
*4
101
102
104
Trunk Access Code
105
106
107
A081
A004
A005
A007
A125
A006
Individual Trunk Access
Set
Trunk Queueing-Outgoing/Call Back
Cancel
Camp-On by station (Transfer method)
Camp-On by station (Call Waiting method)
Executive Override
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM
Numbering Plan (Continued)
CM 20
Y (0 - 3)
Access Code
Setting Data
Service Features
Entry
*5
#5
*6
#6
*7
#7
*8
#8
*9
#9
**
*#
#*
##
A010
A011
A012
A013
A018
A019
A022
A023
A040
A041
A069
A085
A064
A067
Call Forwarding-All Calls
Cancel
Entry
Cancel
Entry
Cancel
Set
Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line
Call Forwarding-Destination
Do Not Disturb
Cancel
Set
MW Lamp
Reset
Last Number Redial
Account Code
Entry
Station Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Origination
Origination
Note: Refer to the Variable Timing Parameters feature for default data relating to timeouts.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY
RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY
General Description
This feature permits any station user to register his/her Return Schedule from his/her phone when he/she leaves
his/her desk or the premises, and have the Return Schedule displayed on a calling Multiline Terminal with an
LCD during his/her absence.
Station Application
All stations can set a Return Schedule; however, only Multiline Terminals with an LCD can display the sched-
ule.
Operating Procedure
To set Return Schedule from any station
1. Go off-hook and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Return Schedule feature access code.
3. Dial the number corresponding to the desired message:
Dial
0
Message
IN:BACK HH:MM
OUT:BACK HH:MM
AWAY:BACK MM:DD
1
2
4. If 0 or 1 is selected, dial the desired time.
5. If 2 or 3 is selected, dial the month and date (example: for June, 8, enter 0608).
6. Restore the handset and the Return Schedule is registered.
To cancel Return Schedule from the station that set Return Schedule
1. Go off-hook and receive internal dial tone.
2. Dial the Return Schedule cancel code.
3. Restore the handset and the Return Schedule is cancelled.
Service Conditions
1. Registration of a Return Schedule is possible from any type of station (either Single Line Telephone or Mul-
tiline Terminal).
2. A Multiline Terminal user can register Return Schedule not only on its primary extension but also on sec-
ondary extension appearances for the associated extension user. Calls to the primary extension will result in
receipt of the Return Schedule message.
3. The Call Forwarding - All Calls feature has priority over the Return Schedule feature.
4. When a call is rerouted to another station (by Call Forwarding - All Calls), and if that station has registered
a Return Schedule, that Return Schedule is displayed to the calling party.
5. The feature access code for Return Schedule can be programmed in a DSS key on the Multiline Terminal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY
6. Up to three different messages can be selected:
a. IN:BACK: recommended when the station user is not at his/her desk but is still on premises (in a
meeting, in the building, etc.) Provides an hour and minute display.
b. OUT:BACK: recommended when the station user has left the premises but will be back within the
same day. Provides an hour and minute display.
c. AWAY: BACK: recommended when the station user has left the premises and will be away for an
extended time period. Provides a month and date display.
7. Reorder tone is heard by the calling party when a station that set Return Schedule is called.
8. The lower portion of the LCD on a Multiline Terminal with display is used to provide the Return Schedule
display.
9. Entry of return time is through 4 dialed digits (HH/MM) for hours and minutes.
10. Entry of return date is through 4 dialed digits (MM/DD) representing the month and day.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 276
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROOM CUTOFF
ROOM CUTOFF
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant Console, Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, or Property Management
System (PMS) terminal, or guest room telephones using a special access code, to temporarily restrict guest room
telephones from making unauthorized calls when guests are away from their room, and when rooms are in
Check Out status.
There are two types of Room Cutoff conditions depending on the type of calls restricted.
•
External Call Restriction: All outgoing calls from guest room stations are restricted in the Room Cutoff
status. (Only internal calls are available.)
•
Toll Call Restriction:
All toll calls from guest room stations are restricted during Room Cutoff status.
(Internal and local calls are available.)
Station Application
All stations except House Phones.
Operating Procedure
External Call Restriction
• To set Room Cutoff from the Attendant Console
1. Dial the desired station number.
2. Press the RC key.
3. Press the Answer key.
4. Press the RLS key.
• To cancel Room Cutoff from the Attendant Console
1. Dial the desired station number.
2. Press the RC key.
3. Press the RESET key.
4. Press the RLS key.
• To set Room Cutoff from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the RC key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
4. Press the RLS key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROOM CUTOFF
• To reset Room Cutoff from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the RC key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the RESET key. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
4. Press the RLS key.
• To set Room Cutoff from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument while engaged in conversation with station
1. Press the RC key.
2. Press the SET key.
3. Press the RLS key.
• To reset Room Cutoff from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument while engaged in conversation with station
1. Press the RC key.
2. Press the RESET key.
3. Press the RLS key.
Toll Call Restriction
• To set Room Cutoff from the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
1. Press the STS key.
2. Dial the desired function status code.
3. Press the STS key again.
4. Dial the guest room station number.
5. Press the SET key. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
6. Press the RLS key.
OR
1. Press the STS key.
2. Dial the guest room station number.
3. Press the SET key. Room Status is displayed. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
4. Press the STS key again.
5. Dial the desired function status code.
6. Press the SET key. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
7. Press the RLS key.
• To set Room Cutoff from a guest room station by maid or repair person
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Maid Status feature access code and receive special dial tone.
3. Dial the maid ID code.
4. Dial the desired function status code and receive service set tone.
5. Replace the handset.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROOM CUTOFF
Service Conditions
1. Stations in Room Cutoff condition are able to place outgoing calls using the Attendant Assisted Calling fea-
ture.
2. If the station under Room Cutoff status dials a C.O. line access code and/or a special area code, the station
is rerouted to one of the following:
•
•
Reorder tone
Attendant Console
3. Room Cutoff is automatically set by Check Out operation, and it is automatically reset by Check In opera-
tion.
4. Room Cutoff is available for guest room stations only.
5. Station-to-Station calling and service feature access (such as Maid Status) are still available.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROOM STATUS
ROOM STATUS
General Description
This feature provides the Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument with a visual display of the guest's room
status. A supplementary print out (individual and summary) can be provided.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To display Room Status from a Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument:
1. Press the STS key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key. The Automatic Wake Up time and Maid Status are displayed on the LCD and related
room status lamps are lit green, if set. The above two steps can be repeated for other stations.
4. Press the RLS key.
Service Conditions
1. Items indicated are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set status of Do Not Disturb
Set status of Message Waiting
Set status of Room Cutoff
Automatic Wake Up Time if set
Check In/Check Out status
Maid Status
2. The status of the function is indicated by a green LED associated with each function key:
•
•
•
•
•
Check In/Check Out set
Do Not Disturb set
Message Waiting set
Room Cutoff set
Automatic Wake Up set (LCD displays time set)
3. The Room Status of stations can be printed at the Hotel/Motel printer (if available) by pressing the print
(PR) key on the Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument prior to pressing the STS key.
4. An Application Processor card (AP00) is required for printer connection.
5. Refer to the Installation Procedure Manual/Feature Programming Manual for more information.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 280
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROUTE ADVANCE
ROUTE ADVANCE
General Description
This feature automatically routes outgoing calls over alternate facilities when the first choice trunk group is
busy. Users select the first choice route by dialing the corresponding access code, and the equipment then ad-
vances through alternate trunk groups only if the first choice is busy.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. There is no indication provided to the station user as to whether the call is routed over the first choice or
subsequent choice facilities.
2. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will generate call records in conjunction with this feature.
3. Route Advance is trunk-route based.
4. Careful consideration should be given to the use of FX trunks as an alternate facility since in many instances,
these lines require outpulsing of digits for long distance (which the user may not dial because he will not
know he is connected to an FX trunk). Use of the Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature overcomes this diffi-
culty.
5. The maximum number of trunk routes to be included in a single Route Advance group is 7.
6. The total number of routes that can be contained in all Route Advance groups is 64.
7. The same route can be included in two or more different groups.
8. Route Advance occurs only when the dialed code accesses the first choice trunk route in the Route Advance
table.
9. No code conversion capability is provided with Route Advance. The digits the user dials (after the trunk
access code) will be sent over the selected trunk regardless of the trunk route used. The user will not know
which trunk route is selected; therefore, only those trunk routes that accept the same dialing format may be
assigned to a given Route Advance group. If digit conversation is needed, the LCR feature should be used.
10. FX trunk routes to a foreign number plan area (FNPA) do not require the dialing of that FNPA area code.
Therefore, these FX trunks may not be used in the same Route Advance table with local exchange or WATS
trunks. Use of the LCR feature overcomes this difficulty.
11. Tie Lines should not be assigned to a Route Advance table that includes C.O., FX, or WATS trunk groups.
12. Route Advance is available for use with outgoing C.O., FX, WATS, CCSA, and Tie Lines.
13. The dialing party may be either a station, Attendant, Tie Line, or outside party using Direct Inward System
Access (DISA).
14. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature will not be available.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAVE AND REPEAT
SAVE AND REPEAT
General Description
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal to save a specific dialed number and then redial that number at a later
time.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. Go off-hook and seize any idle line. Dial a number.
2. After the number has been dialed, press the Save and Repeat key. The dialed number is stored for future use.
The associated LED lights red.
3. To access this number later, go off-hook and receive dial tone. Press the Save and Repeat key and the saved
number is dialed.
Service Conditions
1. Three Save and Repeat keys per station can be assigned.
2. The Save and Repeat function may be set at any time after the number has been dialed and before going on-
hook.
3. It is not necessary to erase the stored number in order to save another. The second number will automatically
replace the first.
4. If necessary, dialing can be added after pressing the Save and Repeat key.
5. When a call is originated using the Save and Repeat feature, the LED associated with the Save and Repeat
key goes out. However, the memory is retained and that number can be accessed again.
6. To monitor the saved digits, press the Save and Repeat key while the station is idle. The saved digits will
be displayed if the Multiline Terminal is equipped with an LCD.
7. The trunk access code is saved along with the dialed number on a Trunk Direct Appearance. This allows
use of the Save and Repeat key on an extension.
8. The maximum number of digits that can be stored is 26.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 282
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY ALARM
SECURITY ALARM
General Description
This feature provides an indication on the Attendant Console when a contact closure occurs.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The contact to be monitored is connected across Tip (T) and Ring (R) of one circuit on a 4LC/8LC card.
2. The contact installed must be a normally open contact.
3. The contact generated signal is non-latching; therefore, if the contact opens again, the signal to the Atten-
dant Console stops.
4. The station number assigned to the single line circuit associated with the contact closure is displayed when
the Attendant presses the ATND key or Answer key.
5. Assignment of this feature is accomplished using Hotline assignment of a single line extension to the At-
tendant Console. Refer to the Hotline - Inside/Outside Features and Specifications for more information.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET RELOCATION
SET RELOCATION
General Description
This feature enables two stations to be moved from one location to another without reprogramming station data
at MAT.
Station Application
From Multiline Terminal to Multiline Terminal.
From Single Line Terminal to Single Line Terminal.
Operating Procedure
To move Station A to Station B:
1. Lift handset at Station A; receive Dial Tone.
2. Dial Authorization Code access code; receive Special Dial Tone.
3. Dial Authorization Code for changing station class temporarily; receive Dial Tone.
4. Dial Set Relocation access code; receive Special Dial Tone.
5. Dial Station B number; receive Service Set Tone and LCD displays SWAP OK xxxx(where xxxxis
Station B number).
6. Restore the handset; After four seconds, data between Station A and Station B will be exchanged.
Service Conditions
1. This feature can move Multiline Terminal to Multiline Terminal, or Single Line Terminal to Single Line
Terminal.
The following cases are not available:
•
•
Single Line Terminal ↔ Multiline Terminal
PS ↔ PS/Single Line Terminal/Multiline Terminal
However, the following cases are available: Note
•
•
Single Line Terminal (DP) ↔ Single Line Terminal (PB)
Between Multiline Terminals with different line button number
Note: In this case, telephone sets also should be changed.
2. When the station has the following features, it cannot be moved:
•
•
•
•
Single Line Terminal equipped with DSSCON
Multiline Terminal equipped with Add-On-Module
Multiline Terminal equipped with APR
Multiline Terminal equipped with Dual Path
In this case, when dial Set Relocation access code, receive restrict ROT.
3. The following services cannot be moved:
•
•
•
Stack Dial
Last Number Redial
Save and Repeat
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET RELOCATION
4. When the station is busy, it cannot be moved.
5. This feature is selectable by service restriction class.
6. When Multiline Terminal is moved to Multiline Terminal:
•
•
The LED status of Multiline (Trunk, station) cannot be moved.
If Call Forwarding-All Calls/-Busy Line/-No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Message Waiting (MW), or
Busy-Out is setting, the associated LED will be lit.
7. When Single Line Terminal is moved to Single Line Terminal, if MW is setting, after moving, MW lamp
will be lit.
8. During saving/loading system data, this feature is restricted. Because system data is changed when this fea-
ture is activated, the data is not matched with saving data before service setting.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SINGLE DIGIT DIALING
SINGLE DIGIT DIALING
General Description
This feature provides the station user the ability to dial single digit codes to access certain features while still
allowing the same digit dialed to be used as the first digit of guest room station numbers.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Normal call processing procedures apply.
Service Conditions
1. This feature is available on a numbering plan basis. Up to 4 different numbering plans are available per sys-
tem. For multiple tenant applications, each tenant can be assigned to one of these four numbering plans.
2. When this feature is assigned, digits in the numbering plan can overlap and Single Digit Dialing is based on
a timeout after dialing the first digit. The timing duration before the system stops looking for a second digit
is programmable from 2-8 seconds. The default setting is 4-5 seconds.
3. Digits 0-9, *, and # can be assigned within each numbering plan for Single Digit Dialing.
4. Single digit codes can be dialed with Consultation Hold.
5. Only the following features can be activated using Single Digit Dialing:
•
•
•
•
Trunk Answer Any Station
Trunk Access
Single Digit Station Numbering
Operator calls (Dial 0)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE (VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS)
SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE (VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS)
General Description
This feature permits assignment of circuits which do not physically exist, to be used as secondary extensions on
Multiline Terminals. There are 256 software lines that can be assigned to line keys and used as desired.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
Normal call processing procedures apply.
Service Conditions
1. A Software Line Appearance can be assigned as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hotline
Intercom
Station Hunting pilot number
Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution phantom number
Secondary appearance on Multiline Terminals
Pilot numbers for hunting groups and Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) groups
2. When accessing the Call Pickup feature, the Software Line Appearance assigned as a secondary extension
can only pickup calls directed to the group programmed for that secondary extension.
3. A Software Line Appearance can enter or access the Speed Dialing data on the station of the same Multiline
Terminal on which it appears.
4. All Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) data of the Software Line Appearance will be recorded as
activity on the primary extension of the Multiline Terminal on which it appears, including that on secondary
extension appearances.
5. When a real number (corresponding to an installed station) is not used as a pilot number for Station Hunting
or ACD/UCD groups, a software line can be used.
6. See Intercom, Station Hunting, Automatic Call Distribution, Uniform Call Distribution With Overflow and
Hotline features for details.
7. The system can support up to 384 Multiline Terminals (up to 512 Multiline Terminals with an Extension
Memory card of MP) and up to 256 Software Line Appearances. However, the combined total of Multiline
Terminals and Software Line Appearances must not exceed 768.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK DIAL
STACK DIAL
General Description
This feature enables a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console to remember the numbers dialed in the pre-
ceding five calls, including the last number dialed. The stack dial numbers are sequentially displayed on the
LCD, thus allowing the station user to make an outgoing call by selecting the desired dialed number from the
display.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD and Attendant Consoles.
Operating Procedure
1. Press the Redial key. The caller hears special dial tone, and the number dialed last is displayed on the LCD.
2. To display the numbers dialed before the last call, press the Redial key again. While the caller hears special
dial tone, the number dialed before the last call are displayed on the LCD. (Each time the Redial key is
pressed, the numbers dialed for the last five calls are displayed sequentially from the last number dialed.)
3. To redial the displayed number on the LCD, press the * or # key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 288
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK DIAL
Example
Operation
LCD Display
1. Idle
3:21 PM WED 21 APR 1999
2. Press the Redial key
REDIAL[*/#]/SPEED[_ _]
-1
•
•
*/# key pressed:
RST Timeout:
Go to Step 4.
Go to Step 6.
82625563
3. Press the Redial key again
REDIAL[*/#]/SPEED[_ _]
-2
•
•
*/# key pressed:
RST Timeout:
Go to Step 4.
Go to Step 6.
00471857712
4. Press the */# key
00471857712
3:21 PM WED 21 APR 1999
5. Press the Redial key 6 times. The display
returns to the last number dialed.
•
Go to Step 2.
6. RST Timeout
REDIAL[*/#]/SPEED[_ _]
-1
3:22 PM WED 21 APR 1999
Service Conditions
1. The Stack Dial feature memorizes the numbers dialed for the last five calls (unless the same number is dialed
twice) inclusive of the last number, and allows redial using the memorized numbers.
2. For Stack Dial, station numbers and C.O. line numbers (inclusive of trunk access codes, routes, route ad-
vance, and Least Cost Routing) are memorized but feature access codes and unused numbers are not mem-
orized.
3. On the display for Stack Dial, a number representing the number of times of dialing is displayed in the upper
line, and the dial number is displayed in the lower line.
REDIAL[*/#]/SPEED[_ _]
-1
Upper
Lower
00238241554
4. When displaying the fifth number that was dialed, pressing the Redial key causes the display to return to the
last number dialed.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK DIAL
5. When the lower line of the LCD is being used by Data Communication/OAI, Stack Dial is not available.
6. The maximum number of digits that can be memorized by Stack Dial is 32. The number of digits to be dis-
played on the LCD ranges from 1 to 16.
7. When only one number is registered by Stack Dial, blank is displayed on the lower line of the LCD when
the Redial key is pressed. If redial is attempted by pressing the # key while blank is being displayed, the
station user hears reorder tone.
8. While a number is being displayed by Stack Dial, it cannot be saved for Save and Repeat. After the call has
been redialed by Stack Dial, the number can be saved.
9. The Stack Dial feature access key (Redial) can be used for both Last Number Redial and Station Speed Di-
aling.
10. When a digit key is pressed instead of the # key, while Stack Dial is being displayed, a station speed dial
call is originated. (In this case, current clock is displayed in the lower line of the LCD.)
11. The Stack Dial stored numbers will not be saved in the event of a system reset.
12. The following is displayed on the Attendant Console:
RDL[#]
-1
10:23 AM TUE 20
00238241554
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION HUNTING
Station Hunting - Circular
STATION HUNTING
General Description
Three Station Hunting arrangements are available. Station Hunting - Circular processes the call no matter which
station in the hunt group is called. Station Hunting - Terminal initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of a
hunt group is called. Station Hunting - Secretarial is initiated when a busy secretarial station in a Station Hunting
- Circular group or Station Hunting - Terminal group is reached.
Station Hunting - Circular
General Description
When a busy station in a hunt group is called, this feature permits the call to be processed automatically through
the hunt group in a preprogrammed order from that station's position within the hunt group.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. When all stations within a Station Hunting - Circular group are busy, the calling party will receive busy tone
unless the call is rerouted by Station Hunting - Secretarial.
2. Assignment of station numbers to a Station Hunting - Circular group may be in any numerical order. The
last station in the order of hunting can be programmed, if required (Switch Back System).
3. Calls to any programmed station in a Station Hunting - Circular group will, when that station is busy, pro-
ceed through all other stations entered subsequently in the hunt group until reaching the last.
4. If a hunt group station has set Do Not Disturb, hunting will bypass that station and continue in the order of
hunting.
5. The maximum number of stations per hunt group is 60.
6. There is no limit to the number of Station Hunting - Circular groups within the system.
7. In a Station Hunting - Circular group, any number of stations can be designated as secretarial stations. When
all stations in the Station Hunting - Circular group are busy, the system will reroute a call initiated to the
secretarial station to a preassigned Station Hunting - Secretarial group. All stations within the Station Hunt-
ing - Circular group can be assigned the same station as an entry to the Station Hunting - Secretarial group.
8. Call Forwarding - All Calls has priority over Station Hunting if the dialed station has this feature set. Call
Forwarding - Busy, if set at the called station, can occur if all stations in the hunting group are busy.
9. Recalls (Call Back, Call Park, Camp-On, Call Transfer, etc.) return to the originating station and do not
hunt.
10. Each station can belong to only one hunt group.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION HUNTING
Station Hunting - Terminal
11. This feature will be activated whenever the hunt group is dialed or terminated under the following condi-
tions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dialed from station
Dialed from Attendant Console
Dialed from Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Dialed from Tie Line
Terminated by Direct In Termination (DIT)
Terminated by Hotline - Inside/Outside
Terminated by Off-Hook Alarm
Terminated by Priority Call
12. The Attendant Console cannot be a member of a hunt group.
Station Hunting - Terminal
General Description
When a pilot number is dialed and that number is busy, sequential Station Hunting will be initiated. However,
if a number other than the pilot number is dialed and that number is busy, busy tone will be provided rather than
initiate Station Hunting.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. If all lines in a hunt group are busy, the caller will receive busy tone.
2. Only calls to the pilot number will initiate a Terminal Hunt. Calls to other stations in the Terminal Hunt
group will ring at that station, or receive busy tone.
3. The maximum number of stations that can be included in one Station Hunting group is 60, including the
pilot station.
4. When the extension number used as a pilot number has set Call Forwarding-All Calls, Call Forwarding will
reroute the call and Station Hunting-Terminal will not occur.
5. When an extension within the Station Hunting-Terminal group other than the pilot extension sets Call For-
warding-All Calls, calls already in the hunt process will bypass the extension and continue hunting. Calls
directed to the extension (versus directed to the pilot extension) will follow the Call Forwarding setting.
6. When any extension except a pilot in a hunt group has set Do Not Disturb, the extension will be bypassed
and Station Hunting continues. When a pilot station has set Do Not Disturb, the calling party will receive
reorder tone.
7. There is no limit to the number of Station Hunting - Terminal groups within the system.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 292
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION HUNTING
Station Hunting - Secretarial
8. The priority for call handling by features, to a pilot station, is as follows:
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Camp-On (Call Waiting Method/Transfer Method)
Station Hunting
9. Recalls (Call Back, Call Park, Camp-On, Call Transfer, etc.) return to the originating station and do not
hunt.
10. This feature will be activated whenever the hunt group is dialed or terminated under the following condi-
tions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dialed from station
Dialed from Attendant Console
Dialed from Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Dialed from E&M Tie Line
Terminated by Direct In Termination (DIT)
Terminated by Hotline - Inside/Outside
Terminated by Off-Hook Alarm
Terminated by Priority Call
Station Hunting - Secretarial
General Description
This feature allows assignments to be given to members of Terminal and Circular Hunting groups to reroute
calls (when their hunting group is all busy) to a back-up hunting group.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. When all stations in a hunt group are busy, a method of rerouting the incoming calls to a back-up Station
Hunting-Secretarial hunt group exists. For a Terminal Hunt group, the pilot number is assigned an extension
number of a station within the back-up Station Hunting - Secretarial group. For a Station Hunting - Circular
group, each station (because each station can be considered a pilot station) is assigned an extension number
of a station within the back-up Station Hunting-Secretarial group. When all stations in the Terminal or Cir-
cular Hunt are found busy, the system will reroute incoming calls to that station in the Station Hunting-Sec-
retarial group, and station hunting will continue.
2. The Station Hunting-Secretarial hunt group can be a Circular or Terminal Hunt group.
3. A maximum of 31 extensions can be members of the Station Hunting - Secretarial group.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION HUNTING
Station Hunting - Secretarial
4. Any number of stations in Station Hunting - Terminal groups and Station Hunting - Circular groups can
have their calls rerouted to a station within the Station Hunting - Secretarial group. In practice, it is best for
the pilot number of Station Hunting - Terminal groups and every member of Station Hunting - Circular
groups to be assigned an entry extension into the Station Hunting - Secretarial group. All Station Hunting -
Terminal and Station Hunting - Circular groups can be rerouted to a single extension within the Station
Hunting - Secretarial group. Multiple entry points can be used by assigning different Station Hunting - Ter-
minal pilot extensions and different Station Hunting - Circular member extensions to different Station Hunt-
ing - Secretarial extensions.
5. Unlike the normal Circular Hunt group where a call to a member extension which has Call Forwarding-All
Calls or Call Forwarding-Busy Line set will result in Call Forwarding occurring, a rerouted Station Hunt
group will not follow call forward setting, but will bypass the forwarded station and continue the Secretarial
Hunt.
6. One Station Hunting Secretarial group is available per system.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 294
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)
General Description
This feature provides a call record for outgoing Station-to-Trunk calls and incoming Trunk-to-Station calls (in-
cluding Data Call). This facilitates cost control by identifying trunk use and misuse by individual stations. Sta-
tion Message Detail Recording (SMDR) enables call billing to customers and clients, and provides a means for
checking local telephone bills.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. SMDR can be programmed to record all outgoing calls or toll calls only, depending on the customers' re-
quirements.
2. When customer provided computer equipment is connected using the RS-232C interface, SMDR informa-
tion will be transmitted directly to the equipment as each call record is completed.
3. One RS-232C interface port is provided. The following specifications apply to this port:
•
•
•
Synchronization:
Data Speed:
Code:
Asynchronous
9600 bps (maximum)
ASCII 7- or 8-bit + parity bit
If the distance between the system and the processing computer exceeds 50 feet, an asynchronous modem
should be used.
4. If the outgoing call is directed to a trunk which does not supply answer supervision, SMDR will start re-
cording the call approximately 10 seconds after the last digit has been dialed.
5. Supervision of the status of the external RS-232C terminal is not supplied.
6. There are two kinds of SMDR features as follows:
a. Built-in SMDR
The MP card has one of RS-232C ports for SMDR. This card provides memory for a maximum of
256 calls, and provides a record of a maximum of 64 trunk calls simultaneously for a maximum of 6
digit extension number.
•
•
MP without expansion memory (standard) : up to 256 calls/64 trunks
MP with expansion memory (optional) : up to 1280 calls/256 trunks
b. SMDR with AP00
•
AP00 without expansion memory (standard): up to 1600 calls (if central office feature is used, up
to 800 calls)
•
AP00 with expansion memory (optional)
: up to 27000 calls (if central office feature is used, up
to 26000 calls)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)
When a call is completed, the record is sent to the output device and is removed from memory. If the amount
of calls exceed the SMDR memory, those overflow calls will not be recorded.
7. The built-in SMDR can not be provided when AP00 is mounted.
8. The built-in SMDR does not provide a record of tandem calls.
9. Account Codes, Forced Account Codes, Authorization Codes and DISA Codes on Tandem connections
(SMDR with AP00 only) are reported in the applicable call record.
10. SMDR with AP00 provides a record of incoming Tie Line tandem calls where another trunk is dial accessed.
11. For details of SMDR format, data stream, memory buffer, etc., refer to the Installation Procedure Manual/
Feature Programming Manual.
12. Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber’s number for Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and CPN (IS-
DN) can be recorded in the SMDR by system programming.
13. In case of built-in SMDR, if the station number exceeds six digits, only the last six digits will be sent.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 296
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION SPEED DIALING
STATION SPEED DIALING
General Description
This feature allows a station user to dial frequently called numbers by dialing an access code and an abbreviated
code, or by pressing a One Touch key assigned for Station Speed Dialing capability.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
Multiline Terminals
• To operate using a One Touch key:
Press the One Touch key associated with the desired telephone number. The speaker automatically turns on
and the number is dialed.
• To operate using dial access
1. Press the Redial key. The speaker and Speaker LED automatically turns on and feature dial tone is received.
2. Dial the abbreviated code assigned to the desired number.
3. The number is dialed.
• To program numbers in memory for One Touch key
1. Press the Conf key and the desired One Touch key. Previously stored digits will be displayed on the LCD.
2. Dial the desired number. The old digits will be erased and the new number is displayed.
3. Press the Conf key. The LCD will display SET.
• To program numbers in memory for dial access
1. Press the Feature key followed by the Redial key.
2. Dial the abbreviated code to be assigned.
3. Dial the desired telephone number including a trunk access code.
4. Press the Feature key.
Single Line Telephones
• To operate
1. Go off-hook and dial the Station Speed Dialing feature access code.
2. Dial the abbreviated code assigned to the desired number.
3. The number is dialed.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION SPEED DIALING
• To program numbers in memory
1. Go off-hook and dial the Station Speed Dialing programming code.
2. Dial the abbreviated code to be assigned.
3. Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number.
4. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. Each Station Speed Dialing buffer can store a maximum of 26 digits, including pauses. The trunk access
code (maximum 4 digits) must be dialed to be stored; however, the trunk access code is not counted in the
26 digits.
2. There are 1000 Speed Dialing buffers in a memory block, and there are 10 memory blocks for a total of
10,000 Speed Dialing buffers per system.
•
•
MP without expansion memory (standard): up to 4,000 buffers
MP with expansion memory (optional): up to 10,000 buffers
3. Single Line Telephones and the Multiline Terminals can be assigned up to 10 memory blocks (10000
buffers) each. When Station Speed Dialing is assigned, the minimum assignment is one memory block (10
buffers).
4. The same memory blocks can be shared by multiple stations. When the same memory blocks are shared,
there is an assignment that allows selected stations to be able to reprogram the buffer on a per-station basis.
5. Only the feature keys on Multiline Terminals can be programmed for internal or external calls. All other
Speed Dialing buffers are for trunk calls only.
6. Code Restriction can be allowed or denied with Station Speed Dialing on a system basis.
7. The numbers stored in each Speed Dialing buffer will be retained in the event of system reinitialization or
power failure.
8. A pause may be programmed by using the # or * key. If # is used, the pause duration is 1.5 seconds. If * is
used, a system programmable pause (1.5 - 12 seconds: default is 3 seconds) is provided.
9. Refer to the Consecutive Speed Dialing feature for additional information.
10. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature will not be available, except for the following
operation:
•
•
Press a Trunk (TRK) key (trunk service)
Press a One Touch key (station speed dialing)
11. The following numbers can be stored in a One Touch key of a Multiline Terminal:
a. Access code for Hooking signal to a Centrex (maximum 2 digits) + desired number (maximum 26
digits)
This One Touch key is effective when the station user is connected to a Centrex line. The Recall key
is used to return to the original line. Call information can be recorded in SMDR.
b. Station number + DTMF signal after the called station answered (maximum 26 digits in total)
This One Touch key is effective when the station user is in idle or busy or seizing a trunk.
c. Trunk access code (maximum 4 digit) + outside number + * # + DTMF signal after the called station
answered (maximum 26 digits in total except trunk access code).
Note: “* #” is programmed as a delimiter between outside number and DTMF signal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 298
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION SPEED DIALING
This One Touch key is effective when the station user is in idle or seizing a trunk. When talking to the
outside party, the One Touch key sends only outside number as DTMF signal.
When pressing another One Touch key during the sending DTMF signal after a called station
answered, the stored number in the second One Touch key is sent out as DTMF signal continuously.
If the second One Touch key stores the station or outside number with DTMF signal (the above “b”,
“c”), only the station/outside number is sent out and the DTMF signal is not sent out.
12. By dialing the feature access code of Call Forwarding - All Calls / - Busy Line / - No Answer and pressing
a One Touch key, Call Forwarding can be set to a stored station/outside number in the One Touch key. The
station which Call Forwarding - Outside is restricted cannot use a One Touch key for Call Forwarding
operation.
13. When using the additional memory buffers for a Multiline Terminal, the LEDs on the One Touch keys do
not show the busy state of the station associated with the keys.
14. When using the additional memory buffers for the Multiline Terminal, Speed Dialing by a Programmable
key is not available on the Multiline Terminal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP CALL
STEP CALL
General Description
This feature allows the Attendant or station user, after calling a busy station, to call an idle station by simply
dialing an additional digit. This feature will operate only if the number of the idle station is identical to that of
the busy station in all respects, except the last digit.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
1. The dialed station (220) is busy.
2. Dial 5.
3. If station 225 is idle, the call will be connected there.
Service Conditions
1. If the second selected station is also busy, Step Call can continue until an idle station is reached. When Call
Forwarding - All Calls is set, and a station called during Step Call meets the Call Forwarding condition, Call
Forwarding will occur.
2. Step Call can be activated when busy tone is returned on a Consultation Hold or Call Park attempt.
3. When a call is rerouted by Call Forwarding, and the station to which the call was forwarded is busy, Step
Call will occur within the forwarded-to station's tens group of stations, and not the initially dialed station's
tens group of stations.
4. Step Call can not be initiated on Direct Inward Dial and Direct Inward Termination calls, but can be initiated
on Direct Inward System Access (DISA) calls.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 300
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
General Description
When various types of peripheral equipment (such as facsimiles, dictation equipment, Voice Mail, etc.) are con-
nected to the line circuits of the system, this feature allows the loop of the line circuit concerned to open for a
programmable interval, and send a release signal to the peripheral equipment when the calling party disconnects.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. The duration of the momentary open is flexible, and can be programmed from 200 ms to 1000 ms in system
programming.
2. When the calling party releases the connection, a release signal (loop open) is sent to the peripheral equip-
ment.
3. The calling party can be internal or external.
4. A 4LC/8LC card must be installed to provide this feature.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SPEED DIALING
SYSTEM SPEED DIALING
General Description
This feature provides all users the ability to dial frequently called numbers using an abbreviated call code.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From Multiline Terminals
1. Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive extension dial tone.
2. Press the System Speed Dialing access feature key (one touch key) or dial the System Speed Dialing feature
access code.
3. Dial the abbreviated call code (2 or 3 digits).
4. Converse when the party answers.
From Single Line Telephones
1. Lift the handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the System Speed Dialing feature access code.
3. Dial the abbreviated call code (2 or 3 digits).
4. Converse when the party answers.
Service Conditions
1. System Speed Dialing can be allowed or denied to individual stations in that station's Class of Service as-
signment. System Speed Dialing may also be allowed or denied on a per tenant or system wide basis.
2. System Speed Dial numbers are assigned in system programming from the Maintenance Administration
Terminal (MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT). Two pauses are available to be programmed
in System Speed Dialing buffers. One pause is preset at 1.5 seconds, the other pause is programmable from
1.5 seconds to 12 seconds (default is 3 seconds).
3. Code Restriction can be allowed/denied to System Speed Dialing on a system basis only.
4. When Least Cost Routing is supplied in the system, it will be applied when System Speed Dialing is access-
ed.
5. There is a total of 300 System Speed Dialing buffers per system, as set in default. This total can be increased
to a maximum of 4000 buffers by reassigning Station Speed Dialing buffers as System Speed Dialing buff-
ers.
6. Each tenant in the system can be assigned up to a maximum of 300 buffers.
7. Each buffer can store a maximum of 26 digits. Trunk access codes are not part of the 26 digits.
8. When Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) is provided, the actual dialed number is recorded and
printed.
9. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature will not be available.
10. System Speed Dialing cannot be used on Trunk Direct Appearances.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 302
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM TRAFFIC
SYSTEM TRAFFIC
General Description
2
The NEAX2000 IVS is the stored program controlled digital electronic PABX employing PCM time division
switching technique. Single stage time division switching is employed for all configurations of NEAX2000
2
IVS up to its maximum line and trunk configuration. Traffic capacity is expressed in Busy Hour Call Attempts
(BHCA). This value is the number of call attempts that can be generated in the busiest hour of the day.
Service Conditions
Maximum BHCA’s per system:
Number of
Firmware Processors (FP’s)
No FP
1000
1 FP
2000
2500
2 FP’s
4000
5000
3 FP’s
5000
7000
4 FP’s
5500
8000
Business with OAI/ACD
Business
2000
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TENANT SERVICE
TENANT SERVICE
General Description
This feature provides for more than one organization (tenant) to share the same system. Through system pro-
gramming, each organization may be restricted to its own C.O. trunks, Attendant Consoles and extension group.
In addition, incoming calls are directed to the specific tenant.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. An Attendant Console can be provided for each tenant. However, a single common Attendant Console may
be shared by two or more tenants. The number of Attendant Consoles per tenant is limited to the sum total
of the system.
2. Interoffice calling between tenants may or may not be restricted, depending on system data programming.
3. Different tenants may share a common group of trunks where required.
4. When a station dials access code 0, it will be connected to the associated Attendant.
5. There are 4 different numbering plans. Different tenants can utilize the same numbering plan when neces-
sary.
6. The system can provide tenant service up to a maximum of 64 tenants.
7. Programming on the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or Customer Administration Terminal
(CAT) is common to the system.
8. Station-to-Station, Call Transfer, Conference and Trunk Answer any Station between tenants can be al-
lowed or denied in system programming.
9. The same feature access code(s) can be shared between tenants.
10. When more than one numbering plan is assigned in the system, more than one Day/Night Mode Change By
Station Dialing access code can be assigned. When the access code is dialed by a station, only the associated
tenant will be placed in Night Service.
11. One AP00 board is required for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR). The same AP00 board is ap-
plied to all tenants.
12. Paging can be shared between tenants, or the assignment of different paging zones and different numbering
plans allow for individual paging access by tenants.
13. When Multiple Console Operation is applied, a master Attendant Console must be designated to place mul-
tiple tenants into Night Service.
14. A different music source for Music On Hold (maximum 10) may be used for each tenant.
15. Music On Hold on a tenant basis has a choice for holding-/held-party control in the music source.
16. Relay control is available for each of 10 tone sources.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 304
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIE LINES
TIE LINES
General Description
This feature allows any station user dial access or direct access to an E&M Tie Line.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To dial access an E&M Tie Line
1. Lift handset and receive dial tone.
2. Dial E&M Tie Line access code.
3. Dial desired number.
To directly access an E&M Tie Line
1. Lift handset or press Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Press line key assigned E&M Tie Line.
3. Dial desired number.
Service Conditions
1. Tie Line access may be denied to individual stations through Class of Service.
2. When a power failure occurs (without reserve power backup), all existing E&M Tie Line connections and
access to E&M Tie Lines is lost.
3. Each tie line group can be programmed for both rotary and pushbutton address signaling (incoming and/or
outgoing).
4. The system can only be equipped with dial repeating tie lines. Immediate start, delay dial, or wink start sig-
naling is available.
5. When a trunk route access code is dialed by a station user, the tie line route is used to index a trunk route
restriction table to determine if the call attempt is allowed. If access is restricted, reorder tone is provided.
6. The system can be programmed to supply second dial tone on incoming E&M Tie Lines.
7. Both 2 and 4-wire, Type I and Type V, E&M Tie Lines can be connected.
8. When 4-wire E&M Tie Lines are connected, the following pad control can be assigned:
•
•
•
Station to Tie Line -
C.O. to Tie Line -
0 to –12 db.
0 to –4 db.
Tie Line to Tie Line - 0 to –4 db.
9. An ODT card is required for 2- or 4-wire E&M Tie Line interface.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING
TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING
General Description
This feature allows Trunk-to-Trunk connections through the system without the need for any Attendant assis-
tance or control. The major use of this feature is in association with a dial tandem tie line network to allow Tie
Line connections and incoming Tie Line calls automatic access to, and completion of, local C.O. calls.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
1. E&M Tie Line is seized by distant end system.
2. Distant end system dials applicable trunk access code and desired number.
Service Conditions
1. When using a 2-wire application (ODT card), there may be a decrease in transmission decibel levels.
2. When using a 4-wire application, an ODT card is required for every Tie Line. This card provides attenuation
so that the desired transmitting and receiving levels can be maintained, providing the overall tandem system
with transparency.
3. When all Tie Lines are busy, the calling station will receive busy tone.
4. Incoming trunks may be restricted from outgoing access to other trunks on a trunk route basis.
5. Consideration should be given to access code numbering plans to avoid unnecessary loss of access codes
and code duplication within the same system.
6. There is no limitation on the allowable number of Tie Line Tandem Switching connections.
7. Incoming dial repeating Tie Lines can connect to the following types of outgoing trunks:
•
•
•
•
•
Dial repeating tie lines
C.O. trunks
FX trunks
WATS trunks
CCSA trunks
8. All trunk routes assigned for no release signal are restricted from tandem connections.
9. The Station Message Detail Recording feature applies to incoming Tie Line calls which dial access an out-
going trunk.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 306
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIMED QUEUE
TIMED QUEUE
General Description
When a user originates an outgoing trunk call and the called party is busy or does not answer, the caller can set
the Timed Queue feature. When this feature is set, the trunk seizure is repeated and the number is redialed after
a predetermined time interval.
Station Application
Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
1. Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone.
2. Dial a trunk access code and the desired number.
3. Receive busy tone or ring no answer. Press the line key assigned as the CALL BACK key. The associated
LED flashes green and the LCD displays TIMED-Q. Timed Queue is now set.
4. Within a preprogrammed time interval, the system will automatically seize a trunk (dial tone is heard), redial
the number (dialed digits are heard), and ring back or busy tone (depending on the status of the called party)
will be heard at the station that set Timed Queue.
5. Lift the handset and converse.
Service Conditions
1. The time between setting the Timed Queue and when the system releases the trunk is programmable from
4-120 seconds (30 seconds as set in default). During this period, the station's Speaker key LED is lit and the
station is considered off-hook by the system.
2. The time between the release of the trunk and the reseizure of the trunk is programmable from 4-120 seconds
(60 seconds as set in default).
3. The number of times a Timed Queue will occur is programmable from 1-7 times (3 times as set in default).
When the programmed number of attempts is reached, Timed Queue will be canceled.
4. Timed Queue is canceled if a station user either lifts the handset or presses the Speaker key while this feature
is activated.
5. When a Timed Queue occurs and ringback tone is supplied to the station, the station user should immedi-
ately lift the handset when the called party answers. This operation cancels the Timed Queue; therefore, the
period of ringback tone will not time out.
6. The combined maximum number of Timed Queues set and Trunk Queuing Outgoing set cannot exceed 32.
When the maximum is reached and an attempt to access Timed Queue is made, Multiline Terminals with
an LCD will receive a visual and audible indication.
7. If all trunks are busy when reseizure is attempted, the system waits for a trunk in the same trunk route to
become idle.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIMED REMINDER
TIMED REMINDER
General Description
This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call stations at specified times. Upon answer-
ing, the station is connected to a recorded announcement or music source.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To set Timed Reminder
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone from the primary extension.
2. Dial the Timed Reminder feature access code or press the Timed Reminder feature access key and receive
feature dial tone.
3. Dial the desired reminder time in military format.
4. Receive service set tone.
5. Restore the handset.
To cancel Timed Reminder
1. Go off-hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Timed Reminder cancellation code, or press the Timed Reminder feature access key and * key.
3. Receive service set tone.
4. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. The time is entered on a 24-hour basis in 1 minute increments.
2. A maximum of 32 stations can set the same reminder time. When the number of settings exceeds 32, the
excess stations will automatically be set to 5 minutes prior to the time set at the other 32 stations.
3. Timed Reminder attempts, whether successful or not, can be printed out at a locally provided printer. When
a Timed Reminder is set or canceled, a printout is provided.
4. The ringing signal is the same as Station-to-Station calls, and its time can be assigned from 4 sec. to 32 sec.
(programmable) on a system basis. The default is 28-32 seconds.
5. The Timed Reminder will ring a station in Do Not Disturb.
6. When setting or canceling has been completed, service set tone is heard as confirmation.
7. When a Timed Reminder is answered, either music or announcement is provided to the station. Either a
DAT circuits of MP card or 2DAT/4DAT card (as an internal announcement source), or COT card (with
locally provided music or announcement source) is required. As an option, a PN-DK00 (or built-in DK00
in MP) can be programmed to provide a contact closure for starting the external announcement or music
source when used in conjunction with a COT card.
When providing the internal announcement via DAT card, multiple connections can be made to the an-
nouncement card. Secondary station users cannot be connected to the beginning of the message.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 308
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIMED REMINDER
8. The number of Timed Reminder attempts is programmable in system data from 1 to 5 times, when the called
station does not answer.
9. If the station does not answer, is busy, in Line Lockout, or ringing, recalling is initiated 1 minute later. When
each call results in failure, it is printed out at the printer. Additionally, when the final attempt results in fail-
ure, a buzzer is sounded at the printer.
10. An AP00 card is required for connection to a printer.
11. After a Timed Reminder is set, the setting cannot be verified. A simple procedure is to reset the Timed Re-
minder. Only one Timed Reminder is available per station.
12. Timed Reminder calls will not be rerouted by Call Forwarding or other features.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK - DIRECT APPEARANCES
TRUNK - DIRECT APPEARANCES
General Description
This feature allows Multiline Terminal users the ability to access a C.O. line or E&M Tie Line without dialing
an access code. For this feature, trunks must be assigned to the line keys on the Multiline Terminal. Incoming
calls on C.O. lines can be answered on the appropriate trunk line appearance.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals.
Operating Procedure
To make an outgoing call
1. Press the desired line key.
2. Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone from outside exchange.
3. Dial the desired number.
To answer an incoming call
1. Press the ringing line key.
2. Lift the handset.
3. Answer the incoming call.
To transfer an incoming call using the Trunk Appearance Hold key
1. Press the ringing line key, lift the handset, and answer the incoming call.
2. Press the TAH key (Trunk Appearance Hold), and receive dial tone. (TAH key and dial tone/no tone are set
by system data.) The Trunk-Direct Appearance key blinks in red.
3. Dial the target station number for transferring the call by voice call or by ringing.
4. Restore handset before the target station answers.
The line key remains at held state and the ringing to the target station stops.
The target station can answer the held call by pressing the applicable line key on the Multiline Terminal.
OR
Press Transfer key and restore handset.
The line key lights in red and the ringing to the target station goes on.
When the target station answers the ringing, the held call is connected to the target station.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 310
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK - DIRECT APPEARANCES
Service Conditions
1. The Multiline Terminal with 16-line buttons has 15 available line keys which can be assigned as Trunk-
Direct Appearances. The Multiline Terminal with 8-line buttons has 7 available line keys which can be as-
signed as Trunk-Direct Appearances.
2. The following features are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Outgoing call connection restriction
Conference
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Call Transfer
Save and Repeat
Broker's Call
•
•
•
•
•
•
Code Restriction
Delayed Ringing
Hold
Call Park
Last Number Redial
Station Speed Dialing
3. When an outgoing call is placed, the following restrictions apply:
•
•
•
Trunk Queuing Outgoing is not available.
System Speed Dialing cannot be used.
Account Codes may be entered using the function key programmed for Account Code entry, or Account
Codes can be dialed from second dial tone.
4. The LED associated with the line key will be lit red when the trunk is busy, and green when being used by
the station that selected that trunk.
5. Trunks assigned as Trunk-Direct Appearance on Multiline Terminals can also be assigned to ring at Atten-
dant Consoles and Trunk Answer any Station.
6. For further information, refer to the Flexible Line Key Assignment and Flexible Ringing Assignment fea-
tures.
7. When transferring the call of line key, it can be specified by system data programming whether a dial tone
is sent or not by pressing TAH key.
8. To set Exclusive Hold to a call of a line key by the TAH key assigned to a programmable key, press Feature
key first, then press the TAH key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK QUEUING - OUTGOING
TRUNK QUEUING - OUTGOING
General Description
This allows a station user, upon encountering a busy signal on a trunk, to dial a feature access code and enter a
first-in, first-out queue. As soon as an outgoing trunk becomes available, stations in the queue will be called
back on a first-in, first-out basis.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
From Single Line Telephones
• When Least Cost Routing is not provided
1. Dial the trunk access code and receive busy tone.
2. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press hook switch) and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the Trunk Queuing-Outgoing feature access code and receive service set tone.
4. Replace the handset.
5. When a trunk becomes idle, the station is recalled.
• When Least Cost Routing is provided
1. Dial the trunk access code and receive PBX dial tone.
2. Dial the desired number and receive busy tone.
3. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press hook switch) and receive feature dial tone.
4. Dial the Trunk Queuing-Outgoing feature access code and receive service set tone.
5. Replace the handset.
6. When the trunk becomes idle, the station is recalled. Once connected to the trunk, the system automatically
redials the number.
From Multiline Terminals
• When Least Cost Routing is not provided
1. Dial the trunk access code and receive busy tone.
2. Press the assigned CALL BACK key and receive service set tone.
3. Replace the handset.
• When Least Cost Routing is provided
1. Dial the trunk access code and receive PBX dial tone.
2. Dial the desired number and receive busy tone.
3. Press the assigned CALL BACK key and receive service set tone.
4. Replace the handset.
5. When the trunk becomes idle, the station is recalled. Once connected to the trunk, the system will automat-
ically redial the number.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 312
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK QUEUING - OUTGOING
Service Conditions
1. Once an outgoing trunk becomes available, the user's station will ring for 30 seconds. If not answered within
that time, the station is automatically dropped from the queue.
2. When this feature is utilized in conjunction with System Speed Dialing or Least Cost Routing, the system
automatically dials out the called subscriber number when the handset is lifted.
3. If the user wishes to remove himself from the queue prior to being recalled, a Trunk Queuing-Outgoing can-
cellation code must be dialed.
4. Individual stations may only initiate one outgoing Trunk Queue at a time. Subsequent attempts result in a
reorder tone.
5. Stations may be restricted from using this feature in Class of Service.
6. This feature is not available on an Attendant Console.
7. Maximum number of simultaneous Trunk Queues-Outgoing per system is 32.
8. Call Pickup group cannot be used to answer a call directed to another station using the Trunk Queuing-Out-
going feature.
9. The Trunk Queuing-Outgoing Call Back will return to the originating station, not to the Call Forwarding
terminating station.
10. Account Code information can be recorded on Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) when used in
conjunction with Trunk Queuing-Outgoing.
11. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature will not be available.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION
General Description
This feature provides any station user with the ability to conference together two outside trunk calls and abandon
the connection without dropping the Trunk-to-Trunk Connection.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To establish a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection from a Single Line Telephone
1. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). The original call is placed on Consultation
Hold and feature dial tone is received.
2. Dial the applicable trunk access code.
3. Dial the desired number and wait for the party to answer.
4. Press the FLASH key (or momentarily press the hookswitch). A Conference is now in progress.
OR
Restore the handset. The original caller and the second party are now connected.
To establish a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection from a Multiline Terminal
1. Press the Transfer key. The original call is placed on Consultation Hold and feature dial tone is received.
2. Dial the applicable trunk access code.
3. Dial the desired number and wait for the party to answer.
4. Press the Conf key. A Conference is now in progress.
OR
Restore the handset. The original caller and second party are now connected.
To establish a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection from an Attendant Console
1. Attendant answers an incoming call.
2. Dial the applicable trunk access code. The original party is placed on Consultation Hold.
3. Dial the desired number.
4. Press the RLS key. The original caller and second party are now connected.
Service Conditions
1. The initiating station may hang up at any time. The additional two parties will not be disconnected.
2. At least one of the two trunks must provide a release signal (some loop start trunks do not provide any signal
after the distant party abandons the call).
3. This feature may be restricted to individual stations in system data programming.
4. If an originating Single Line Telephone encounters a busy or no answer condition after dialing out to Con-
ference a third party, the originating party can be reconnected to held caller by providing a hookflash or by
pressing the FLASH key to establish a Conference, and a second hookflash to release the last party called.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 314
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION
5. If an originating Single Line Telephone encounters a busy condition because all trunks are busy, a single
hookflash will return to the first trunk.
6. If an originating Multiline Terminal user encounters a busy or no answer condition after dialing to confer-
ence a third party, the Recall key can be used to return to feature dial tone to allow making another call, or
to allow pressing the Transfer key to return to the original party.
7. Stations and Attendants can establish a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection either before or after the distant station
answers.
8. There is no limitation on the number of Trunk-to-Trunk Connections in the system.
9. Trunk-to-Trunk Connection can be restricted by Trunk-route-to-Trunk-route restriction assignments.
10. Recalls will apply to a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection except where answer supervision is provided (i.e. second
trunk is a tie line).
11. Pressing the Answer key after the second call is established allows the station user to return to the original
line, resulting in a Broker's Call.
12. Stations cannot re-enter a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection once they have established the connection.
13. After a Trunk-to-Trunk Connection is established, both trunks are released when a disconnect signal is re-
ceived by either trunk.
14. If the system is designated as KF registration, this feature will not be available.
15. The AMP trunk can be connected to tandem connection on trunk route basis in system data programming,
a maximum of 16 ports per FP, 64 ports per system.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
General Description
The Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a prearranged group of sta-
tions. Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within the group, based on which terminal has
been idle the longest period of time. Stations may log on/log off from the UCD group. Supervisor stations may
monitor conversations of agents.
Station Application
Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones.
Operating Procedure
Refer to individual UCD sub-features for details on station operating procedures.
Service Conditions
1. A maximum of 16 UCD groups may be assigned per system. Each UCD group is assigned a pilot number.
Calls directed to the pilot number are directed to that UCD group.
2. Up to 60 stations may be programmed per UCD group and up to 512 stations or 256 Multiline Terminals
can be used per system (if expansion memory is used in MP, up to 512 Multiline Terminals can be used).
3. Assignment of UCD groups is performed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or Cus-
tomer Administration Terminal (CAT).
4. UCD groups consist of a pilot station and one or more member stations. Hunting is initiated in a circular
fashion, and then based on which member has been idle the longest period of time.
5. If all stations within the UCD group are busy, incoming calls may be serviced in the following ways:
•
•
•
•
Remain in queue until an agent becomes available (Ringback Tone provided).
Immediately overflow to another group, to a station, or to the Attendant.
Remain in queue until an agent becomes available (Delay Announcement or Music on Hold provided).
Remain in queue for a preset time (Ringback Tone, Delayed Announcement, or Music on Hold provid-
ed), then overflow to another group, to a station, or to the Attendant.
6. When the pilot station has set Call Forwarding - All Calls, incoming calls to the UCD group will be trans-
ferred to the destination of that Call Forwarding - All Calls setting.
7. A UCD group number can be used as the destination station of Direct Inward Termination (DIT), or as a
designated Night Service station.
8. A UCD group number can be assigned as the destination station of Off - Hook Alarms, Priority Calls, and
Attendant Night Transfer.
9. UCD group pilot numbers should not be placed in Station Hunting groups. The Station Hunting feature
would take priority over the UCD function.
10. Two types of traffic measurements can be provided for UCD:
a. UCD group Peg Count
•
•
•
Count of incoming calls
Count of answered calls
Count of abandoned calls
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
Busy In/Busy Out - UCD
•
•
Count of waiting calls
Count of all busy calls
b. UCD station Peg count
Count of answered calls
•
11. Upon initial installation, or after a system initialization (reset), each agent must lift and restore handset (of
their station) to begin receiving calls for the UCD group.
Busy In/Busy Out - UCD
General Description
This feature allows an agent in a UCD group to log their station onto or off of the group. This allows the system
to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the UCD group goes to that station or not. This prevents
incoming calls from being directed to stations at which no agent is available.
Station Application
Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones.
Operating Procedure
To log off (busy out) of a UCD station
1. Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the log off (busy out - set) feature access code, or press the LOG OFF key.
3. Restore the handset.
To log on (cancel busy out) to a UCD station
1. Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the log on (busy out - cancel) feature access code, or press the LOG ON key.
3. Restore the handset.
Service Conditions
1. Any agent may log off (busy out) or log on (cancel busy out). When an agent has activated log off (busy
out), any call targeted at the UCD group will bypass that agent. Calls directed to the specific station number
will ring at the agent position.
2. The agent may originate calls while in log off (busy out) mode.
3. The agent can log off (busy out) their station while idle, or while on an incoming outside call. When that
call is completed, the station is logged off (busy out).
4. The agent can log on/off from the secondary extension by dialing the log on/log off feature access code. The
LOG ON/LOG OFF key is not available for the secondary extension.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
Call Waiting Indication - UCD
Call Waiting Indication - UCD
General Description
This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to a UCD group is placed in queue, due to an
“all agents busy” condition. An external relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline Terminal can be
used to provide Call Waiting Indication.
Station Application
Multiline Terminals assigned with a Call Waiting (CW) Lamp.
Operating Procedure
No operating procedure is necessary. Indication is automatic, once it is assigned.
Service Conditions
1. A PN-DK00 (or built-in DK00 in MP) is required to provide the external relay control when an external
indicator is used.
2. There is no limit to the number of appearances of a CW lamp assigned to Multiline Terminals. One CW
lamp per group is available.
3. On a per system basis, the option is available to select how many calls in queue causes the CW lamp to flash.
Default setting is one. The LED lights steady until the set threshold count is reached, at which time it begins
to flash.)
4. Provision of ringing on a CW key is controlled on a per station basis.
5. The interruption rate of the external relay control is programmable, on a per system basis, as follows:
•
•
•
•
30 IPM
60 IPM
120 IPM
Steady
This interruption rate is the same as the rate used for TAS (Trunk Answer Any Station).
Delay Announcement - UCD
General Description
This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller placed in queue to a
UCD group. A single announcement, or two separate announcements, can be provided.
Station Application
None.
Operating Procedure
Operation is automatic, once system programming is assigned.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 318
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
Hunt Past No Answer - UCD
Service Conditions
1. A Delay Announcement service can be provided for DIT, DID or a trunk call transferred by a station user
or the Attendant to a UCD Group. Internal calls or Station-to-Station transferred calls to the UCD Group
can go into the UCD queue but do not receive the Delay Announcement.
2. The following configurations are available when using Delay Announcement:
a. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a Delay Announcement, followed
by Music-on-Hold (if provided), until an agent is available or the caller hangs up.
b. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a Delay Announcement, followed
by Music-on-Hold (if provided) for a programmed interval, then followed by repetition of the Delay
Announcement. This process repeats until an agent in the UCD group is available on the caller hangs
up.
c. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a first Delay Announcement,
followed by Music-on-Hold (if provided). After a pre-programmed interval, the caller then hears a
second Delay Announcement, followed again by Music-on-Hold. The second Delay Announcement
and Music-on-Hold are then repeated at the pre-programmed interval time until an agent becomes
available or the caller hangs up.
d. After being in queue for a predetermined time, the caller receives a first Delay Announcement
followed by Music-on-Hold (if provided). After a pre-determined interval time, the system checks to
see if an overflow destination has been assigned for the incoming trunk route. If assigned, and the
destination is available (idle), the call overflows to the destination. If not assigned, or the destination
is busy, the call remains in queue for the predetermined interval time and the system then checks
again for overflow assignment. For the latter case, if repetition of first announcement is set, or second
announcement is made available, that announcement will be played.
Note: Repeat of the first announcement or receipt of second announcement is only available when the overflow
destination for the trunk route is busy (not available).
3. Overflow out of queue causes the caller to be removed from the queue. This means that if the overflow des-
tination (out of queue) is another UCD group, the caller is placed at the end of that queue (if all agents are
busy) and is no longer in queue for the first group.
4. One DAT (Digital Announcement Trunk) circuit is required for each Delay Announcement. MP card in-
cludes 2DAT circuit and 2DAT/4DAT card provides 2/4 DAT circuits.
5. Delay Announcements cannot be shared between groups. Each group must have their own set of Delay
Announcements.
6. Multiple DAT circuits may be assigned for 1st or 2nd Delay Announcement function to the same UCD
group, when warranted by high traffic rates into the group.
7. When a UCD station becomes available, the caller is immediately connected to the station, even if the re-
corded announcement is in progress.
8. Incoming call billing to the outside party starts when the first recorded announcement begins.
Hunt Past No Answer - UCD
General Description
This feature allows calls targeted at a UCD group to hunt past an agents station, after a no answer condition, if
the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable (or not available) to answer the call.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
Immediate Overflow - UCD
Station Application
Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the Call-Forwarding-No Answer Features and Specifications for details on setting the No Answer for-
warding condition.
Service Conditions
1. This feature uses Call Forwarding-No Answer (to another UCD member) to enable a call to an agent that
fails to answer, to hunt past that agent, to the next agent.
2. Calls directed to the agents primary extension number will also forward (or a no-answer condition) to the
next agent.
3. It is recommended, when this feature is used, that the Call Forwarding-No Answer and the Call Forwarding-
Busy Line features be separately assigned (use different access codes and keys).
Immediate Overflow - UCD
General Description
This feature allows a call directed to a UCD group to immediately overflow to another UCD group, upon en-
countering an “all agents busy” condition.
Station Application
All UCD Pilot Stations.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the Call Forwarding-Busy Line Features and Specifications for details on setting the forwarding when
busy condition.
Service Conditions
1. This feature uses the Call Forwarding-Busy Line feature (set on the UCD pilot extension) to immediately
forward the call to another UCD group, upon encountering an all busy condition in the first group.
2. This feature works if the overflow destination is a UCD pilot number.
3. When a call has terminated to UCD group A, and all station in group A are busy, and group B is assigned
as the overflow destination (using Call Forwarding-Busy Line), the call is transferred to group B. When all
the stations are busy in group B, the call queues onto UCD group A.
4. One overflow group can be provided for each UCD group.
5. Overflow is performed only once.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 320
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
Priority Queuing - UCD
Priority Queuing - UCD
General Description
This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis, when the
call enters a UCD queue. When a call is a considered as priority it is placed at the beginning of the queue.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
1. Priority queuing is available on incoming trunk calls. Queue priority is determined on a trunk route, or for
DID Calls, on a station number, basis.
2. If two (or more) priority type calls occur at the same time, the system will place them in queue in a first-in-
first-out order.
Queue Size Control - UCD
General Description
On incoming DID/Tie Line calls, the system can be assigned a threshold which limits the number of calls in
queue. When the queue size threshold is exceeded, incoming callers are connected to busy tone.
Station Application
Not Applicable.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)
Silent Monitor - UCD
Service Conditions
1. The maximum number of queuing in each UCD group (hereinafter called Queue Size) can be specified by
the system data. When the number of queuing calls reaches the preassigned queue size, new calls receive
Busy Tone. Depending on the queue size, the Overflowed UCD call indication on a Multiline Terminal or
on the external indicator is provided as shown below:
Queue Size assigned by system data = S
Number of queuing calls = N
LAMP INDICATION
CONDITIONS
Multiline Terminal
External Indicator
S = 1
Steady on red
Lamp on
1 ≤ N < S
(S ≠ 1)
Steady on red
Lamp off
S ≤ N
(S ≠ 1)
Flashing red
Lamp on
Silent Monitor - UCD
General Description
This feature provides the UCD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to a UCD agent. The silent
monitor function gives no indication (as an option) to either the agent or the calling party.
Station Application
All UCD group agents can be monitored. All UCD group supervisors can monitor.
Operating Procedure
To monitor a conversation/To cancel monitoring (Supervisor only)
1. Lift the handset, or press the Speaker key, and receive extension dial tone.
2. Dial the monitor feature access code, or press the MONITOR key.
3. Dial the extension number to be monitored.
4. Monitor the conversation via the handset or the speaker.
5. Restore the handset, or press the Speaker key to cancel monitoring.
CAUTION: The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone
conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission, may be il-
legal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to imple-
menting any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws
require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or
other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to mon-
itoring or recording a telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Service Conditions
1. Service feature class is used to control which stations are agents and which are supervisors.
2. The default setting in system programming is that one tone is sent to both parties when the monitoring fea-
ture is used. As an option, this tone may be disabled, on a per system basis.
3. The Silent Monitor feature uses a 3-party conference circuit. Therefore, a maximum of 16 monitors can oc-
cur simultaneously, in conjunction with any normal Conference (Three/Four party) in progress.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 322
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP) - VOICE AND DATA
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP) - VOICE AND DATA
General Description
In the numbering plan for a network to be configured through the use of Tie Lines, a Uniform Numbering Plan
(UNP) is employed. When UNP is employed, a station user from any PBX within the network can call a desired
party by using a uniform dialing method based on the UNP.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
The following describes two applications of the UNP:
Station Number
As shown in Figure 1, all the stations of each PBX connected using Tie Lines are assigned a Station Number of
3 or 4 digits, and the location of the PBX can be identified by the first two digits of the Station Number.
When this numbering plan is employed, a station user from any PBX within the network can call a desired party
using a uniform dialing method.
Office Code and Station Number
When this numbering plan is employed, each PBX in the network is assigned a 1, 2, or 3-digit Office Code and
each station in the PBX is assigned a 2, 3, or 4-digit Station Number, as shown in Figure 1. Normally, when
calling another station, the calling station dials as follows:
P+/-
xxx-
xxxx
Access
Code
Office
Code
Station
Number
+:
- :
x :
p :
2nd DT
No Tone
0 - 9
0 - 9
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP) - VOICE AND DATA
2
NEAX2000 IVS
(Main office)
Public
Network
2
NEAX2000 IVS
(Satellite office)
53XX
2
NEAX2000 IVS
(Tributary office)
4XXX
51XX
52XX
Public
Network
6XXX
54XX
• 1, 2 or 3 digits indicate the Office Location
Figure 1 Numbering Plan - Station Numbers
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP) - VOICE AND DATA
2
NEAX2000 IVS
(Main office)
Public
Network
2
NEAX2000 IVS
(Satellite office)
222*
233*
XXXX
2
NEAX2000 IVS
XXXX
(Tributary office)
244*
XXXX
XXXX
Public
Network
XXXX
XXXX
* Office code
Figure 2 Numbering Plan - Office Code and Station Numbers
Service Conditions
1. One to eight digits can be assigned as Station Number.
2. In case of Numbering Plan - Station Numbers, the location of the PBX is identified by either the first digit,
first 2 digits, or first 3 digits of the Station Number.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP) - VOICE AND DATA
3. In case of Numbering Plan - Office Code and Station Numbers, the total number of digits of the Access Code
plus the Office Code can be a maximum of 4, which must be assigned within the network. However, assign-
ment of station numbers of different lengths is allowed, as shown below:
8 - XXX - XXXX
n:max. 8
Station number (1 to n digits)
Office code
Up to 4 digits total
Access code
Example:
8-222-4XXX
8-222-3XX
8-244-4XXX
8-244-2XX
8-233-3XXX
8-233-4XX
4. In case of Numbering Plan - Office Code and Station Numbers, within the same PBX, a station-to-station
call can be performed only by dialing the Station Number.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 326
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS
VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS
General Description
This feature gives the system the versatility to change timing duration using the Maintenance Administration
Terminal (MAT) or the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT). All timing parameters are set initially in the
Resident System Program. These timing parameters can be changed according to the customer's requirements.
Station Application
Not applicable.
Operating Procedure
Refer to the Feature Programming Manual for programming instructions.
Service Conditions
The Feature Programming Manual contains instructions on how to change the following timing durations:
Duration (in sec. unless otherwise marked)
Standard
Parameter
Timing
Variable Timing
Automatic Recall of Attendant transferred Camp-On
and unanswered calls
0.0 - 124.8
(2.4-sec. increments in 2.4 - 33.6 sec.
9.6-sec. increments in 28.8 - 124.8 sec.)
31.2 - 33.6
Elapsed time before Call Forwarding - No Answer
for incoming trunk calls or Attendant Overflow acti-
vation
32 - 36
0 - 120 (4-sec. increments)
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) valid
call timer
20 - 24
8 - 40
Disconnect recognition time for trunks
Recall timing for Exclusive Hold
0.96 - 1.44 0 - 6.72 (0.48-sec. increments)
236 - 240 0 - 396 (4-sec. increments)
Recall timing for Nonexclusive Hold and Call Park
Recall timing after station release for Call Transfer
Periodic Time Indication Tone interval
60 - 64
24 - 28
0 - 396 (4-sec. increments)
0 - 120 (4-sec. increments)
180 - 184 32 - 724 (60-sec. increments)
Automatic cancel time for unanswered external pag-
ing calls
300
60 - 900 (60-sec. increments)
4 - 32 (4-sec. increments)
Reorder tone timeout to enter Line Lockout state and
Off-Hook Alarm
28 - 32
Ringing duration of Automatic Wake Up call (Timed
Reminder)
28 - 32
4 - 5
0 - 32 (4-sec. increments)
2 - 8 (1-sec. increments)
Single digit dialing timer (Timing Start)
Maximum Automatic/Uniform Call Distribution
(ACD/UCD) call waiting time before answer or
abandonment for Peg Count
44 - 52
24 - 32
12 - 136 (4-sec. increments)
8 - 128 (8-sec. increments)
Automatic recall of Camp-On
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS
Duration (in sec. unless otherwise marked)
Standard
Timing
Parameter
Variable Timing
Timing before unanswered Automated Attendant
call forwards
32 - 36
0 - 120 (4-sec. increments)
Interval time between attempts for Timed Queue
Duration of call by Timed Queue
120 - 124 44 - 124 (4-sec. increments)
28 - 32
16 - 124 (4-sec. increments)
1.5, 3, 4.5, 6, 8, 10, or 12
0 - 120 (4-sec. increments)
0 - 120 (4-sec. increments)
0 - 120 (4-sec. increments)
Programmable pause for System and Station Speed
Dialing
1.5
Night Service announcement timer
60 - 64
32 - 36
32 - 36
31.2 - 33.6
Timing of Multiple Call Forwarding - No Answer
(after second forwarding)
Interval time of UCD delay announcement
0.0 - 124.8
(2.4-sec. increments in 2.4 - 33.6 sec.
9.6-sec. increments in 38.4 - 124.8 sec.)
Automatic Recall of Attendant-held calls
Elapsed Time before Call Forward-No Answer for
internal and assisted calls
32 - 36
0 - 120 (4-sec. increments)
Message Replay Timer for Automatic Wake-Up/
Timed Reminder
60 - 64
60 - 64
0 - 396 (4-sec. increments)
0 - 396
Message Relay Timer for Announcement Service
204 - 238
minutes
Forced Disconnection Timer on Tandem Connection
136 - 544 minutes (34-minute increments)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE GUIDE
VOICE GUIDE
General Description
This feature provides a station user with an announcement that informs:
1. The result of the operation when the station user set or canceled the service feature, instead of service set
tone.
2. Identifies which service has been set to the station; such as, Call Forwarding – All Calls, Do Not Disturb or
Message Waiting, when the station goes off-hook, instead of special dial tone.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
No manual operation is required.
Service Conditions
Announcement for the result of the operation when the station user set or canceled the service feature
1. The announcement is provided when the following service features are set or canceled.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding – All Calls/ – Busy Line/ – No Answer
Split Call Forwarding – All Calls/ – Busy Line/ – No Answer
Do Not Disturb
UCD – Busy Out Note
Station Message Schedule Display
Call Back
Note: When UCD - Busy Out is set or canceled by the function key of a Multiline Terminal, the announcement is
not provided.
2. Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) circuits of MP card or a 2DAT/4DAT card are required.
MP card includes two DAT circuits and 2DAT/4DAT card provides 2/4 DAT circuits.
3. After the announcement is provided, the station user will hear reorder tone. The duration of announcement
is specified by the system data programming.
4. This service is effective on the system-wide basis.
Announcement for the status of a station set Call Forwarding – All Calls/Do Not Disturb/Message Waiting
1. There are two separate programmable station status announcements that can be provided to a station User,
after going off-hook. Features are related as below:
•
•
Station has set Call Forwarding - All Calls, Split Call Forwarding - All Calls, or is in Do Not Disturb.
Station has received a Message Wait or Message Reminder notification.
2. A Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) circuit is required for each announcement.
3. When a station user goes off-hook and feature status requires both announcements, the Message Wait an-
nouncement will be heard.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE GUIDE
4. This service is effective on the system-wide basis.
5. A station can originate a call while receiving the announcement.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
General Description
This feature is used to interface the system with a locally provided stand-alone type Voice Mail System (VMS).
The VMS, connected to the system single line circuit (LC), is controlled by sending/receiving DTMF signals
using this LC.
The system can provide the other two types of genuine VMS. The NEAXmail AD-16 is a stand-alone type VMS,
and is connected via a Digital Line Circuit (DLC). The NEAXMail AD-8 is a circuit card type VMS, and is di-
rectly accommodated into the Port Interface Module (PIM) with no interface card.
The VMS's voice mail feature can be used by accessing this VMS directly from an extension. If a station sets
its call forwarding destination to the VMS, calls to this station are connected to the VMS, and the messages can
be registered according to the VMS instruction. In addition, the Message Waiting lamp of the station can be
turned on automatically by the VMS.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To originate a voice mail message
• From a Single Line Telephone
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the voice mail extension number and receive ringback tone.
3. Follow the instructions given by the VMS.
• From a Multiline Terminal with One Touch keys
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Press the One Touch key, to send “Voice Mail extension number + DTMF signal after the Voice Mail Sys-
tem answered (such as mail box number or password)”.
3. Follow the instructions given by the VMS.
To set call forwarding to a voice mail system
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the call forwarding feature access code and receive feature dial tone.
3. Dial the voice mail extension number and receive service set tone.
4. The LCD displays:
[SET xxxx]
VMS: Voice mail extension number
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
Connection when an extension line number whose call forwarding is set to a voice mail system is called
from another station
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone. The LCD displays:
[CF ALL xxx]
VMS: Voice mail extension number
3. Follow the instructions given by the VMS.
To retrieve a voice mail message from the voice mail system
1. Go off hook and receive dial tone.
2. Dial the voice mail extension number or the Message Waiting/Message Reminder retrieve code and receive
ringback tone. The LCD displays:
[
xxx]
VMS: Voice mail extension number
3. Follow the instructions given by the VMS.
Service Conditions
1. The VMS is interfaced to the system through the 4LCD/8LC card. (The 4LCD/8LC card provides discon-
nect supervision in the form of a momentary loop open.)
The NEAXmail AD16 is interfaced to the system through the DLC card.
The NEAXmail AD8 requires no interface card.
2. The system transfers only DTMF signals to the connected VMS. It cannot transfer dial pulses to the system.
3. Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal, DTMF telephone, or the Attendant Console, but
not from DP telephones.
4. When the calling party is connected to the Voice Mail System, only DTMF signals can be sent to the VMS
for registering a message, DP telephones cannot be used.
5. Stations can set Call Forwarding-All Calls, Call Forwarding-No Answer, and Call Forwarding-Busy Line
to the VMS. The system sends out a mail box number to the VMS. Calling a station which has Call For-
warding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS.
6. The DTMF signal prepause, Inter-Digit Pause, and DTMF signal width of the station number automatically
sent out to the VMS from the system are as follows:
•
•
•
Prepause:
Variable from 1sec to 12 sec in 1 second increments
Variable from 32 ms to 240 ms
Inter-Digit Pause:
DTMF signal width:
Fixed at 64 ms or 128 ms
7. A special number of up to 4 digits (including an Inter-Digit Pause) can automatically be added, both before
and after, to the station number that is sent to the VMS from the system. This can be used for a variety of
identification codes as required. Two types of Inter-Digit Pauses can be set per system. One is fixed at 1.5
sec, and the other is programmable from 1.5 sec to 16 sec.
8. The VMS can control the Message Waiting Lamp of the Station set by using the Message Waiting/Message
Reminder feature. The retrieval access code for Message Waiting/Message Reminder is variable and can be
set from 1 to 3 digits, in system programming.
9. When all VMS is busy (assuming the following condition):
Station-A (or outside party)....Calling Party
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 332
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
Station-B....Called Party
Station-B sets Call Forwarding-All Calls/-Busy Line/-No Answer to the VMS.
Station-A (or outside party) makes a call to Station-B.
a. Call Forwarding-All Calls
•
•
Station A hears reorder tone.
Outside party hears busy tone.
b. Call Forwarding-Busy Line
•
•
Station-A hears busy tone, and can set any busy service to station-B.
Outside party hears busy tone.
c. Call Forwarding-No Answer
•
Station-B continues to ring until the VMS becomes idle even after the predetermined time for Call
Forwarding-No Answer has elapsed. When the VMS becomes idle, Station-A is connected to the
VMS.
d. Direct access to VMS
If station-A or outside party accesses the VMS directly, the calling party hears busy tone. Station-
A can set call back to the VMS.
•
10. Multiple Call Forwarding to VMS: When the final destination for any combination of Multiple Call For-
warding is the VMS, calls can be transferred to the VMS. The first forwarded station's number (forwarded
to the VMS) is sent to the VMS. For example, a call is received by Station A, which is forwarded to Station-
B, which is forwarded to Station-C, which is forwarded to VMS. The number of Station-A is sent to the
VMS.
11. Ringing Transfer to an Attendant via the VMS: The system allows the VMS to transfer the station or outside
party to the Attendant and releases before the Attendant answers.
12. When the VMS is recalled, by transferring the call to an unanswered station, the system may be programmed
to send the recalling extension number to the VMS.
13. A maximum of 26 digit extension numbers including DTMF signal after the VMS answered can be pro-
grammed to a One Touch key of a Multiline Terminal.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE MAIL PRIVATE PASSWORD
VOICE MAIL PRIVATE PASSWORD
General Description
Voice Mail Password can be prevented from displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when connected to the
Voice Mail System.
Station Application
All Multiline Terminals with LCD
Operating Procedure
Normal password entry to VMS.
Service Conditions
1. When any connection to Voice Mail (VM) is established, each press, of the Dial Key pad will display * of
the LCD of Multiline Terminal.
2. This feature is assigned on a per tenant basis for VMS ports only.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 334
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER
General Description
This feature has two functions that provide streamlined transfer access to voice mail.
1. One touch access to VMS
When an Attendant transfers an external call to a station, and if the station is busy or unanswered, the
Attendant can transfer the call to a VMS by dialing “9” or by pressing a function key provided for this
feature.
2. Transferring Camp-On call to VMS
When an Attendant sets Camp-On to a busy destination station for an external call, and if the destination
station does not answer by predetermined time, the call can be automatically transferred to a VMS.
Station Application
All stations and Attendant Console.
Operating Procedure
To transfer a call to a VMS with one touch access from a Single Line Telephone
1. While answering an external call, press FLASH key (or momentarily press the hook switch) and receive a
feature dial tone.
2. Dial a desired station number and receive a busy tone.
3. Dial “9” or press a function key assigned for transferring a call to a VMS.
4. Restore the handset.
To transfer a call to a VMS with one touch access from a Multiline Terminal
1. While answering an external call, press Transfer key and receive a feature dial tone.
2. Dial a desired station number and receive a ringback tone or a busy tone.
3. Dial “9” or press a function key assigned for transferring a call to a VMS.
4. Restore the handset.
To transfer a call to a VMS with one touch access from an Attendant
1. While answering an external call, dial a desired station number and receive a ringback tone or a busy tone.
2. Dial “9” or press a function key assigned for transferring a call to a VMS.
3. Press the RELEASE key.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER
To transfer a Camp-on call from an Attendant to a VMS
1. While answering an external call, dial a desired station number and receive a busy tone.
2. Press the RELEASE key.
3. A Camp-On tone is sent and Camp-On is set.
4. If the Camp-On call is not answered by predetermined time, the call will be automatically transferred to the
VMS.
5. Press the RELEASE key.
Service Conditions
1. If all ports in the VMS UCD group are busy (assuming the following conditions):
Station-A (or outside party)....Calling Party
Station-B....Called Party
Station-C....Destination of Call Transfer from Station-B
Station-C does not set Call Forwarding-All Calls, Call Forwarding-Busy Line, or Call Forwarding-No An-
swer to the VMS.
Station-A (or outside party) calls Station B. Station-B presses Transfer key and dials Station-C.
a. Station-C is busy, Station-B hears Busy Tone (BUSYappears in display), and then presses VM
transfer button (or dials 9).
•
•
Station-A (or outside party) hears Music on Hold source.
Station-B hears ROT and does not see CF BUSYin display as if it would if a VM port were avail-
able. Station-B must press Transfer key to return to Calling Party.
b. Station-C is idle, Station-B hears Ringback Tone and presses VM transfer button (or dials 9).
•
Station-A (or outside party) hears Music on Hold until Station-B goes on hook. When Station-B
goes on hook, Station-A (or outside party) hears Ringback Tone.
•
Station-B does not see CF NANSin display as if it would if a VM port were available, but Station-
B sees Station-C number in display instead. If Station-B goes on hook, the call from Station-A (or
outside party) is transferred to Station-C and continues to ring at Station-C until Station Transfer
Recall occurs. The call will return to Station-B.
2. If all ports in the VMS UCD group are busy (assuming the following conditions):
Station-A (or outside party)....Calling Party
Attendant Console....Called Party
Station-C....Destination of Call Transfer from Attendant Console
Station-C does not set Call Forwarding-All Calls, Call Forwarding-Busy Line, or Call Forwarding-No An-
swer to the VMS.
Station-A (or outside party) calls Attendant Console. Attendant Console dials Station-C.
a. Station-C is busy, Attendant Console hears Busy Tone (BUSYappears in display), and then presses
VM transfer button.
•
Station-A (or outside party) hears Music on Hold source.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER
•
Attendant Console does not see CF BUSYin display as if it would if a VM port were available. If
Attendant presses RLS key, the call will Camp-on to Station-C. If it is allowed in system program-
ming (CM08-428) and a VM port becomes available, the Calling Party will automatically transfer
to the VMS when the Attendant Camp-on Recall timer occurs. If no VM port is available or if VMS
Transfer with Camp-on is not allowed, the Calling Party will recall the Attendant Console when the
Attendant Recall timer occurs.
b. Station-C is idle, Attendant Console hears Ringback Tone and presses VM transfer button.
•
Station-A (or outside party) hears Music on Hold until Attendant Console presses RLS key. When
Attendant Console presses RLS key, Station-A (or outside party) hears Ringback Tone.
•
Attendant Console does not see CF NANSin display as if it would if a VM port were available, but
Attendant Console sees Station-C number in display instead. If Attendant Console presses RLS key,
the call from Station-A (or outside party) is transferred to Station-C and continues to ring at Station-
C until Attendant Transfer Recall occurs. The call will return to Attendant Console.
3. Transferring Camp-on calls to VMS is available only from Attendant Consoles.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHISPER PAGE
WHISPER PAGE
General Description
This feature allows a secretary to interrupt the boss in a private way. By pressing a feature key or dialing an
Access Code, the secretary station can voice override the conversation between the boss and another party (sta-
tion or trunk). When the conversation is interrupted, the boss can hear the secretary but the other party is un-
aware of the Voice Override.
Station Application
All stations.
Operating Procedure
To activate the Whisper Page
1. Lift the handset and receive a dial tone.
2. Press the Whisper Page feature access key or dial the access code for the Whisper Page. Dial the desired
station number. A service set tone is transmitted and three-party Conference is established.
3. You can hear the conversation and speak to the station that you called.
To answer the Whisper Page
1. The called party (the boss) presses the Answer key (or presses the hook switch) while the whisper page is
in progress, the original call is put on hold.
A holding tone is not transmitted to the other party of the original call.
2. The called station can then privately talk to the calling station (the secretary).
3. The called station re-presses the Answer key (or presses the hook switch).
4. The called station will return to the original call, while the calling station is put on hold.
If the called station (the boss) hangs up while the Whisper Page is in progress, the original call will be released.
Then a Ringback Tone is transmitted to the calling station and the called station can hear a ringing tone.
If the calling station (secretary) or the other party of the original call hangs up while the Whisper Page is in
progress, the call turns into a two-party connection.
Service Conditions
1. This feature enables a maximum of 16 stations to access simultaneously including the other conference fea-
tures.
2. The calling station and the called station can be defined as the Service Restriction Class.
3. Whisper Page cannot be made from or to an Attendant Console.
4. Whisper Page cannot be set to a station which is calling from an Attendant Console or a station which is set
on Privacy.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
Page 338
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHISPER PAGE
5. Whisper Page can be set to a call in progress with the primary extension, Sub Line, or trunk line appearance.
6. Whisper Page cannot be set to a call in progress with the Sub Line to which Camp-On has been set.
7. When Station-C interrupts the conversation Station-A and Station/Trunk-B, Station-C can hear Station-A
but cannot hear Station/Trunk-B.
And Station-C can talk with only Station-A. (Station/Trunk-B cannot hear the conversation Station-A and
Station-C.)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is for your notes.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
term
APPENDIX 1: D
FIXED FUNCTION KEYS
term
APPENDIX 1: D
FIXED FUNCTION KEYS
Series E
Series III
Description
Answer
Conf
ANS
CNF
To answer a waiting call.
To establish three way conversation.
To activate terminal setup functions and to program One Touch Speed
Dial/Feature Keys.
Feature
FNC
Hold
HOLD
To place an internal or external call on hold.
Recall
Redial
LNR/SPD
RECALL
To terminate established call and re-seize internal dial tone.
To active Last Number Call and Speed Calling.
To control the built-in speaker which can be used for Hands Free dial-
ing/monitoring.
Speaker
Transfer
SPKR
TRF
To transfer established calls to another station, without attendant
assistance.
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
term
APPENDIX 2: LCD D
DISPLAY
term
APPENDIX 2: LCD D
DISPLAY
Description
Series E
Series III
Description
Clock/Calendar Display
10:06 PM
SET
MON 21 APR 1999
10:06 PM TUE 14
Confirmation of service set
Confirmation of service cancel
Attendant Night Transfer
SET
CANCEL
N TRF
CNCL
3000
NXF
3000 Station 3000 was forwarded
from attendant in night-mode
Automatic Recall
(Transfer Recall)
RECALL
TIME
3000
1
2000
RCL 3000
TIME
2000 Recall for transferred call to
station 3000 to station 2000
Automatic Wake-up/Timed
Reminder
Background Music
PROGRAM
PROGRAM 1
Background Music program
number
Call Back
CALL BACK
CF ALL
3000
3000
3010
3000
3010
3000
3010
3010
CB
3000 Recall for call back when sta-
tion 3000 goes idle
Call Forwarding-All Calls
(Calling station)
FDA
3000 Call was forwarded to station
3000
Call Forwarding-All Calls
(Called station)
CF ALL
3020
3020
FDA 3020
FDB
3010 Station 3010 was forwarded
from station 3020
Call Forwarding-Busy Line
(Calling station)
CF BUSY
CF BUSY
CF NANS
CF NANS
PICK UP
3000 Call was forwarded to station
3000
Call Forwarding-Busy Line
(Called station)
FDB 3020
FDN
3010 Station 3010 was forwarded
from station 3020
Call Forwarding-No Answer
(Calling station)
3000 Call was forwarded to station
3000
Call Forwarding-No Answer
(Called station)
3020
3020
FDN 3020
PCK 3020
3010 Station 3010 was forwarded
from station 3020
Call Pickup
(Station answering via Call
Pickup)
3010 Station 3010 called station
3020
Call Pickup
(Calling party)
PICK UP
BUSY
3020
3000
3000
3000
3000
3010
3000
PCK 3020
BSY
3000 Station 3000 picked up call
directed to station 3020
Called Station Status Display
(Busy)
3000 Station 3000 is busy
Called Station Status Display
(Restricted)
RESTRICT
CW SET
RST
3000 Station 3000 is restricted
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
(Calling station)
CW SET
CW
3000 Camp-on was set to station
30000
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
(Called station)
CALL WAITING
CONF
3010 Station 3010 set camp-on
Conference
3010
CNF 3010
3000
(Station during 3-party confer-
ence)
Conference
CONF
CNF
(Station during 4-party confer-
ence)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
term
APPENDIX 2: LCD D
DISPLAY
term
APPENDIX 2: LCD D
DISPLAY (CONTINUED)
Description
Series E
Series III
Description
Day/Night Mode Change by Sta- SET
DAY
SET
SET
DND
DAY
Confirmation of day mode set
Confirmation of day mode set
tion Dialing
SET
NIGHT
NIGHT
Do Not Disturb
(Calling station)
DND
DND
3000
3000 Do not disturb is set to station
3000
Do Not Disturb
3000
3010
DND 3000
3010 Station 3010 was forwarded
from station 3000 in DND
mode
(Transferred destination)
Elapsed Call Timer
0:01:36 DDD
1000
3000
0:01:36 DDD 1000
Hold
(Exclusive Hold)
E-HOLD
HOLD
ICM
EHD
HLD
ICM
3000
Hold
3000
3000
3000
(Non-Exclusive Hold)
Intercom
3000 Call on intercom
(Calling and called party)
Internal Zone Paging with Meet- PAGING
Me (Originator)
PAGING
MSG
OFA
Message Reminder
MESSAGE
3000
3000
3000
3000 Confirmation of message
reminder
Off-hook Alarm
(Transferred destination)
OFF HOOK ALM
RCO
3000 Call was forwarded from sta-
tion 3000 by Off-hook alarm
Room Cutoff
RCO
3000 Call was forwarded from sta-
tion 3000 in Room cutoff-
mode
(Transferred destination)
Stack Dial
REDAIL[*/#] / SPEED
TIMED-Q
-1
RDL[*/#] / SPD-1
82625563
82625563
Timed Queue
(Originator)
TIMED-Q
Confirmation of Timed queue
Voice Call
VOICE CALL
3000
VCL
3000 Voice call to/from station
(Called/Calling party)
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX 3: REGISTRATION OF ID CODES
APPENDIX 3: REGISTRATION OF ID CODES
ID Code Development No. = 00
Ex. Register from "1000" to "1099", as Authorization Code.
ID Pattern Table
registered
1st digit
2nd digit
3rd digit
4th digit
1000
1001
:
0
1
:
8
9
0
:
2
:
0
1
:
8
9
0
1
:
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Purpose
Trunk Restriction
Class
Service Restriction
Class A
Service Restriction
Class B
1009
9
9
0
1
:
1010
1011
:
Service Restriction
Class C
The number of registered ID Codes : 100
The number of ID Code Development Tables : 13
9
1019
:
:
:
0
1
:
1090
1091
:
9
1099
ID Code Development No. = 01-09
Forced Account Codes and DISA Codes will be registered in the same
way as above.
Limitations:
The maximum number of ID Code Development Tables in the system
Without expansion memory
With expansion memory
: 1024
: 3072
The maximum number of ID Pattern Tables in the system
Without expansion memory
With expansion memory
: 1000
: 3000
2
NEAX2000 IVS
Business/Hotel/Data Features and Specifications
NDA-24271, Issue 1.0
Page 344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|